WO2022032925A1 - Display method for input method, and terminal device and computer-readable storage medium - Google Patents

Display method for input method, and terminal device and computer-readable storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022032925A1
WO2022032925A1 PCT/CN2020/130908 CN2020130908W WO2022032925A1 WO 2022032925 A1 WO2022032925 A1 WO 2022032925A1 CN 2020130908 W CN2020130908 W CN 2020130908W WO 2022032925 A1 WO2022032925 A1 WO 2022032925A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
input
display
preset
interface
password
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/130908
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
沈剑锋
包永强
徐巍
刘丽
汪智勇
Original Assignee
深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202010798732.5A external-priority patent/CN111953846A/en
Priority claimed from CN202010804614.0A external-priority patent/CN111949194B/en
Priority claimed from CN202010803797.4A external-priority patent/CN111931155A/en
Priority claimed from CN202010811348.4A external-priority patent/CN111949177B/en
Priority claimed from CN202010811209.1A external-priority patent/CN111949969A/en
Priority claimed from CN202010811210.4A external-priority patent/CN111949957A/en
Application filed by 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 filed Critical 深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Publication of WO2022032925A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022032925A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F21/00—Security arrangements for protecting computers, components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity
    • G06F21/30—Authentication, i.e. establishing the identity or authorisation of security principals
    • G06F21/31—User authentication

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of mobile terminals, and in particular, to an input method display method, a terminal device, and a computer-readable storage medium.
  • various operations such as touch operations are used to realize the convenient use of the smart device.
  • various functions are realized by inputting trigger signals, such as unlocking operation to realize unlocking, and adjustment operation to realize interface. Adjustment.
  • trigger signals such as unlocking operation to realize unlocking, and adjustment operation to realize interface. Adjustment.
  • various functions are realized by inputting a trigger signal based on the input display interface. When the trigger signal is input, the display state of the input display interface does not change, and the display mode is single.
  • the main purpose of this application is to provide an input method display method, a terminal device and a computer-readable storage medium, aiming to solve the problem of realizing various functions by inputting a trigger signal based on an input display interface.
  • the display state of the interface does not change, and the display method is a single problem.
  • the present application provides a method for displaying an input method, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
  • the preset password and the displayed password are triggered according to the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule, and the displayed password is displayed on the lock screen interface, wherein the preset password and the displayed password are different.
  • the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
  • the displayed password is not output.
  • the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
  • the input display interface including a display area and/or an input function area
  • the display area and/or the input function area are adjusted according to the interface adjustment signal, wherein the input function area displays at least one layout display manner according to the interface adjustment signal.
  • the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
  • the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
  • the input display interface displays the corresponding to-be-input style according to the target sending application.
  • Input the message to be sent in the to-be-input style and send it.
  • the present application further provides a terminal device, the terminal device includes: a memory, a processor, and an input method display program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, the When the display program of the input method is executed by the processor, each step of the display method of the input method as described above is implemented.
  • the present application further provides a readable storage medium, on which a display program of an input method is stored, and the display program of the input method is implemented as described above when executed by the processor. Each step of the display method of the input method is described.
  • the display method of the input method proposed by the present application displays an inaccurate display password on the lock screen interface when an unlock operation is detected, thereby increasing the variety of display modes, obtaining the unlock operation triggered based on the input display interface, and according to the
  • the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule trigger the preset password and the displayed password, and the preset password and the displayed password are set differently, so that the user's password input operation on the privacy protection device is different from the traditional single-click input
  • the displayed password on the lock screen interface is not an accurate password, so that others cannot obtain the user's password through the user's input operation, which avoids the problem of privacy leakage caused by others obtaining the user's password through the user's operation or the password information displayed on the screen.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is an architecture diagram of a communication network system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the device structure of the hardware operating environment involved in the solution of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of the first embodiment of the display method of the input method of the application.
  • Fig. 5 is the schematic diagram that double-click is marked as one-time password input
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an unlocking rule setting interface
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of different orders of magnitude between inputting a password and displaying a password
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a prompt message after the unlocking rule is changed.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a tenth embodiment of a display method for an input method according to the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of an eleventh embodiment of an input method display method of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a shortcut toolbar suspended on an input display interface to block the input display interface in the eleventh embodiment
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the eleventh embodiment after detecting that the shortcut function information inserted into a third party is adaptively adjusted according to the overall position of the input keyboard and the shortcut toolbar;
  • 15 is a schematic flowchart of the display method of the input method of the present application in the twelfth embodiment of the input function area partition display;
  • 16 is a schematic diagram of displaying an input keyboard in an input sub-display area and displaying shortcut function information in a function sub-display area in the twelfth embodiment
  • 17 is a schematic flowchart of the thirteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • 19 is a schematic flowchart of a fifteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • 20 is a schematic flowchart of a sixteenth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method according to the present application
  • 21 is a first display mode in which a transmission selection interface is displayed on the information input interface in the sixteenth embodiment of the method for displaying the input method of the present application;
  • 22 is a second display mode in which the transmission selection interface is displayed on the information input interface in the sixteenth embodiment of the method for displaying the input method of the present application;
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic flowchart of a seventeenth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method of the present application.
  • 24 is a schematic flowchart of an eighteenth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method of the present application
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic flowchart of the nineteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic flowchart of displaying characters in a display mode corresponding to a preset rule according to the nineteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
  • 27 is a schematic flowchart of the twentieth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-first embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • 29 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • 30 is a schematic diagram showing that the character correction type in the twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the application is to delete characters;
  • 31 is a schematic diagram showing that the character correction type is recovery characters in the twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the application;
  • 32 is a schematic flowchart of a twenty-third embodiment of a display method for an input method provided by the present application.
  • 34 is a schematic flowchart of a twenty-fifth embodiment of a display method for an input method provided by the present application.
  • 35 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-sixth embodiment of the display method of the input method provided by the present application.
  • 36 is a reference diagram of a verification interface for user interaction involved in the solution of the embodiment of the present application.
  • 38 is a schematic diagram of a user interface in the twenty-seventh embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • 39 is a schematic diagram of another user interface in the twenty-seventh embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • 40 is a schematic diagram of another user interface in the twenty-seventh embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of step S410 in FIG. 37 in the twenty-eighth embodiment of the input method display method of the present application;
  • FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of step S410 in FIG. 37 in the twenty-ninth embodiment of the input method display method of the present application;
  • FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of step S410 in FIG. 37 in the thirtieth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
  • FIG. 44 is a schematic flowchart after step S420 in the thirty-third embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • Terminal devices can be implemented in various forms.
  • the terminal equipment described in this application may include mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, palmtop computers, personal digital assistants (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), portable media players (Portable Media Player, PMP), navigation devices, Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers, as well as stationary terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • PMP portable media players
  • Navigation devices Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers
  • Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers
  • stationary terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) unit 101, a WiFi module 102, an audio output unit 103, a /V (audio/video) input unit 104, sensor 105, display unit 106, user input unit 107, interface unit 108, memory 109, processor 110, and power supply 111 and other components.
  • RF Radio Frequency, radio frequency
  • the radio frequency unit 101 can be used for receiving and sending signals during transmission and reception of information or during a call. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is processed by the processor 110; in addition, the uplink data is sent to the base station.
  • the radio frequency unit 101 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like.
  • the radio frequency unit 101 can also communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication.
  • the above-mentioned wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communication), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service, General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000 , Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, frequency division duplexing long term evolution) and TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, time division duplexing long term evolution) and so on.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communication
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • CDMA2000 Code Division Multiple Access 2000
  • Code Division Multiple Access 2000 Code Division Multiple Access 2000
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • TD-SCDMA Time Division-S
  • WiFi is a short-distance wireless transmission technology
  • the mobile terminal can help users to send and receive emails, browse web pages, access streaming media, etc. through the WiFi module 102, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access.
  • FIG. 1 shows the WiFi module 102, it can be understood that it is not a necessary component of the mobile terminal, and can be completely omitted as required within the scope of not changing the essence of the invention.
  • the audio output unit 103 can store the data received by the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 or stored in the memory 109.
  • the audio data is converted into audio signal and output as sound.
  • the audio output unit 103 may also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 100 (eg, call signal reception sound, message reception sound, etc.).
  • the audio output unit 103 may include a speaker, a buzzer, and the like.
  • the A/V input unit 104 is used to receive audio or video signals.
  • the A/V input unit 104 may include a graphics processor (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) 1041 and a microphone 1042, and the graphics processor 1041 responds to still pictures or images obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode.
  • the image data of the video is processed.
  • the processed image frames may be displayed on the display unit 106 .
  • the image frames processed by the graphics processor 1041 may be stored in the memory 109 (or other storage medium) or transmitted via the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 .
  • the microphone 1042 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 1042 in a telephone call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, etc.
  • the processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format that can be transmitted to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 101 for output in the case of a telephone call mode.
  • the microphone 1042 may implement various types of noise cancellation (or suppression) algorithms to remove (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and transmitting audio signals.
  • the mobile terminal 100 also includes at least one sensor 105, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors.
  • the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor, wherein the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 1061 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor can close the display panel 1061 and the display panel 1061 when the mobile terminal 100 is moved to the ear. / or backlight.
  • the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (usually three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when it is stationary.
  • the display unit 106 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user.
  • the display unit 106 may include a display panel 1061, and the display panel 1061 may be configured in the form of a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), an Organic Light-Emitting Diode (OLED), or the like.
  • LCD Liquid Crystal Display
  • OLED Organic Light-Emitting Diode
  • the user input unit 107 may be used to receive input numerical or character information, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal.
  • the user input unit 107 may include a touch panel 1071 and other input devices 1072 .
  • the touch panel 1071 also referred to as a touch screen, can collect the user's touch operations on or near it (such as the user's finger, stylus, etc., any suitable object or accessory on or near the touch panel 1071). operation), and drive the corresponding connection device according to the preset program.
  • the touch panel 1071 may include two parts, a touch detection device and a touch controller.
  • the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts it into contact coordinates, and then sends it to the touch controller.
  • the touch panel 1071 can be realized by adopting at least one type of resistive type, capacitive type, infrared ray, and surface acoustic wave.
  • the user input unit 107 may also include other input devices 1072 .
  • other input devices 1072 may include, but are not limited to, one or at least one of physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), trackballs, mice, joysticks, etc. limited.
  • the touch panel 1071 can cover the display panel 1061, and when the touch panel 1071 detects a touch operation on or near it, it transmits it to the processor 110 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 110 determines the type of the touch event according to the touch event.
  • Type provides corresponding visual output on display panel 1061 .
  • the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 are used as two independent components to realize the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, but in some embodiments, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 may be integrated The input and output functions of the mobile terminal are implemented, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the interface unit 108 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected to the mobile terminal 100 .
  • external devices may include wired or wireless headset ports, external power (or battery charger) ports, wired or wireless data ports, memory card ports, ports for connecting devices with identification modules, audio input/output (I/O) ports, video I/O ports, headphone ports, and more.
  • the interface unit 108 may be used to receive input (eg, data information, power, etc.) from an external device and transmit the received input to one or more elements within the mobile terminal 100 or may be used between the mobile terminal 100 and the external Transfer data between devices.
  • the memory 109 may be used to store software programs as well as various data.
  • the memory 109 may mainly include a stored program area and a stored data area, wherein the stored program area may store an operating system, an application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required for at least one function, and the like; Data created by the use of the mobile phone (such as audio data, phone book, etc.), etc.
  • memory 109 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid state storage device.
  • the processor 110 is the control center of the mobile terminal, uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal, runs or executes the software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 109, and calls the data stored in the memory 109. , perform various functions of the mobile terminal and process data, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor, wherein the application processor mainly processes the operating system, user interface, and application programs, etc., and the modem
  • the processor mainly handles wireless communication. It can be understood that, the above-mentioned modulation and demodulation processor may not be integrated into the processor 110 .
  • the mobile terminal 100 may also include a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
  • a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
  • the power supply 111 may be logically connected to the processor 110 through a power management system, so as to manage charging, discharging, and power consumption management through the power management system and other functions.
  • the mobile terminal 100 may also include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be described herein again.
  • FIG. 2 is an architecture diagram of a communication network system provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication network system is an LTE system of universal mobile communication technology.
  • 201 E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network, Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core) 203 and the operator's IP service 204.
  • E-UTRAN Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network
  • EPC Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core
  • the UE 201 may be the above-mentioned terminal 100, which will not be repeated here.
  • E-UTRAN 202 includes eNodeB 2021 and other eNodeB 2022 and the like.
  • the eNodeB 2021 can be connected to other eNodeBs 2022 through a backhaul (eg X2 interface), the eNodeB 2021 is connected to the EPC 203 , and the eNodeB 2021 can provide access from the UE 201 to the EPC 203 .
  • a backhaul eg X2 interface
  • EPC 203 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity, Mobility Management Entity) 2031, HSS (Home Subscriber Server, Home Subscriber Server) 2032, other MME 2033, SGW (Serving Gate Way, Serving Gateway) 2034, PGW (PDN Gate Way, packet data network gateway) 2035 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function, policy and charging functional entity) 2036 and so on.
  • MME2031 is a control node that processes signaling between UE201 and EPC203, and provides bearer and connection management.
  • the HSS2032 is used to provide some registers to manage functions such as the home location register (not shown in the figure), and to store some user-specific information about service characteristics, data rates, etc.
  • PCRF2036 is the policy and charging control policy decision point of service data flow and IP bearer resources, it is the policy and charging execution function A unit (not shown) selects and provides available policy and charging control decisions.
  • the IP service 204 may include the Internet, an intranet, an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services.
  • IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem
  • the display method, device and storage medium of an input method proposed by the embodiments of the present application by detecting whether the user's unlocking operation is a preset unlocking rule, the unlocking operation is divided into a decryption unlocking operation and an interference unlocking operation. Enter the password normally. If the unlocking operation is interfered, the unlocking operation is determined to be invalid when the interference function is not enabled, or the interference code is entered when the interference mode is enabled, and the terminal will automatically filter the interference code when comparing the password.
  • the display method of the input method or the traditional password input method is automatically selected, which realizes the change of the user's interactive mode of password input and displays the password value with interference information when the password is input. It avoids the problem of privacy leakage caused by others obtaining user passwords through user operations or password information displayed on the screen.
  • FIG. 3 is a terminal device of the hardware operating environment involved in the solution of the embodiment of the present application (wherein the terminal device may be a privacy protection device, wherein the privacy protection device may be composed of a separate privacy protection device, or may be a It is formed by combining other devices and privacy protection devices) a schematic diagram of the structure.
  • the terminal device may be a privacy protection device, wherein the privacy protection device may be composed of a separate privacy protection device, or may be a It is formed by combining other devices and privacy protection devices
  • the terminal in the embodiment of the present application may be a fixed terminal or a mobile terminal, such as a smart air conditioner with networking function, a smart light bulb, a smart power supply, a smart speaker, an autonomous vehicle, a personal computer (PC), a smart phone, a tablet Computers, e-book readers, portable computers, etc.
  • a smart air conditioner with networking function such as a smart air conditioner with networking function, a smart light bulb, a smart power supply, a smart speaker, an autonomous vehicle, a personal computer (PC), a smart phone, a tablet Computers, e-book readers, portable computers, etc.
  • the terminal may include: a processor 1001, for example, a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU), a network interface 1004, a user interface 1003, a memory 1005, and a communication bus 1002.
  • the communication bus 1002 is used to realize the connection and communication between these components.
  • the user interface 1003 may include a display screen (Display), an input unit such as a keyboard (Keyboard), and the optional user interface 1003 may also include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface.
  • the network interface 1004 may include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface (eg, wireless fidelity WIreless-FIdelity, WIFI interface).
  • the memory 1005 may be high-speed RAM memory, or may be non-volatile memory, such as disk memory.
  • the memory 1005 may also be a storage device independent of the aforementioned processor 1001 .
  • the terminal may also include a camera, an RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) circuit, a sensor, an audio circuit, and a WiFi module; an input unit, a display screen, and a touch screen; the network interface can be selected in addition to WiFi in the wireless interface, Bluetooth, Probes, etc.
  • sensors such as light sensors, motion sensors and other sensors.
  • the light sensor may include an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor; of course, the mobile terminal may also be configured with other sensors such as a gyroscope, a barometer, a hygrometer, a thermometer, an infrared sensor, etc., which will not be repeated here.
  • terminal structure shown in FIG. 3 does not constitute a limitation on the terminal, and may include more or less components than the one shown, or combine some components, or arrange different components.
  • the input method display method includes:
  • Step S100 opening an input display interface with an input keyboard on the terminal device, and acquiring an unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface;
  • the privacy protection device acquires an unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface.
  • the input display interface includes at least one of an unlock interface, a screen-off interface, an application interface, a system interface, and a setting interface.
  • the privacy protection device includes mobile phones, PADs, smart watches and other devices, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the method for the privacy protection device to detect entering the lock screen interface may be, for example, the user presses a preset button to open/close the screen, or It can be a method of waking up to enter the lock screen interface, such as raising a hand, double-clicking, etc., and obtaining the unlock operation triggered by the user on the lock screen interface. It can be a click behavior with different pressures on the pressure-sensitive device.
  • the unlocking operation can be divided into decryption unlocking operation and interference unlocking operation with reference to whether there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to it.
  • the unlocking operation is based on the lock screen.
  • Input keys of the interface such as physical keys or virtual keys displayed on the screen, the input keys may be numeric keys, letter keys, character keys, etc., or a variety of mixed keys.
  • Step S110 triggering a preset password and a displayed password according to the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule, and the displayed password is displayed on the lock screen interface, wherein the preset password and the displayed password are different.
  • the privacy protection device triggers a preset password and a displayed password according to the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule, and the displayed password is displayed on the lock screen interface, wherein the preset password and the displayed password are different.
  • the preset unlocking rule includes the mapping from the unlocking operation of the user to the password entered by the privacy protection device, and also includes the mapping from the unlocking operation of the user to the password displayed on the lock screen of the privacy protection device, see FIG. 5 , as in the preset unlocking rule.
  • the preset unlocking rules can be set and changed by the user, or the preset unlocking rules preset by the system can be used. Set unlocking rules, the preset password is the correct password for unlocking the privacy protection device, which is set by the user.
  • the preset password can be extended to other passwords, and the passwords that the user enters each time on the privacy protection device may not be the same.
  • the preset unlocking rules are still used for processing and the password is displayed on the lock screen interface.
  • the displayed password and the preset password have different properties and/or different orders of magnitude/or different styles/or different contents.
  • the displayed password is different from the preset password, and the difference can be different in attributes.
  • the attributes include letters, graphics, letters, Chinese characters, etc.
  • the preset password can be a number
  • the displayed password includes letters. , Chinese characters and other attributes
  • the difference can also be a different order of magnitude, and the order of magnitude refers to the number of digits of the password contained in the preset password and the display password, see Figure 7, if the preset password is abc123, that is, the order of magnitude is 6, and the display password is The order of magnitude is 9 for ABC112233; the difference may also be a difference in style, such as a difference caused by the mismatch of upper and lower case letters.
  • the displayed password is continuous display or intermittent display or partial display.
  • the displayed password is continuously displayed, the displayed password is continuously displayed on the privacy protection device without performing operations such as hiding, blurring or replacement, and when the displayed password is intermittently displayed, the displayed password is displayed on the privacy protection device
  • the replacement is processed as ***
  • the partial display is a special display of the partial password.
  • the password abc123 is processed as *b*1**.
  • the unlocking operation corresponds to at least one displayed password.
  • the user performs the same unlocking operation every time in order to unlock the privacy protection device.
  • the unlocking operations are the same, the displayed passwords may not be the same, that is, unified unlocking.
  • the operation can correspond to multiple displayed passwords.
  • the displayed password is determined by user selection and/or system preset.
  • the user can adjust the display mode of the displayed password by adjusting the preset unlocking rule, and the display mode of the displayed password can also be determined in a system preset mode.
  • the displayed password is displayed randomly.
  • the displayed password may be displayed randomly and irregularly. For example, whenever an unlocking operation is obtained, a random number of characters are randomly selected from the preset character library to be displayed as the displayed password.
  • the preset unlocking rule corresponds to the input mode of each password character.
  • the preset rule includes the input method of each password character. If the preset rule defines a long-pressing a certain character as the input method of the password character, when the user unlocks the operation by long-pressing the password character, the password characters are entered.
  • a second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed.
  • This embodiment is a refinement step of step S20 in the first embodiment.
  • display methods include:
  • the triggering of the preset password is completed.
  • the privacy protection device determines whether there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to the unlocking operation. If the unlocking operation is a long press, it determines whether the preset unlocking rule includes a long-pressing input method. If there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to the unlocking operation. If the unlocking rule is set, the privacy protection device generates a password corresponding to the unlocking operation, and the password is the password obtained by mapping the unlocking operation through the preset unlocking rule. If the password is the preset password, the triggering of the preset password is completed, When the password is the same as the preset password that can be used to unlock the privacy protection, the triggering of the preset password is completed, and the subsequent privacy protection device can complete the unlocking operation accordingly.
  • the step: if there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to the unlocking operation, then generating the password corresponding to the unlocking operation may further include:
  • the password is not the preset password, it is determined that the input is wrong and the number of wrong input is recorded.
  • the privacy protection device determines that the input is wrong and records the number of errors. When the number of errors reaches the preset number of errors, the privacy protection device switches to the simple mode and outputs a switching prompt. When the preset passwords are different, the privacy protection device determines that the password is incorrect and records the number of errors.
  • the method for obtaining the password and the preset password have been described in the foregoing embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
  • the privacy protection device switches to the normal mode and outputs a switching prompt.
  • the normal mode is the existing simpler but less secure mode, such as clicking to enter a password , the conventional password is displayed on the lock screen interface, and it is relatively easy to unlock.
  • the prompt of the mode switch is output to inform the user to pay attention to changing the input strategy and avoid input errors caused by the user's ignorance of the mode change.
  • the preset error times are parameters set by the user, such as 5 times, 8 times, etc.
  • the current password input mode is switched to the normal mode, so as to prevent the user from being unable to unlock the device due to forgetting the preset standard behavior. situation, while taking into account security, the unlocking operation is more user-friendly.
  • a third embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed.
  • This embodiment is the step in the first embodiment: obtaining an unlocking operation triggered by an input display interface.
  • the pre-steps of the input method include:
  • the step of acquiring the unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface is performed.
  • the privacy protection device detects whether the current environment is a safe environment, and the detection method may be to detect whether the privacy protection device is within the security range pre-defined by the user through a preset positioning device, and it may be whether the network currently connected by the privacy protection device is the user.
  • the network in the preset preset whitelist can also be used to determine whether the current privacy protection device has been connected to a smart device pre-specified by the user, such as a Bluetooth smart device in the home.
  • the prompt of the mode switch is output to inform the user to pay attention to changing the input strategy, so as to avoid input errors caused by the user's ignorance of the mode change.
  • the method of the foregoing embodiment is used to input the password, so as to improve the security.
  • the step of: detecting whether the current environment is a secure environment may include the following steps:
  • the current environment is a safe environment.
  • the privacy protection device obtains the current positioning information, and determines whether the positioning information is within a preset range.
  • the methods for obtaining the current positioning information include GPS positioning, base station positioning, AGPS positioning, and WIFI positioning.
  • the above are the existing positioning information obtaining methods, and the specific implementation methods are not repeated here, and can be selected according to actual use scenarios and use requirements.
  • the preset range refers to the range preset by the user. For example, the user takes his residence and the address of the company as the origin, and two circular ranges with a radius of about 50 meters are used as the preset range. When you return home and enter the company, you will enter a safe environment. As long as it is not within the preset range, it will not be a safe environment, and different password input strategies will be selected according to whether it is a safe environment.
  • step: detecting whether the current environment is a safe environment may further include the following steps:
  • the current environment is a secure environment.
  • the privacy protection device acquires currently connected network information, and determines whether the network information is in the preset whitelist.
  • the currently connected network information can be short-distance transmission network information such as WIFI information, Bluetooth information, etc.
  • the preset whitelist is preset by the user, and includes network information that the user considers safe, such as the user's WIFI information of the residence, and the information in the residence.
  • the Bluetooth information of the speaker is added to the preset whitelist.
  • the current environment is considered to be a safe environment.
  • the above-mentioned WIFI network or Bluetooth speaker is disconnected. It is considered that the current environment is not a safe environment, and the corresponding password input policy is switched according to whether it is a safe environment.
  • a fourth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed.
  • This embodiment is the step in the first embodiment: obtaining the unlocking operation and the preset
  • the pre-steps of the decryption and unlocking operation with the same unlocking rules, the display method of the input method includes:
  • Step c2 Determine a corresponding preset unlocking rule according to the usage mode.
  • the privacy protection device obtains the current usage mode, and determines the corresponding preset unlocking rules according to the usage mode.
  • the usage modes include, for example, complex mode, simple mode, and custom mode, and include corresponding preset unlocking rules in different modes. Rules, when a mode switch occurs, the preset unlocking rules switch together with the mode, such as switching to the complex mode after detecting that the user is in a crowded environment, or after the user turns on the complex mode by himself, the user needs to follow the complex mode.
  • the preset unlocking rules below can complete the unlocking by performing a relatively complex unlocking operation process, and when the user returns home and automatically turns on the easy mode or turns on the easy mode by himself, the user only needs to follow the preset unlocking rules in the easy mode to perform a relatively simple unlocking.
  • the operation process can complete the unlocking.
  • step c2 it may further include:
  • Step c21 prompting the preset unlocking rule when it is detected that the usage mode is changed, or prompting the preset unlocking rule when a password input error is detected.
  • the user When the privacy protection device detects that the usage mode is changed, the user is prompted for the preset unlocking rule, or when the privacy protection device detects an incorrect password input, the preset unlocking rule is prompted. It is understandable that when the usage mode of the privacy protection device is changed, the user may make multiple incorrect inputs because it is unclear that the preset unlocking rules have been changed. To avoid this problem, as shown in Figure 9, when the After the mode is changed, the user is prompted that the preset unlocking rule is changed.
  • the prompt may only prompt the event of the change, or it may prompt special prompting information, such as the prompting information associated with the preset unlocking rule after the change set by the user , so as to prompt the user to be aware of the change of the policy.
  • the prompt timing can also be set when a password input error is detected. When the password is entered incorrectly at least twice, switch to the original use mode.
  • the preset unlocking mode can be flexibly changed to suit the current location of the user. It avoids the difficulty in unlocking the user caused by the change of the preset unlocking method, and improves the user's comfort.
  • the display method of the input method includes:
  • the input display interface includes at least one of an unlock interface, a screen-off interface, an application interface, a system interface, and a setting interface.
  • the privacy protection device acquires an unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface.
  • the privacy protection device includes a mobile phone, a PAD, a smart watch, etc. It is not specifically limited here.
  • the privacy protection device detects that the method for entering the lock screen interface may be, for example, the user presses a preset button to open/close the screen, It can also be a method of waking up to enter the lock screen interface, such as raising a hand, double-clicking, etc., and obtaining the unlocking operation triggered by the user on the lock-screen interface. It can also be a click behavior with different pressures on the pressure-sensitive device.
  • the unlocking operation can be divided into a decryption unlocking operation and an interference unlocking operation with reference to whether it is the same as the preset unlocking rule.
  • the unlocking operations are all based on the lock screen interface.
  • Input keys such as physical keys or virtual keys displayed on the screen, the input keys may be numeric keys, letter keys, character keys, etc. or a variety of mixed keys.
  • the privacy protection device acquires the same decryption and unlocking operation as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation.
  • the preset unlocking rule is the unlocking operation set by the user in the password input settings in advance. For example, different from the traditional method of clicking a button to input a password, the predefined unlocking operation can be double-click, long-press and slide, or Click behaviors with different pressures on the pressure-sensitive device. For example, the preset unlocking rule set by the user is double-click. In the password input, the double-click operation of the button will be input, which is different from the traditional single-click.
  • the decryption and unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation is the part of obtaining the valid input in the unlocking operation.
  • the password corresponding to the decryption and unlocking operation is obtained and displayed on the lock screen interface.
  • the privacy protection device obtains the password corresponding to the decryption and unlocking operation, and displays it on the lock screen interface.
  • the unlocking operations are all based on the input keys of the lock screen interface, so the decryption and unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule corresponds to a password input
  • the privacy protection device Obtain the password input corresponding to the decryption operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule, and display it on the lock screen interface.
  • the display can be a continuous display of the password to help the user judge the progress and accuracy of the input, or it can be displayed after a short period of time. It can be replaced by a certain identifier to help users judge the progress and accuracy of the input while taking into account the protection of others from peeping. Completely prevent others from knowing the password through the screen, and users can choose specific display methods according to their own needs.
  • the privacy protection device determines whether the password is the same as the preset password.
  • the preset password is the password set in advance by the user in the lock screen setting, which is used to compare with the password input by the user. When the two passwords are the same, the verification is successful.
  • the steps are: obtaining the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking.
  • Decryption and unlocking operations and steps with the same rules Obtain the password corresponding to the decryption and unlocking operation, and display the password corresponding to the decryption and unlocking operation on the lock screen interface.
  • the confirmation signal is a method for the user to confirm by himself. Just click the confirm button. This time the click does not judge whether it is the preset unlocking rule. Under this trigger method, the user needs to operate one more step, but the security is higher. The user can choose the trigger method in the setting content. Certainly.
  • the unlocking operation is performed.
  • the privacy protection device When the password is the same as the preset password, the privacy protection device performs an unlocking operation.
  • the user selects double-click as the preset unlocking rule in the password setting of the lock screen in advance, and 7384 is the preset password
  • the actual input password is 7384
  • the user double-clicks 7, clicks 5, double-clicks 3, double-clicks 8, and double-clicks 4 in the preset buttons in the lock screen interface because the unlock operation for button 5 is not a predefined unlock operation, the operation is ignored, the actual input password is 7384, and then the password is compared with the preset password according to the judgment trigger method set by the user, and the unlocking is completed if they are the same.
  • the method of this embodiment is not only applicable to the setting of the screen lock, but also can be used in various situations such as application lock, account password input, etc., all of which can obscure the user's password input operation, so that others cannot know the password through the user operation. Purpose.
  • a password input method with a certain concealment is realized, so that others cannot obtain the user through the user's input operation. password to protect user privacy.
  • a sixth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed, and this embodiment is the step in the first embodiment: obtaining an unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface
  • the post-step of the input method, the display method of the input method includes:
  • the privacy protection device determines whether the interference mode has been turned on.
  • the interference mode is a mode in which the privacy protection device interferes with other unlocking operations in the unlocking operation that are different from the preset unlocking rules (that is, different from the decryption unlocking operation), and the other unlocking operations are called interference unlocking operations in subsequent steps, Different from the preset unlocking rule set by the user, if the user sets double-click as the preset unlocking rule, operations such as clicking and long-pressing are all interference unlocking operations. A corresponding password is generated.
  • the interference mode is turned on, the privacy protection device will generate special interference information for interference unlocking operations different from the preset unlocking rules.
  • the step of obtaining the decryption and unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation is performed;
  • the privacy protection device When the interference mode is not turned on, the privacy protection device performs the step of obtaining the decryption and unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation, that is, the step in the first embodiment: obtaining the unlocking operation with Decryption and unlocking operations with the same preset unlocking rules.
  • the interference mode when the interference mode is not enabled, the privacy protection device may not perform the interference unlocking operation, that is, it does not respond to the interference unlocking operation.
  • the user’s preset password is 7734, then The user can use any operation except double-click to click any button. As long as the whole process includes double-click 7, double-click 7, double-click 3, and double-click 4, the unlocking can be completed, so others cannot obtain the password information from the user's unlocking operation.
  • the interference mode When the interference mode is turned on, obtain the interference unlocking operation that is different from the preset unlocking rule and the decryption unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation;
  • the privacy protection device When the interference mode is turned on, the privacy protection device obtains the interference unlocking operation that is different from the preset unlocking rule and the decryption that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation, and will not repeat operations.
  • the decryption unlocking operation and the interference unlocking operation are equivalent to the steps in the first embodiment and this implementation step: judging whether the interference mode has been turned on, step: when the interference mode is not turned on, execute the obtaining in the unlocking operation and the preset steps. It is assumed that the explanation of the steps of the decryption and unlocking operation with the same unlocking rule will not be repeated here. Through this step, the privacy protection device completes the separation of the unlocking operation into a decryption operation and an interference operation.
  • the interference code corresponding to the interference unlocking operation is obtained and the password corresponding to the decryption unlocking operation with the same preset unlocking rule is obtained, and displayed on the lock screen interface.
  • the privacy protection device obtains the interference code corresponding to the interference unlocking operation and the password corresponding to the decryption unlocking operation with the same preset unlocking rule, and displays it on the lock screen interface.
  • the preset interference code can be a value set by the user in the settings. For example, if the user sets # as the preset interference code in the settings, when the user's unlocking operation is not the preset unlocking rule, a "#" output display will be generated.
  • the preset interference code can also be a value automatically generated by the device, and the value can be a special character, number, letter, etc. The method has been explained in the first embodiment, after obtaining the interference code and password value, it is displayed on the lock screen interface.
  • an interference code is generated for the interference unlocking operation and displayed together with the password, so that others cannot obtain the user's accurate password through the user's input operation and the information displayed on the lock screen interface, which improves the user's privacy and security.
  • the user of the interference mode can choose to do it himself or turn it off, which increases flexibility and is applicable to a wider range of people.
  • a seventh embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed, and the display method of the input method includes:
  • the unlocking operation is performed.
  • the privacy protection device When the privacy protection device receives the confirmation signal, it filters the interference code and retains the password according to the preset unlocking rule.
  • the confirmation signal is a method of self-confirmation by the user. If the user clicks the confirmation button after the input is completed, a confirmation signal is generated, indicating that the user has completed the input. This time, no operation is performed and no judgment is made as to whether it is a predefined unlocking operation.
  • the unlocking rule is generally generated when the user sets the preset interference code, that is, the user sets # as the preset interference code, and then generates the preset unlocking rule for filtering.
  • the preset interference code is the generated value, such as automatically If a preset interference code is generated in the special character library, the contents of the special character library are added to the preset unlocking rules for subsequent filtering operations, and the password is reserved for subsequent comparison operations with the preset password. When it is the same as the preset password, the unlock operation is performed.
  • 7384 is the preset password
  • # is the interference code. Double-click 5, double-click 3, double-click 8, double-click 4, then the currently displayed password and interference code is 7#384.
  • the privacy protection device will lock 7# according to the preset unlocking rule (filter #). 384 to filter, the password actually used for comparison with the preset password is 7384, and the unlock is completed if it is the same as the preset password.
  • the lock screen interface displays the interference code but filters the interference code and compares the password with the password. Yes, the accuracy of the comparison result is not accurate. It will be affected by the jamming code, which takes into account the accuracy of the password while interfering with others.
  • an eighth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed.
  • This embodiment is the step in the first embodiment: obtaining an unlocking operation triggered by an input display interface.
  • the pre-steps of the input method include:
  • the step of acquiring the unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface is performed.
  • the privacy protection device detects whether the current environment is a safe environment, and the detection method may be to detect whether the privacy protection device is within the security range pre-defined by the user through a preset positioning device, and it may be whether the network currently connected to the privacy protection device is the user.
  • the network in the preset preset whitelist can also be used to determine whether the current privacy protection device has been connected to a smart device pre-specified by the user, such as a Bluetooth smart device in the home.
  • the prompt of the mode switch is output to inform the user to pay attention to changing the input strategy, so as to avoid input errors caused by the user's ignorance of the mode change.
  • the method of the foregoing embodiment is used to input the password to improve security.
  • a ninth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed.
  • This embodiment is the step in the first embodiment: judging whether the password and the preset password are not.
  • the display method of the input method includes:
  • the privacy protection device determines that the password is incorrect and records the number of errors.
  • the method of obtaining the password and the preset password have been described in the foregoing embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
  • the privacy protection device switches to the normal mode and outputs a switching prompt.
  • the normal mode is the existing simpler but less secure mode, such as clicking to enter a password , the conventional password is displayed on the lock screen interface, and it is relatively easy to unlock.
  • the prompt of the mode switch is output to inform the user to pay attention to changing the input strategy and avoid input errors caused by the user's ignorance of the mode change.
  • the preset error times are parameters set by the user, such as 5 times, 8 times, etc.
  • the current password input mode is switched to the normal mode, so as to avoid the failure of the user to unlock the device due to forgetting the preset unlocking rules. situation, while taking into account security, the unlocking operation is more user-friendly.
  • the input method display method includes:
  • step S120 an input display interface with an input keyboard of the terminal device is opened, and when an unlocking operation is detected based on the input display interface, a current usage mode is acquired and a password is triggered to be displayed according to the unlocking operation.
  • the privacy protection device When the privacy protection device detects an unlocking operation based on the input display interface with the input keyboard, it acquires the current usage mode and triggers the display of the password according to the unlocking operation.
  • the privacy protection device may include mobile phones, PADs, smart watches and other devices, which are not specifically limited here.
  • the unlocking operation refers to a password input operation performed by the user on the lock screen interface of the privacy protection device. With reference to whether there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to it, it is divided into decryption unlocking operation and interference unlocking operation.
  • the unlocking operation is based on the input button of the lock screen interface, such as a physical button or a virtual button displayed on the screen.
  • the input button It can be a number button, a letter button, a character button, etc.
  • the privacy protection device has a variety of use modes, which are distinguished according to whether the display password and the preset password are set in the use mode.
  • a usage mode the displayed password is different from the preset password, then the usage mode is the default mode, and the preset password is the real unlock password set by the user.
  • the preset mode includes multiple usage modes.
  • Each use mode is embodied in that the displayed password for output is different from the preset password, and in a use mode the displayed password and the preset password are the same, the use mode is not the default mode.
  • Step S130 if the current use mode is a preset mode, output the display password.
  • the privacy protection device outputs the displayed password. It can be understood that, according to the description of the foregoing steps, in the preset mode, the user's unlocking operation actually clicks on the entered password to display the password and the password.
  • the preset passwords set in advance are different, so the displayed password can be output and displayed on the lock screen interface, and even the displayed password can be output by voice on the devices used by some visually impaired people. Because the displayed password is different from the preset password, the output It will not lead to the leakage of the default password.
  • Step S140 if the current use mode is not the preset mode, the display password is not output.
  • the privacy protection device does not output the displayed password.
  • the user's unlocking operation actually clicks on the entered password, which is
  • the display password is the same as the preset preset password, so the display password is not displayed on the lock screen interface to reduce the risk of password leakage, or directly use *****, ⁇ , or from 1 to
  • the incremental value of n reminds the user of the number of digits of the password that the user has entered, which is convenient for the user to remember the number of digits of the password that has been entered currently while ensuring the security of the password.
  • the preset mode corresponds to a preset unlocking rule and a display password
  • the displayed display password is output according to the preset unlocking rule
  • the preset mode includes multiple use modes, and each use mode is embodied in the difference between the displayed password used for output and the preset password, and this difference is determined by the preset unlocking rule.
  • the preset unlocking rule It contains the mapping from the user's unlocking operation to the password entered by the privacy protection device, and also includes the mapping from the user's unlocking operation to the password displayed on the lock screen of the privacy protection device.
  • the preset unlocking rule contains rule a (double-click a character to count once Input, the lock screen interface displays two corresponding characters), then when the user double-clicks 3 when entering the password, the password 3 is entered, and the lock screen interface displays 33, that is, the password displayed on the lock screen interface when the user enters the password will display the password.
  • the preset unlocking rule can be set and changed by the user, or the preset unlocking rule preset by the system can be used, and the preset password is to unlock the privacy protection device.
  • the correct password is set by the user.
  • the preset password can be extended to other passwords.
  • the password that the user enters each time on the privacy protection device may not be the correct preset password.
  • the preset unlocking rules are still used for processing and the password is displayed on the lock screen interface.
  • the displayed password is compared with the preset password to verify the correctness of the displayed password.
  • the privacy protection device when the displayed password is not output, the privacy protection device is in a non-preset mode, in which there is no specified preset unlocking rule guidance, and the password entered in the unlocking operation is used to directly communicate with the preset The password is compared, and the unlock is completed after the comparison is passed.
  • the displayed password is different from the preset password.
  • the user's unlocking operation actually clicks on the entered password, that is, the password and the preset preset password are displayed in the preset unlocking rule. There are differences under the transformation.
  • the current usage mode can be switched automatically or switched by the user.
  • the current usage mode of the privacy protection device can be automatically switched or switched by the user. For example, when the privacy protection device detects a change in geographic location, it determines whether the current location is within a preset range, and if it is within the preset range , the use mode can be switched between the preset mode with a high safety factor that is more complicated to unlock and a preset mode with a relatively low safety factor that is relatively simple to unlock, or automatically switch between the preset mode and the non-preset mode, so
  • the preset range is the positioning range specified by the user; for another example, when the privacy protection device detects that the connected network has changed, it determines whether the currently connected network is the preset network.
  • the usage mode It is possible to switch between a preset mode with a high safety factor that is more complicated to unlock and a preset mode with a relatively low safety factor that is relatively simple to unlock, or automatically switch between a preset mode and a non-preset mode.
  • the network is also pre-specified by the user. Further, the preset range and preset network conditions of the aforementioned positioning can also be replaced with microphones to collect surrounding human voice information, and the number of people is judged to perform the aforementioned use mode switching, and can also be replaced with camera acquisition. Surrounding portrait information, determine the number of people and then switch the use mode mentioned above. The above is the automatic switching method of the use mode. In addition, the user can also choose the use mode to switch.
  • the displayed password and the preset password have different properties and/or different orders of magnitude/or different styles/or different contents.
  • the displayed password is different from the preset password, and the difference can be different in attributes.
  • the attributes include letters, graphics, letters, Chinese characters, etc.
  • the preset password can be a number
  • the displayed password includes letters.
  • the difference can also be a different order of magnitude, and the order of magnitude refers to the number of digits of the password contained in the preset password and the displayed password.
  • the difference may also be a difference in style, such as a difference caused by the mismatch of upper and lower case letters.
  • the displayed password is continuous display or intermittent display or partial display.
  • the displayed password is continuously displayed, the displayed password is continuously displayed on the privacy protection device without performing operations such as hiding, blurring or replacement, and when the displayed password is intermittently displayed, the displayed password is displayed on the privacy protection device
  • the replacement is processed as ***
  • the partial display is a special display of the partial password. Processing, for example, the password abc123 is processed as *b*1**.
  • the unlocking operation corresponds to at least one displayed password.
  • the user performs the same unlocking operation every time in order to unlock the privacy protection device.
  • the unlocking operations are the same, the displayed passwords may not be the same, that is, unified unlocking.
  • the operation can correspond to multiple displayed passwords.
  • the displayed password is determined by user selection and/or system preset.
  • the user can adjust the display mode of the displayed password by adjusting the preset unlocking rule, and the display mode of the displayed password can also be determined in a system preset mode.
  • the displayed password is displayed randomly.
  • the displayed password may be displayed randomly and irregularly. For example, whenever an unlocking operation is obtained, a random number of characters are randomly selected from the preset character library to be displayed as the displayed password.
  • the preset unlocking rule corresponds to the input mode of each password character.
  • the preset rule includes the input method of each password character. If the preset rule defines a long-pressing a certain character as the input method of the password character, when the user unlocks the operation by long-pressing the password character, the password characters are entered.
  • the privacy protection device is unlocked by outputting the displayed password or unlocking without outputting the displayed password, and when the displayed password is output, the displayed password is distinguished from the real password.
  • the preset password for unlocking makes it impossible for others to easily know the password entered by the user, thus achieving the purpose of protecting user privacy.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of an eleventh embodiment of the input method display method of the present application.
  • the input method display method include the following steps:
  • Step S10 opening an input display interface with an input keyboard in the terminal device, and receiving an interface adjustment signal of the input display interface, where the input display interface includes a display area and/or an input function area;
  • Step S20 adjusting the display area and/or the input function area according to the interface adjustment signal, wherein the input function area displays at least one layout mode according to the interface adjustment signal.
  • the input display interface is an interface with an input keyboard, wherein the input display interface includes a display area and/or an input function area. It should be noted that the area occupied by the input keyboard in the input display interface is the input function area. The area other than the area occupied by the input keyboard is the display area.
  • the interface adjustment signal input to the display interface can be triggered by detecting that the display state of the current terminal device changes, or can be triggered by inserting shortcut function information of a third party, which is not limited.
  • the situation where the current display state of the terminal device changes includes, but is not limited to, the switching between the horizontal screen display and the vertical screen display, and the switching between the folding state and the unfolding state of the folding screen.
  • the input function area in this embodiment includes but is not limited to the following two display modes.
  • the first display mode is that the input function area displays an input keyboard
  • the second display mode is that the input function area includes an input sub-display area. and/or a function sub-display area, wherein the input sub-display area displays an input keyboard
  • the function sub-display area displays shortcut function information.
  • the functional sub-display area is a correspondingly increased display area when it is detected that the display state of the current terminal device changes and the display area displayed in the horizontal direction of the terminal device increases.
  • the default display mode of the input function area is the first display mode
  • the shortcut function information includes the shortcut toolbar, the combination shortcut keys, the shortcut functions corresponding to the secondary menu in the current display interface, and the corresponding secondary menu in the input keyboard. at least one of the shortcut functions.
  • the manners of adjusting the display area and/or the input function area according to the interface adjustment signals are not the same.
  • the input function area displays at least one layout display mode according to the interface adjustment signal, that is, an adjustment signal can correspond to a layout display mode of the input function area, and the layout display modes corresponding to the different adjustment signals and the input function area respectively At least two layouts are displayed differently.
  • the interface adjustment signal is to detect that the display state of the current terminal device has changed. Specifically, the display state of the current terminal device is switched from the vertical screen state to the horizontal screen display state, or the display state of the current terminal device display screen is switched from the folded state to the folded state.
  • Expanded state that is, when the horizontal display area of the terminal device increases, the display state of the adjustable input function area is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode; the current display state of the terminal device is switched from the horizontal screen state to the vertical screen state.
  • the display state of the screen, or the display state of the current terminal device display screen is switched from the unfolded state to the folded state, that is, when the display area of the horizontal display of the terminal device is reduced, the display state of the adjustable input function area is switched from the second display mode to the first display mode.
  • the shortcut function information is a shortcut toolbar.
  • the shortcut toolbar is suspended on the input display interface to block the input display interface, which affects the user's operation or browse and view the information in the input display interface. Please refer to FIG. 12.
  • the shortcut toolbar is suspended on the input display interface to display the input display. Schematic diagram of interface occlusion. In order to avoid the shortcut toolbar floating on the input display interface to block the input display interface, the specific steps that can be implemented are as follows:
  • the interface display information includes the display position of the input function area and the first display size
  • the specific adjustment method includes: reducing the area of the display area and increasing the area of the input function area as the target input function area; maintaining the area of the display area and reducing the area of the input function area as the target input function area.
  • the interface display information includes the display position and/or display size of the input function area.
  • the display position is the coordinate point where the input function area is displayed on the display screen of the terminal device, which may be the center coordinate point of the input function area, or may be two coordinate points determined by any diagonal line of the input sub-display area; It can also be four coordinate points of the input sub-display area, which is not limited.
  • Display size refers to the display length and display width of the input functional area.
  • the interface adjustment signal when the interface adjustment signal is to detect the short-cut function information inserted by a third party, adjust the display area and/or the input function area.
  • the shortcut toolbar close to the input keyboard area
  • the area where the input display interface is located is adaptively adjusted according to the overall position of the input keyboard and the shortcut toolbar, so as to prevent the shortcut toolbar from blocking the information content displayed on the input display interface.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of adaptive adjustment according to the overall position of the input keyboard and the shortcut toolbar after detecting that the shortcut function information inserted by the third party is detected in this embodiment.
  • the interface adjustment signal is to detect the increase of the display area of the horizontal display of the terminal device, when it is detected that the shortcut function information inserted by a third party such as the shortcut function bar is detected, the increased display area of the terminal device, such as the function sub-display area, can be obtained.
  • the display size of the shortcut function bar is smaller than the display size of the increased display area, the shortcut function bar can be displayed to the increased display area;
  • the display area and/or the input function area can be adjusted according to the method of detecting the insertion of the third-party shortcut function information, which will not be repeated here;
  • the interface adjustment signal is to detect that the display area of the horizontal display of the terminal device is reduced, when it is detected that the shortcut function information inserted by the third party, such as the shortcut function bar, can be detected according to the method of detecting the shortcut function information inserted by the third party.
  • the display area and/or the input function area are adjusted, which will not be repeated here.
  • the adjustment operation corresponding to the interface adjustment signal includes at least one of the following:
  • the area of the display area is reduced, and the area of the input function area is increased;
  • the area of the display area remains unchanged, and the area of the input function area decreases
  • the horizontal display area of the display area and/or the input function area is increased;
  • the lateral display area of the display area and/or the input function area is reduced.
  • the partial area in the input display interface interface can also be adjusted, so that the input The functional area is displayed in different layout display modes according to the different interface adjustment signals, which increases the variety of display modes and improves the utilization rate of the display area of the input functional area.
  • step S20 includes:
  • Step S21 when it is detected that the input function area has changed, obtain shortcut function information
  • the shortcut function information includes at least one of a shortcut toolbar, a combined shortcut key, a shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the currently displayed interface, and a shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the input keyboard.
  • the representation of the shortcut function information includes, but is not limited to, at least one of a function icon and a function name.
  • the shortcut functions corresponding to the secondary menu in the current display interface include, but are not limited to, the camera function, the positioning function, the red envelope function, the voice/video function, and the emoticon package selection function.
  • the shortcut functions corresponding to the secondary menu in the input keyboard include but are not limited to the numeric keyboard function and the punctuation function function.
  • the input function area If it is detected that the input function area has changed, it can be detected by detecting whether the display size of the input function area has changed. If it is detected that any one of the length and width of the display size of the input function area has changed, it can be determined that the input function area has changed; By detecting the display state of the display screen of the terminal device, when a change in the display state is detected, it can be determined that the input function area has changed, and the comparison is not limited. For example, the change of the input function area may be detected that the terminal device is switched from vertical screen display to horizontal screen display; it may also be detected that the display screen of the terminal device is switched from a folded state to an unfolded state, which is not limited.
  • Acquiring the shortcut function information may directly obtain the preset shortcut function information; or obtain the shortcut function information whose usage frequency is higher than the preset frequency, that is, the usage frequency is high.
  • the quantity of the acquired shortcut function information may be one or multiple.
  • the quantity of shortcut function information may be limited by the display size of the input function area.
  • step S21 before obtaining the shortcut function information in step S21, it includes:
  • the step of acquiring shortcut function information in step S21 is executed.
  • the initial display area area refers to the display area area before the input function area is not changed. It is easy to understand that when the area of the target display area is larger than the area of the initial display area, that is, the area of the display area increases, other display contents such as shortcut functions can be added while maintaining the original display contents of the display input function area, such as the input keyboard. information.
  • Step S22 displaying the shortcut function information and/or the input keyboard in the input function area.
  • the input function area includes but is not limited to the following two display modes, the first display mode is that the input function area displays an input keyboard, and the second display mode is that the input function area includes an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area, wherein, The input sub-display area displays the input keyboard, and the function sub-display area displays shortcut function information.
  • the default display mode of the input function area is the first display mode.
  • the input function area is the first display mode, and it is detected that the input function area has changed, it can trigger the division of the input function area into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area, that is, switching from the first display mode to The second display mode.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of the display method of the input method of the present application in which the input function area is displayed by partition in this embodiment.
  • Step S22 includes:
  • Step S221 dividing the input function area into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area;
  • Step S222 displaying the input keyboard in the input sub-display area; and/or,
  • Step S223, displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area Specifically, please refer to FIG. 16 , which is a schematic diagram of displaying the input keyboard in the input sub-display area (lower right) and displaying shortcut function information in the function sub-display area (lower left) in this embodiment.
  • step S221 includes:
  • the input function area is divided into the input sub-display area and the function sub-display area according to the interface layout corresponding to the operation mode.
  • the operation modes include at least one of a one-handed mode, a left-handed mode, a right-handed mode, and a two-handed operation mode.
  • the current operation mode can be obtained by collecting the user's handprint information through the handprint collection device when the user uses the terminal device, and by comparing the collected handprint information with the pre-stored handprint information, wherein the pre-stored handprint information It includes the handprint information of the left hand and the handprint information of the right hand collected in advance, and then confirms whether the user is currently using left-hand operation, right-hand operation, or simultaneous operation with both hands according to the comparison result.
  • the input function area is divided into input sub-display areas and/or function sub-display areas according to the interface layout corresponding to the operation mode.
  • the operation mode including at least one of the one-handed mode, the left-handed mode, the right-handed mode and the two-handed operation mode
  • the corresponding relationship between the operation mode and the interface layout can be preset.
  • the input sub-display area is set on the left side of the input function area
  • the function sub-display area is set on the right side of the input function area; when the operation mode is right-hand operation, the input sub-display area can be set on the right side of the input function area.
  • the operation mode when the operation mode is the two-hand mode, it can be the display mode of the input sub-display area and the function sub-display area corresponding to the above left-hand operation or right-hand operation, or the left-hand operation can be obtained.
  • Frequency and right-hand operation frequency obtain the left-hand operation frequency and the operation mode corresponding to the highest operation frequency among the right-hand operation frequencies to determine the display mode of the input sub-display area and the function sub-display area, which is not limited.
  • Different interface layouts are adopted for different operation modes, and the input sub-display area and/or function sub-display area can be arranged according to the user's operation habits, which is convenient for the user to operate, and provides at least one display layout method, which increases the Show diversity.
  • step S223 includes at least one of the following after displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area:
  • the entire input function area is switched to the function sub-display area.
  • the preset display instruction may be triggered by a display button or key, or may be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the preset display instruction, which is not limited.
  • the preset display instructions include but are not limited to a first preset display instruction, a second preset display instruction, and a third preset display instruction, and the first preset display instruction, the second preset display instruction, and the third preset display instruction.
  • the buttons or keys or corresponding touch operations triggered by the display instructions are different.
  • the preset display instruction has a corresponding relationship with the display operation corresponding to the preset display instruction, and the corresponding relationship is completed by preset.
  • the display positions between the input sub-display areas and/or the function sub-display areas are exchanged, that is, the exchange between the input keyboard and the display position of the shortcut function information is realized; and/or, receiving To the second preset display instruction, switch the entire input function area to the input sub-display area, that is, the input keyboard displayed in the input sub-display area is enlarged and displayed in the entire input function area; and/or, receiving the third preset display area command to switch the entire input function area to the function sub-display area, that is, output and display the shortcut function information displayed in the function sub-display area on the entire input function area, optionally, increase the number of shortcut function information output and display on the entire input function area.
  • the variety of display layouts in the input function area can be increased, and at least one optional display layout can be provided for the user, which is convenient for the user to choose according to their needs. Display layout, simple operation and increase user experience.
  • the acquired shortcut function information is also displayed in the input function area, that is, it is simultaneously displayed in the input function area.
  • new shortcut function information is added for display, which is more convenient to directly obtain the required shortcut function information for operation.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of the thirteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • step S221 dividing the input function area into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area includes:
  • Step S2211 acquiring interface display information of the input function area; wherein, the interface display information includes the display position and/or display size of the input function area;
  • Step S2212 Divide the input function area into input sub-display areas and/or function sub-display areas according to the display interface information.
  • the interface display information includes the display position and/or display size of the input function area.
  • the display position is the coordinate point where the input function area is displayed on the display screen of the terminal device, which may be the center coordinate point of the input function area, or may be two coordinate points determined by any diagonal line of the input sub-display area; It can also be four coordinate points of the input sub-display area, which is not limited.
  • Display size refers to the display length and display width of the input functional area. It is easy to understand that the position at the lower left of the display screen may be selected as the origin of the coordinates as a reference point for determining other display areas.
  • the input keyboard is displayed corresponding to the input sub-display area, the function sub-display area displays shortcut function information, and the specific implementation of dividing the input function area into the input sub-display area and/or the function sub-display area according to the interface display information includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: kind:
  • the area of the target display area of the input function area after the change can be larger than the area of the initial display area of the input function area before the change, and the display size of the input keyboard before and after the change of the input function area can be kept unchanged.
  • the enlarged display area that is, the part of the target display area that does not overlap with the initial display area, can be determined as the functional sub-display area, whereby the input sub-display area and/or the sub-display of the functional sub-display area can be determined according to the display interface information. interface information, so as to divide the input function area into input sub-display areas and/or function sub-display areas.
  • the sub-display interface information includes the sub-display position and the sub-display size.
  • the sub-display interface information corresponding to the input sub-display area is the first sub-display information
  • the sub-display interface information corresponding to the function sub-display area is the second sub-display information;
  • the display layout mode can be preset according to the display size corresponding to the input function area, wherein the display layout mode refers to the layout between the input sub-display areas and/or the function sub-display areas, and different display sizes can be set separately
  • the display layout mode is to select a display layout mode corresponding to the display size according to the display size of the input function area when the change of the input function area is detected, so as to maximize the use of the display space of the input function area.
  • the display layout mode can be preset according to the aspect ratio of the display length and the display width corresponding to the input function area, and details are not repeated here.
  • step S221, after dividing the input function area into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area includes:
  • the size of the input sub-display area and/or the function sub-display area is adjusted according to the display adjustment instruction.
  • the display adjustment instruction may be triggered by an adjustment button or key, or may be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the display adjustment instruction, which is not limited.
  • the step of adjusting the size of the input sub-display area and the function sub-display area according to the display adjustment instruction includes: acquiring the adjustment direction and/or adjustment displacement corresponding to the display adjustment instruction; The display size of the display area of the input sub-display area and/or the function sub-display area.
  • the adjustment direction refers to the movement direction of increasing the display area to be adjusted based on the display area to be adjusted.
  • the display area to be adjusted includes at least one of an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area.
  • the adjustment displacement is based on the display area to be adjusted, and is used to define the magnitude of the increase of the display area to be adjusted along the adjustment direction. For example, when a display adjustment instruction is detected on the boundary between the input sub-display area and the functional sub-display area, the movement of the boundary along the display adjustment instruction can be adjusted by the adjustment displacement determined by the display adjustment instruction, wherein the adjustment direction is the function sub-display.
  • the display area points to the direction of the input sub-display area.
  • the dynamic adjustment of increasing the display size of the functional sub-display area and reducing the display size of the input sub-display area is realized. It should be noted that the content displayed corresponding to the function sub-display area or the input sub-display area is scaled with the size of the display size.
  • step S223 displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area includes:
  • the shortcut function information is output to the function sub-display area according to the output ratio.
  • the output ratio of the shortcut function information is determined according to the interface display information corresponding to the function sub-display area. In essence, the output ratio of the shortcut function information is determined according to the second sub-display information corresponding to the function sub-display area. Specifically, the shortcut function information to be displayed is determined.
  • the display size of the function sub-display area and the display size of the function sub-display area determine the output scale of the shortcut function information; enlarge or reduce the display size corresponding to the shortcut function information according to the output scale; and then output the shortcut function information to the function sub-display area for adaptive display.
  • the input function area is divided into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area according to the display interface information of the input function area, and the shortcut function information is directly displayed in the function sub-display area, which can reduce the number of users This means that the user does not need to obtain the shortcut function information through secondary operations, but directly obtains the shortcut function information from the function sub-display area, which improves the user experience and is easy to operate.
  • step S223 includes before displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area:
  • Step S30 obtaining the first display size of the shortcut function information
  • Step S40 acquiring the second display size of the functional sub-display area
  • Step S50 when the second display size is larger than the first display size, execute the step of displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area.
  • the shortcut function information includes at least one of the shortcut toolbar, the combination shortcut keys, the shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the current display interface, and the shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the input keyboard
  • the shortcut function information is a shortcut toolbar
  • the shortcut toolbar cannot be recognized by the current input display interface, resulting in the shortcut toolbar.
  • Floating on the original input display interface blocks the original input display interface, affecting user operations or browsing and viewing information in the input display interface.
  • the display attribute of the shortcut function information is floating display, it is determined whether the second display size of the function sub-display area is larger than the first display size of the shortcut function information, so as to know whether the shortcut function information can be displayed in the function sub-display area.
  • the display size is larger than the first display size, that is, the function sub-display area can display the shortcut function information.
  • the shortcut function information displayed in the floating display blocks the display information of the original input display interface. It is convenient for users to operate or browse and view the information in the input display interface, and at the same time, the shortcut function information can be directly used.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of the fifteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • step S223 includes after displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area:
  • Step S60 when the preset switching instruction is received, switch the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area to the hidden preset shortcut function information.
  • the information corresponding to the shortcut functions includes at least one of the shortcut toolbar, the combination shortcut keys, the shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the current display interface, and the shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the input keyboard.
  • the shortcut function information displayed in the sub-display area is limited. In order to display all the shortcut function information through the function sub-display area and to quickly select the desired shortcut function information, you can preset multiple functions in the function sub-display area.
  • a shortcut function information display interface wherein the shortcut function information display interface can display one or more shortcut function information.
  • the interface state of any one of the preset multiple shortcut function information display interfaces includes a displayed state and a hidden state. Switching between multiple shortcut function information display interfaces can be realized by preset switching instructions, wherein the interface state corresponding to the shortcut function information display interface displayed in the function sub-display area is the display state, and the shortcut function not displayed in the function sub-display area is in the display state.
  • the corresponding interface state of the information display interface is the hidden state.
  • the shortcut function information display interface in the hidden state can be understood as a non-first-level menu, such as the second-level menu or the third-level menu. It is easy to understand that the shortcut function information displayed in the hidden state is displayed.
  • the shortcut function information on the interface may also be considered as hidden shortcut function information.
  • the preset switching instruction may be triggered by a switching button or a key, or may be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the preset switching instruction, which is not limited.
  • switch the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area to the hidden preset shortcut function information that is, switch the shortcut function information display interface displayed in the function sub-display area to another hidden state
  • the shortcut function information display interface Specifically, priorities can be set for the preset multiple shortcut function information display interfaces respectively, and the settings are arranged according to the priority from high to low.
  • the priority of the shortcut function information display interface is from high to low. Switch from low to low.
  • the usage frequency of each shortcut function information can be obtained.
  • the usage frequency of each shortcut function information is arranged from high to low, and the one with the highest usage frequency is displayed in the priority. High shortcut function information display interface, and so on, which is not limited.
  • the hidden preset shortcut function information is displayed in the function sub-display area through the preset switching instruction, so as to realize switching between different preset shortcut function information in the same function sub-display area Display, operation is simple, and the selectivity of shortcut function information is increased.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of a sixteenth embodiment of the method for displaying an input method.
  • the method method includes the following steps:
  • Step S200 opening an input display interface having an input keyboard in the terminal device, and inputting the information to be sent on the input display interface;
  • the information to be sent is chat information pre-input by the user based on an input display interface with an input keyboard, and the to-be-sent message includes at least one of text, multimedia, emoticons, pictures, and files.
  • the multimedia includes voice or image video.
  • Chat information includes but is not limited to voice information, text information, emoticon information and pictures.
  • Step S210 selecting a target sending application on the input display interface.
  • Step S220 sending the information to be sent to the target sending application.
  • the target sending application includes at least one of a communication application, a contact of the communication application, a contact group of the communication application, and an official account.
  • step S210 includes: outputting a sending selection interface, where the sending selection interface includes at least one sending application;
  • the target sending application is determined according to the selection instruction.
  • the identification information of at least one sending application displayed in the sending selection interface includes at least one of category, icon, and name.
  • the identification information of WeChat can be the application corresponding to WeChat.
  • the icon can also be the name of WeChat; when the application is sent as a contact, the identification information of the contact can be the avatar of the contact or the name of the contact.
  • the sending application includes at least one of a communication application, a contact of the communication application, a contact group of the communication application, and an official account. Among them, communication applications, such as WeChat, QQ and WhatsApp, etc. It can be understood that the target sending application is a part or all of the sending applications selected from at least one sending application in the sending selection interface, and is the target sending object of the information to be sent.
  • the target sending application including at least one of the communication application, the contact of the communication application, the contact group of the communication application and the official account
  • the target sending application includes the communication application
  • the sending selection interface can select and obtain the target sending application through the multi-level menu form.
  • the multi-level menu form can be the application of the target sending application as the The first-level menu, the contact, contact group and official account of the application are used as the secondary menu; it can also be the application of the target sending application as the first-level menu, and the contacts, contact group and official account of the application are respectively as the second-level menu
  • the menu, the third-level menu and the fourth-level menu are not limited.
  • the target sending application is determined according to the selection instruction.
  • the selection instruction may be triggered by clicking a selection button or button corresponding to each sending application on the sending selection interface, or may be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the selection instruction, which is not limited.
  • the target sending application is determined according to the selection instruction, that is, one or more sending applications selected by the selection instruction in the sending selection interface are used as the target sending application.
  • steps before step S220 include:
  • the information sending instruction may be triggered by clicking the sending button or button, or may be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the information sending instruction, which is not limited.
  • the information sending instruction detected through the input display interface may be a click operation of a sending key or button detected on the input display interface, or a touch operation corresponding to the information sending instruction detected on the input display interface, which is not limited.
  • the information to be sent entered by the user through the input display interface can be obtained from the input text box, or the selected information to be sent can be directly obtained from the to-be-sent interface such as the expression selection interface, which is not limited.
  • step S220 includes:
  • the target sending application is a contact in a communication application
  • the number of contacts of the communication application may be one or more, and can be selected from all contacts corresponding to at least one communication application through the sending selection interface.
  • the multiple contacts of the communication application are the target senders of the information to be sent, and the information to be sent is simultaneously sent to the target senders, that is, multiple contacts.
  • the contacts corresponding to the same communication application may also be contacts corresponding to different communication applications.
  • the output mode of the sending selection interface includes at least one of the following:
  • the sending selection interface is displayed on the input display interface
  • the sending selection interface is triggered in a preset manner and displayed on the input display interface.
  • the preset manner includes at least one of clicking a button and a preset touch operation.
  • the sending selection interface displayed on the input display interface can be displayed by being suspended on the input display interface, or can be displayed by being embedded in the input display interface, which is not limited.
  • FIG. 21 is a first display mode in which the input method display method of the present application is displayed on the input display interface in the transmission selection interface of this embodiment.
  • the sending selection interface is triggered in a preset manner and displayed on the input display interface, wherein the preset manner includes at least one of clicking a button and a preset touch operation.
  • the output sending selection interface can be triggered when an information sending instruction is detected through the input display interface.
  • the confirmation sending operation is detected on the sending selection interface, the information to be sent may be sent to the target sending application selected from the sending selection interface.
  • the steps of outputting the sending selection interface in step S210 and the execution sequence of obtaining the information to be sent inputted by the user through the input display interface in step S200 may be the outputting sending selection interface in step S210 and obtaining in step S200.
  • the execution is performed before the information to be sent input by the user through the input display interface, or it may be executed after the information to be sent input by the user through the input display interface is obtained in step S210 after the selection interface for transmission is output in step S200.
  • the output transmission selection interface can also be triggered when the input display interface detects the transmission selection instruction, wherein the transmission selection instruction can be triggered by a button or a key set on the input display interface, or it can be triggered with the transmission selection instruction.
  • the corresponding touch operation trigger refer to FIG. 22 , which is a second display manner of displaying the input method display method of the present application on the input display interface in the sending selection interface of this embodiment.
  • the sending selection interface can be triggered and displayed on the input display interface through the "FB" button or the sending button. It should be noted that the touch operation trigger corresponding to sending the selection instruction is different from the preset touch operation trigger corresponding to the information sending instruction.
  • an operation corresponding to the adjustment instruction is performed on the transmission application on the transmission selection interface, wherein the operation corresponding to the adjustment instruction includes addition, deletion and modification of all at least one of the number or content of the sending applications.
  • the operation corresponding to the adjustment instruction includes at least one of adding, deleting, and modifying the quantity or content of the sending application.
  • the adjustment instruction when the adjustment instruction is to increase the number or content of the sending application, it may be to increase the application, the contact of the application, the contact group of the application and the official account. at least one of. For example, when WeChat and QQ already exist in the sending selection interface, whatsAPP can be added to the sending selection interface by adjusting the instruction. Similar to that the adjustment instruction is to increase the number and content of the sending applications, the adjustment instruction is to delete and modify the number or content of the sending applications, which will not be repeated here.
  • the adjustment instruction can be triggered by clicking the switch button or button corresponding to any sending application in the sending selection interface, or triggered by the touch operation corresponding to the adjustment instruction, or after entering the adjustment state through a preset operation, according to the The adjustment instruction performs operations corresponding to the adjustment instruction on the sending application in the sending selection interface, which is not limited.
  • the application information When receiving the switching display instruction through the sending selection interface, obtain application information of the currently sent application, optionally, the application information includes at least one of a category, a name, and an icon;
  • the chat display interface of the currently sending application is switched to the sending determined by the display instruction on the same input display interface.
  • the chat display interface corresponding to the application correspondingly, by acquiring the application information of the currently sent application, such as the name and/or icon, the application information is switched and displayed at the position corresponding to the switching display instruction, that is, the application information of the currently sent application is displayed in the sending Select the interface, so that the next time the sending application can be operated, such as switching the display instruction.
  • the sending application is a communication application.
  • the switching display instruction can be triggered by clicking the preset switching button or button corresponding to any sending application in the sending selection interface, or it can be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the information sending instruction, such as long-pressing the displayed in the sending selection interface.
  • inputting content in the input box of the same input and display interface can be realized through the input and display interface in different communication applications, namely WeChat and WeChat. Seamless switching between whatsApps, no need to exit the current application interface such as WeChat, and then click whatsAPP to enter the whatsAPP interface to view or reply to messages.
  • the target sending application selected through the input display interface is based on an input display interface and aggregates different applications such as communication applications, WeChat, QQ and whatsapp.
  • the API Application Programming Interface
  • the chat input/output interface of the application is normalized to the same input display interface, that is, the user only needs to switch the communication application through one input display interface, and no longer needs to exit the input display interface of the current communication application, and then choose to switch to Other application program interfaces are used to view/input/send information, thus improving communication efficiency and effectively reducing the performance and power consumption burden on smart terminal devices.
  • the user pre-entered information to be sent can be sent to different applications by calling the applications aggregated on the input display interface, reducing frequent switching between different applications and improving communication efficiency.
  • the input of the information to be sent and the selection of the target sending application for sending the information to be sent are realized through the same input display interface, and the information to be sent is sent to the target sending application, optionally, through the information sending
  • the instruction triggers the sending of the information to be sent to the target sending application. Since the same input display interface can be used to select the target sending application to send the information to be sent, there is no need to exit the current input display interface, switch to other interfaces, and then return to the input display interface. , greatly reducing the switching frequency and reducing the performance and power consumption burden on the terminal device, thereby improving the communication efficiency of the communication application and improving the user experience.
  • step S220 includes:
  • Step S221 when there are multiple target sending applications, send the to-be-sent information to the multiple target sending applications at the same time.
  • the target sending application including the communication application, the contact of the communication application, the contact group of the communication application and the official account
  • the information to be sent is sent simultaneously.
  • the default sending object may be one or more than one.
  • the target sending application is multiple contacts of the communication application
  • the multiple contacts of the communication application are selected from all the contacts corresponding to at least one communication application through the sending selection interface, and the multiple contacts of the communication application are
  • the target sender of the information to be sent sends the information to be sent to the target sender simultaneously, that is, multiple contacts, wherein the multiple contacts may be contacts corresponding to the same communication application, or may belong to different communication applications
  • the contacts corresponding to the program, the communication application and the contacts corresponding to the communication application can be displayed in sequence through the multi-level menu. Similar to the case where the target sending application is multiple contacts of the communication application, the target sending application is multiple contact groups of the communication application or multiple public accounts of the communication application, which will not be repeated here.
  • the information to be sent is sent to the contacts corresponding to different communication applications at the same time, which realizes that the communication application does not need to be switched frequently.
  • send the information to be sent to the contacts of different communication applications at the same time through the same input display interface improve the communication efficiency, reduce the switching frequency between communication applications, reduce the performance and power consumption burden on the terminal equipment, and prolong the terminal equipment usage time.
  • users in Egypt have the habit of sending a message in the morning through a communication application to say good morning. After the user enters the good morning content, that is, the content to be sent, he can select the target sending object through the input display interface, such as the default setting of the communication application.
  • the sending object, the contact corresponding to the optional communication application, the contact group or the official account of the optional communication application, and then the information to be sent is sent to different communication applications or target sending objects corresponding to different communication applications at one time.
  • the target sending object may be at least one of a contact person, a contact group, and an official account.
  • sending the information to be sent to multiple target sending applications at the same time is based on the same input display interface to send the information to be sent to multiple target sending applications at the same time, wherein the target sending applications are different communication applications.
  • the multiple contacts and multiple target sending applications are determined by obtaining the sending application selected on the sending selection interface, so that when chatting with multiple target sending applications, frequent switching between different communication applications is not required, reducing the need for The switching frequency between communication applications reduces the performance and power consumption burden on the terminal equipment and prolongs the use time of the terminal equipment.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic flowchart of the eighteenth embodiment of the method for displaying the input method of the present application.
  • the method of displaying the method also includes:
  • Step S230 after receiving the message, displaying prompt information at a preset position
  • Step S240 adding an unread mark of the message.
  • the received message is the message received or returned by the sending application.
  • the form of the prompt information includes, but is not limited to, at least one of a text prompt, a floating frame prompt, and a dynamic mark prompt.
  • the dynamic marking prompt can be in the form of text or icon flashing, or it can be in the form of color marking, such as green marking for received messages or unread messages, red marking for emergency messages, and color marking of messages that have been checked and removed, etc. limited.
  • the unread mark is used to mark the messages received or returned by the target sending application that have not been viewed by the user.
  • the unread mark can be used to mark messages that are not read by the target sending application by color marking such as marking with green and setting the read/unread flag bit.
  • the read/unread flag bit you can distinguish whether the message has been read by setting the flag value of the flag bit. For example, when a message is received, add the read/unread flag bit to the message, and set the value of the flag bit. If it is 1, it means that the message is not read. When the message viewing command is received, set the value of the flag bit to 0 to indicate that the message has been read.
  • Display prompt information at a preset position includes at least one of the following: an input display interface; on the icon or name of the corresponding target sending application; jumping to the target sending application display interface; and an input interface of the communication application; Terminal display interface.
  • the prompt information when the preset position is the input display interface, can be suspended and displayed on the input display interface in the form of a floating frame for a preset duration such as 1S (seconds), and can also be output and displayed in a part of the input display interface for prompting.
  • directly enter and view the received message through the prompt information for example, when the prompt information detects a viewing instruction, enter the input display interface for viewing the message to view the received message.
  • the icon or name of the target sending application corresponding to the message at the preset position set the icon or name to flash a prompt message to indicate that the message has been received, or color the icon or name to indicate that the message has been received. Do not do this. limited.
  • the prompt information can be displayed in the form of a floating frame on the terminal display interface for a preset duration such as 1S (seconds), or it can be output and displayed in some areas of the terminal display interface in the form of scroll bars for prompting .
  • Step S50 after adding the unread mark of the message, including:
  • the number of messages is output and displayed on the input display interface and in a preset position of the target sending application.
  • Get the number of messages with unread marks in the messages corresponding to the target sending application When a message is received, add the unread mark of the message.
  • the unread mark of the message can be used to count the unread messages in the target sending application. , to obtain the number of messages with unread marks, and output and display the number of messages in the input display interface and the preset position of the target sending application, such as the identification information icon or name, for details, please refer to Figure 21, so that the user can understand each target easily. Sends the number of unread messages for the app and prompts the user to read it.
  • a prompt message is displayed to inform the user that there is a new message to read, and an unread mark of the message is added, so that the user can see the unread information at a glance, and will not miss or miss the right message. Timely reading of news.
  • the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method.
  • the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
  • the input display interface displays the corresponding to-be-input style according to the target sending application
  • Input the message to be sent in the to-be-input style and send it.
  • the target sending application may be an email or a short message or an instant messaging application.
  • Instant messaging applications include but are not limited to WeChat, QQ and WhatsApp.
  • it before selecting a target sending application on an input display interface with an input keyboard, it includes: outputting a sending selection interface, where the sending selection interface includes at least one sending application; when the sending selection interface receives a selection instruction, according to the The selection instruction determines the target sending application.
  • the triggering of the output transmission selection interface may be triggered based on a key on an input display interface with an input keyboard or a touch operation corresponding to the output transmission selection interface, which is not limited.
  • the target sending application is an email or a short message or an instant messaging application
  • the sending application is an email or a short message or an instant messaging application.
  • the identification information of at least one sending application displayed in the sending selection interface, and the identification information includes at least one of category, icon, and name.
  • the identification information of WeChat can be the application icon corresponding to WeChat, or it can be WeChat name.
  • the target sending application is a part or all of the sending applications selected from at least one sending application in the sending selection interface, and is the target sending object of the information to be sent.
  • the input display interface displays the corresponding to-be-input style according to the target sending application.
  • the corresponding relationship between the target sending application and the to-be-input style can be preset, and the corresponding target sending application may be an email, a short message, or an instant messaging application.
  • the styles to be input corresponding to each target sending application in the target sending applications are different.
  • the input display interface displays the corresponding to-be-input style according to the target sending application, and the display mode may be switching to the to-be-input style, or to add the to-be-input style to the existing input display interface.
  • At least two target sending applications can be selected, and the styles to be input corresponding to each target sending application can be displayed respectively.
  • different target sending applications require different styles or formats to be input, such as text messages or emails, after switching to the style corresponding to the target sending application, input according to the established style, without Manual adjustment is required, and the operation is simple.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic flowchart of a nineteenth embodiment of the input method display method of the present application.
  • the input method display method includes: The following steps:
  • Step 10 detects in the first area that the character is operated with the preset rule
  • the first area is a touch area of the terminal device, wherein the touch area includes a touch screen, a back case of the device, and a side of the device.
  • the first area is an input box area displayed on the touch screen of the terminal device, wherein the display position of the characters is located in the input box area, and the characters include but are not limited to characters, numbers, letters, pictures, punctuation marks and expressions. at least one.
  • the preset rules include, but are not limited to, an operation rule for increasing the character gap and an operation rule for enlarging a character.
  • the preset rule when the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rule, the spacing between the characters is larger or smaller than the gap between the characters that are not operated according to the preset rule, and also That is, the spacing between the characters is larger than the character spacing when the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to other rules;
  • the preset rule is the enlarged character operation rule, when the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rule, the size of each character is equal to The characters are displayed in a display mode larger than that corresponding to other rules, wherein the other rules are rules other than the preset rules.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic flowchart of the display method of the nineteenth embodiment of the input method of the present application for displaying characters in a display mode corresponding to preset rules.
  • step 10 characters are displayed in a mode corresponding to preset rules.
  • Display includes:
  • the preset rule includes an operation rule for increasing the character gap, and the characters are displayed in the form after the gap is increased; or,
  • Step 12 the preset rules include an operation rule for enlarging characters, and the characters are displayed in an enlarged form.
  • the preset rule includes an operation rule for narrowing the gap between characters, and the characters are displayed in the form after the gap is narrowed.
  • the preset rules include operation rules for reducing characters, and the characters are displayed in a reduced form.
  • a specific implementation manner of the preset rule may trigger the implementation of the preset rule by presetting a touch operation corresponding to the preset rule, which is not limited thereto.
  • the characters can be preset to be output and displayed with the spacing of the preset character gap, or the characters corresponding to the character gap increase operation rule can be displayed.
  • the operation parameter determines the size of the gap between each character, wherein the operation parameter is the parameter of the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, and the operation parameter includes but is not limited to at least one of the touch pressure value, the touch duration, the sliding distance and the touch area.
  • the larger the operation parameter the larger the size of the gap between each character, which is not limited.
  • Step 20 when detecting the movement operation of the positioning mark, obtain the positioning position of the positioning mark according to the moving operation, and obtain characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning position;
  • Step 30 the characters are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the preset rule.
  • the positioning marks are used to locate the gaps between the displayed characters or the two sides of any line of characters, and then perform a correction operation on the characters to be corrected after positioning the character gaps of the characters to be corrected by the positioning marks, wherein, Correction operations include, but are not limited to, delete character operations and insert character operations.
  • the positioning identifier is an input cursor.
  • the positioning position of the positioning mark refers to the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located after the moving operation.
  • the triggering of the movement operation of the positioning mark is triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the moving operation, wherein the touch operation may be a single touch operation, such as a sliding operation or a click operation, that is, the single touch operation directly determines the relationship between the characters of the positioning mark.
  • the target gap is convenient and quick. For example, when the moving operation is a sliding operation, the starting point of the sliding operation corresponds to the character gap where the positioning mark is currently located, and the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located is determined by the sliding distance and sliding direction of the sliding operation.
  • the corresponding relationship can be set in advance; it can also be multi-touch operation, such as double-click operation or combination of click operation and sliding operation, the initial position and target position of the positioning mark can be determined respectively through multi-touch operation. It can be understood that the initial position and target position can be the same. , the use of multi-touch operation can also avoid the problem of false trigger operation.
  • the operation rule for increasing the character gap or the operation rule for enlarging the character is different from the touch area of the moving operation.
  • the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap and the touch operation corresponding to the moving operation may be the same type of touch operation, such as a sliding operation, or different types of touch operations, which are not limited.
  • the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap and the touch operation corresponding to the moving operation are the same type of touch operation, in order to avoid the triggering of the operation rule for increasing the character gap or the moving operation when the same type of touch operation is detected If the triggering is confusing, the touch area triggered by the operation rule for increasing the character gap and the touch area triggered by the moving operation can be defined as different touch areas, so that the same touch operation can be achieved in different touch areas. Large character gap operation rules and move operations. In the same way, the touch operation corresponding to the enlargement character operation rule and the touch operation corresponding to the moving operation are not repeated here.
  • the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark obtain a preset number of characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark, or determine the character line of the character where the positioning mark is located as the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark, and the characters correspond to the preset rules. After the display mode is displayed, the characters adjacent to the two sides of the positioning mark can be modified, that is, the modification mode is entered.
  • the display method of the input method further includes: when a confirmation instruction is received, enlarging or reducing the distance between the gaps between the characters to a second preset output distance.
  • the second preset output spacing is the character spacing when characters are displayed in display modes corresponding to other rules other than the preset rules, for example, the other rules are the default character output spacing when characters are normally output through the input method.
  • step 30 including:
  • the positioning position of the positioning mark can be accurately re-determined by the moving operation of the positioning mark.
  • the characters are manipulated based on preset rules, and after the positioning position of the positioning mark is determined by the movement mark of the positioning mark, the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning position are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rules.
  • the preset rules such as increasing the character gap operation rule to increase the gap between each character, it is convenient to accurately locate the gap between the characters by moving operations such as finger touch operations, That is, the target gap between the characters to be corrected is determined through the moving operation, so as to move the positioning mark to the target gap to perform subsequent operations on the characters to be corrected.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic flowchart of the twentieth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • step 11 includes:
  • Step 111 Determine the size of the gap between each of the characters according to the operation parameter corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, wherein the operation parameter includes at least one of the touch pressure value, the touch duration, the sliding distance and the touch area.
  • the operation parameter includes at least one of the touch pressure value, the touch duration, the sliding distance and the touch area.
  • Step 112 Increase the gap between each of the characters according to the size of the gap.
  • the specific implementation of the operation rule for increasing the character gap can be by presetting a touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, and then triggering the realization of the operation rule for increasing the character gap through the touch operation. Including but not limited to at least one of sliding operation, clicking operation and long pressing operation.
  • the size of the gap between each character can be determined by the operation parameter corresponding to the character gap increase operation rule.
  • the operation parameter is a parameter of the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, and the operation parameter includes at least one of a touch pressure value, a touch duration, a sliding distance, and a touch area.
  • the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap includes but not limited to at least one of a sliding operation, a click operation and a long-press operation, and the operation parameter is the parameter of the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, and the operation parameter Including at least one of touch pressure value, touch duration, sliding distance, and touch area.
  • the operation parameters of the touch operation that is, the click operation or the long press operation, such as touch pressure value, touch At least one of the duration and the touch area to determine the size of the gap between each character according to the operation parameters
  • the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap is a sliding operation
  • the operation parameters of the sliding operation can be obtained by, such as At least one of the touch duration and the sliding distance is used to determine the size of the gap between each character according to the operation parameter.
  • the target operation parameters can be obtained by weighting each parameter to obtain the target operation parameters. The size of the gap between each character is determined according to the target operation parameter.
  • the size of the gap between each character is determined according to the operation parameter or the target operation parameter, and then the gap between each character is increased according to the determined size of the gap between each character, that is, the determined gap between each character
  • the gap is displayed at intervals.
  • the size of the gap between each character is determined according to the operating parameter or the target operating parameter, and the corresponding relationship between the operating parameter or the target operating parameter and the size of the gap between the characters can be preset, and the corresponding relationship can be that the larger the operating parameter or the The larger the target operation parameter, the larger the gap between each character, which is not limited.
  • the corresponding operation parameters include at least one of touch pressure value, touch duration, sliding distance, and touch area, specifically including but not limited to the following implementations:
  • Specific implementation mode 1 when the operation parameter is the touch pressure value, the larger the acquired touch pressure value, the larger the gap between each character, wherein the correspondence between the touch pressure value range and the gap size between the characters can be preset. relationship, so that when acquiring the touch pressure value, the size of the gap between characters is determined by comparing the preset touch pressure value range where the touch pressure value is located.
  • obtaining the touch pressure value of the touch operation can be obtained through the pressure sensor provided on the terminal device;
  • the operation parameter is the touch duration
  • the longer the acquired touch duration is, the larger the gap between each character is.
  • the correspondence between the touch duration range and the gap size between the characters can be preset to When acquiring the touch duration, the size of the gap between each character is determined by comparing the preset touch duration range in which the touch duration is located.
  • obtaining the touch duration of the touch operation can be obtained through the timing device provided in the terminal device;
  • Specific implementation mode 3 when the operation parameter is the sliding distance, the larger the obtained sliding distance, the larger the gap between each character, and the size of the gap between each character determined by the sliding distance is smaller than the above-mentioned operation parameter is the touch pressure value or
  • the specific implementation principle of the touch duration is similar, and will not be repeated here.
  • the determination of the sliding distance can be determined by obtaining the coordinate position information of the initial position and the termination position of the sliding operation;
  • Specific implementation mode 4 When the operation parameter is the touch area, the obtained touch area is used to determine the minimum gap between the characters, and then the gap between the characters can be set to be greater than or equal to the minimum gap to avoid the gap between the characters. The gap between the fingers is too small, resulting in inaccurate positioning.
  • the touch area can be determined by obtaining the contact area between the finger and the touch area at any point in the contact process;
  • Specific implementation mode 5 When the operation parameters are at least two of the touch pressure value, the touch duration, the sliding distance and the touch area, weights can be set for each parameter of the multiple operation parameters in advance, and the weighted calculation is performed on the multiple operation parameters.
  • the target operation parameters are obtained, and the size of the gap between each character is determined by the target operation parameter, wherein the size of the gap between each character can be determined more accurately by obtaining the target operation parameter by weighting and synthesizing multiple operation parameters.
  • the operation rule for increasing the character gap is a first sliding operation
  • the steps of displaying the characters in the form of the increased gap include: acquiring a sliding area corresponding to the first sliding operation; increasing the gap between each character in the sliding area. .
  • the first area is an input frame area displayed on the touch screen of the terminal device, wherein the display position of the character is located in the input frame area.
  • the first sliding operation is detected in the first area, that is, the characters displayed in the input box area are operated by increasing the character gap operation rule, the sliding area corresponding to the first sliding operation can be obtained, and the input box area can be determined by the sliding area.
  • the area where the characters need to increase the character gap optionally, the sliding area may be the area where all the characters in the input box area are located, or the area where some characters are located in the input box area, which is not limited. It should be noted that the acquisition of the sliding area corresponding to the first sliding operation can be determined by the initial position and the ending position of the first sliding operation.
  • the characters in the sliding area are used as target characters to increase the character gap.
  • the size of the gap between each character can be determined by the operation parameter of the first sliding operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, wherein the operation parameter includes but is not limited to the sliding distance and For at least one of the touch areas, it should be noted that the larger the operation parameter, the larger the size of the gap between each character.
  • the size of the gap between each character is determined by the operation parameter corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, that is, the operation parameter of the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap is obtained.
  • the operation is simple and fast, and each character displayed by increasing the gap passes through the positioning mark.
  • Target gaps between characters can be positioned more accurately, and additional auxiliary tools such as a mouse or a stylus are not required, reducing costs.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-first embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • the moving operation is a second sliding operation
  • the step of acquiring the target gap between the characters where the positioning position of the positioning mark is located according to the moving operation in step 20 includes:
  • Step 21 acquiring the sliding direction and/or the sliding trajectory of the second sliding operation
  • Step 22 Determine the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located according to at least one of the position of the positioning mark, the sliding direction, and the sliding track.
  • the sliding track of the second sliding operation can be understood as the sliding distance.
  • Obtaining the sliding distance of the second sliding operation may be determined by obtaining the coordinate position information of the initial position and the ending position of the second sliding operation.
  • the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located is determined according to the position of the positioning mark, the sliding direction and the sliding track, that is, based on the gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located, the sliding direction of the second sliding operation is used to determine the moving direction of the positioning mark , and determine the distance that the positioning mark moves in the determined moving direction through the sliding distance of the second sliding operation, so as to determine the target gap of the character determined by the positioning mark through the second sliding operation.
  • the sliding distance of the second sliding operation is used to determine the distance that the positioning mark moves in the determined moving direction, so as to determine the target gap of the character determined by the positioning mark through the second sliding operation, and the sliding distance and the size of the characters and the character
  • the corresponding relationship between the gap sizes such as taking half of the length of the two characters as the unit value of the movement, to ensure that the location of the positioning mark is determined by the sliding distance.
  • the size is used as the effective sliding distance of the sliding distance
  • the size of the character is used as the sliding unit value to ensure that the location of the positioning mark determined by the sliding distance can be located in the gap between the characters, which is not limited.
  • the moving operation is determined to be the second sliding operation, and based on the gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located, the sliding direction of the second sliding operation is used to determine the moving direction of the positioning mark, and the second sliding operation is used to determine the moving direction of the positioning mark.
  • the sliding distance of the operation determines the distance that the positioning mark moves in the determined moving direction, so as to determine the target gap of the character determined by the positioning mark through the second sliding operation, the operation is simple and convenient, and the target gap of the positioning mark can be quickly and accurately determined, to operate on characters on either side of the target gap.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
  • step 30 it includes:
  • Step 40 when a third sliding operation is detected in the second area, determine a character correction type according to the third sliding operation, wherein the character correction type includes at least one of deleting characters and restoring characters;
  • Step 50 Correct the character to be corrected according to the character correction type and the third sliding operation.
  • the character to be corrected is corrected according to the character correction type and at least one of the sliding track or the sliding direction or the sliding distance corresponding to the third sliding operation.
  • the touch parameters of the touch operation can be obtained when the touch operation is detected, and by judging whether the touch parameters match the touch parameters corresponding to the third sliding operation, the touch parameters corresponding to the third sliding operation When matching, it can be determined that a third sliding operation is detected.
  • the touch parameters corresponding to the third sliding operation include but are not limited to the preset sliding distance, sliding speed and sliding direction. It should be noted that the corresponding relationship between the third sliding operation and the touch parameters can be set in advance, and the corresponding relationship can be found in It can be set during the production process of the terminal equipment, and can also be set by the user according to his own operating habits, which is not limited.
  • the second area is a touch area of the terminal device, where the touch area includes a touch screen, a back case of the device, and a side of the device.
  • the second area is the area where the input soft keyboard area is displayed on the touch screen of the terminal device, wherein, when the second area is the input soft keyboard area, a transparent control panel can be added on the upper layer of the input soft keyboard in advance, and then On the basis of not hiding the input soft keyboard, the characters to be corrected in the first area, such as letters, numbers and punctuation marks, can be corrected through the third sliding operation detected on the transparent control panel.
  • the sliding area may modify the characters displayed in the first area based on the positioning identifier, which is not limited.
  • the character correction type is determined according to the third sliding operation, and the character correction type can be determined according to the sliding direction of the third sliding operation.
  • the character correction type includes at least one of deleting characters and restoring characters, and the sliding direction of the third sliding operation satisfies In the first direction, the character correction type is determined to be a deleted character; when the sliding direction of the third sliding operation satisfies the second direction, the character correction type is determined to be a recovery character.
  • the first direction is opposite to the direction of the second direction; the character correction type can also be determined according to the sliding direction corresponding to the third sliding operation and the position of the positioning mark, optionally, the sliding direction and the position of the positioning mark are to the left.
  • the character correction type is determined to be a deleted character, and/or when the sliding direction is the same as the rightward sliding direction at the location of the positioning mark, the input correction type is determined to be a recovery character, which is not limited.
  • the input correction type is determined to be a recovery character, which is not limited. For example, when the user needs to delete characters in the first area, swipe to the left to trigger the deletion operation, and determine the number of characters to be deleted through the sliding trajectory of the sliding to the left, that is, the sliding distance; when the user needs to restore the content of the deleted characters , swipe to the right to trigger the recovery operation, and determine the number of characters to be recovered by the sliding distance of the swipe to the right.
  • the characters to be corrected are corrected according to the character correction type and the third sliding operation, and the characters to be corrected are corrected by the sliding track or sliding distance corresponding to the third sliding operation on the basis of determining the character correction type according to the third sliding operation.
  • the correction of the characters to be corrected by the sliding track or the sliding distance corresponding to the third sliding operation is essentially to determine the number of the characters to be corrected by the sliding distance, and the corresponding relationship between a character and the sliding distance can be corrected by preset, and the longer the sliding distance is longer, the more characters that can be corrected; it can also be determined by the ratio of the sliding distance to the preset length, and then the number of characters to be corrected corresponding to the row where the positioning mark is located is determined according to the ratio.
  • the sliding distance reaches 20%, delete 20% of the characters in the current line or restore the content of the deleted 20% of the characters.
  • the preset length may be the length of the character to be corrected in the row where the positioning identification is obtained, or may be the length or width of the display screen of the terminal device. It is easy to understand that the preset length is the length of the display screen of the terminal device.
  • the length or width can be further determined according to the display state of the terminal device, wherein the display state of the terminal device includes horizontal screen display or vertical screen display. For example, when the display state of the terminal device is vertical screen display, the preset length It is the width and length of the terminal device, which is not limited.
  • the determination of the sliding trajectory or the sliding distance of the third sliding operation can be determined by obtaining the initial position and the ending position of the third sliding operation, for example, by obtaining the initial coordinate information of the initial position and the final coordinate information of the ending position. , which is not limited here.
  • the character correction type includes at least one of deleting the character and restoring the character, wherein, the positioning mark determined based on the gap between the characters to be corrected is the character to be corrected, and the character correction type is to delete the character, by
  • the third sliding operation can perform a deletion operation on the character to be corrected.
  • the character correction type is recovery character, and the recovery operation is performed from the character that has been deleted through the third sliding operation.
  • the character to be corrected is "Let's go to see the sea and
  • the character correction type is the delete character
  • the sliding direction of the third sliding operation is leftward for the correction to be corrected.
  • Figure 30 is a schematic diagram of the character correction type in the twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the application being a deletion character, wherein P1 is a leftward sliding operation; the character correction type is a recovery character, and the third sliding The sliding direction of the operation is to the right for the recovery operation from the characters that have been deleted, such as "Go to see the sea and".
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing that the character correction type is recovery characters in the twenty-second embodiment of the input method display method of the present application, wherein P2 is a rightward sliding operation.
  • the sliding distance of the third sliding operation can be used to determine the number of deleted characters.
  • step 50 includes: determining the character to be corrected according to the third sliding operation; and correcting the character according to the character correction type. For example, the character to be deleted is determined according to the sliding distance corresponding to the third sliding operation, and the determined character to be deleted is deleted from all characters.
  • step 50 includes: according to the third sliding operation from The characters to be corrected are determined from the pre-stored deleted characters; the characters are corrected according to the character correction type. For example, the character to be restored is determined from the deleted characters according to the sliding distance corresponding to the third sliding operation, and the character to be restored is restored.
  • the steps performed for the character correction type to restore characters can be performed after the steps performed for the character correction type to delete characters, and after the steps performed for the character correction type to delete characters, the deleted characters can be saved or Updates deleted characters stored in preset storage locations.
  • the character correction type is determined by the third sliding operation detected in the second area, and when the character correction type is the deletion character, The operation of deleting characters can be performed directly through the third sliding operation based on the target gap, which is simple, convenient and fast; when the character correction type is recovery characters, the deleted characters can be recovered through the third sliding operation based on the target gap.
  • the operation is to output the deleted characters to the position of the character gap corresponding to the target gap, so as to quickly retrieve the deleted characters and avoid the problem of accidental deletion.
  • the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method.
  • the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
  • the preset operation mode includes at least one of the following: a use mode, a display mode of the terminal device, and an operator mode.
  • the usage mode is such as left-hand mode and/or right-hand mode
  • the display mode of the terminal device is such as landscape display and/or portrait display
  • the operator mode is such as child mode and/or elderly mode.
  • Inputting a preset operation mode into the terminal device can be determined by the operation mode preset in the setting interface of the operation mode, or the display mode of the terminal device can be determined based on the detection device of the terminal device, such as through a gyroscope;
  • the fingerprint information obtained is compared with the pre-stored fingerprint information to determine the current usage mode such as the left-hand mode and/or the right-hand mode according to the comparison result, wherein the pre-stored fingerprint information includes the left-hand fingerprint information and the right-hand fingerprint information.
  • fingerprint information or, the user is photographed by the camera of the terminal device to identify the user with a face, so as to determine whether the current operator mode is the child mode or the elderly mode, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the first area is an input box area displayed on the touch screen of the terminal device, and characters are input in the first area, and the characters include but are not limited to at least one of characters, numbers, letters, pictures, punctuation marks and expressions.
  • the characters are displayed on the terminal device in a display manner corresponding to the preset rule.
  • the preset rule corresponding to the preset operation mode includes at least one of an operation rule for increasing or reducing a character gap and an operation rule for increasing or reducing a character.
  • the corresponding relationship between the preset operation mode and the preset rule can be set in advance.
  • the preset rule is the operation rule for increasing the character gap
  • the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rule, that is, the spacing between each character is greater than that of the preset rule.
  • the preset rules that is, the rules other than the preset rules, are used to display the gap between the operation characters; when the preset rule is the operation rule for enlarged characters, the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rules, that is, the size of each character is larger than the size of the characters.
  • the characters are displayed in a display manner corresponding to the preset rules, that is, rules other than the preset rules.
  • the preset rule can be set to increase the character gap operation rule
  • the display mode can also be set to increase the character gap operation rule while increasing the character operation rule. rules, there are no restrictions on this.
  • the operation rule for increasing the character gap may be displayed by increasing the spacing between characters according to a preset spacing, or it may be an operation parameter corresponding to the operating rule increasing the character gap.
  • the size of the gap between each character is determined, and the gap between each character is increased according to the determined size of the gap.
  • increasing the character operation rule that is, increasing the size of the character
  • parameter increase the character size according to the determined enlargement parameter
  • the specific implementation is the same as the principle of determining the size of the gap between each character according to the operation parameter corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap in the second embodiment, this embodiment does not Repeat.
  • the character is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the preset rule
  • the preset rule includes at least one of an operation rule for increasing or reducing a character gap and an operation rule for increasing or reducing a character
  • the display The mode includes at least one of the first display mode, namely, increasing the spacing between characters, and the second display mode, namely, increasing the size of the characters.
  • the spacing between each of the characters is larger than the character gaps that are not operated according to the preset rules; or, when the characters are displayed in the first display mode corresponding to the preset rules
  • the size of each character is larger than the size of the characters not displayed in the preset operation mode.
  • the characters are displayed in a display mode corresponding to a preset rule, and when a movement operation of the positioning mark is detected, the character where the positioning position of the positioning mark is located is obtained according to the moving operation
  • the target gap between the positioning marks is moved to the target gap, and the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark are acquired, and the characters on the adjacent sides are in the modification mode.
  • the positioning marks are used to locate the gaps between the displayed characters or the two sides of any line of characters, and then use the positioning marks to locate the character gaps of the characters that need to be corrected, and then execute the execution on the characters that need to be corrected. Correction operation, wherein the correction operation includes but is not limited to the operation of deleting characters and the operation of inserting characters.
  • the positioning identifier is an input cursor.
  • the triggering of the movement operation of the positioning mark is triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the moving operation, wherein the touch operation may be a single touch operation, such as a sliding operation or a click operation, that is, the single touch operation directly determines the relationship between the characters of the positioning mark.
  • the target gap is convenient and quick. For example, when the moving operation is a sliding operation, the starting point of the sliding operation corresponds to the character gap where the positioning mark is currently located, and the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located is determined by the sliding distance and sliding direction of the sliding operation.
  • the corresponding relationship can be set in advance; it can also be multi-touch operation, such as double-click operation or combination of click operation and sliding operation, the initial position and target position of the positioning mark can be determined respectively through multi-touch operation. It can be understood that the initial position and target position can be the same. , the use of multi-touch operation can avoid the problem of false trigger operation.
  • the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rules, and the space between each character can be displayed by increasing the space between each character.
  • the operation obtains the target gap between the characters where the positioning position of the positioning mark is located, and moves the positioning mark to the target gap.
  • a preset number of characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark can be obtained, and the character line of the character where the positioning mark is located can be determined as the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark, so as to realize the identification of the two sides of the positioning mark.
  • the adjacent characters are modified, that is, the modification mode is entered.
  • the input characters are displayed in a normal mode.
  • the normal mode refers to other display modes other than the display modes corresponding to the preset rules.
  • the distance of the gap between each character can be enlarged or reduced to the second preset output distance.
  • the second preset output spacing is the character spacing when characters are displayed in display modes corresponding to other rules except the preset rules, for example, the other rules are the default character output spacing when characters are normally output through the input method.
  • the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method.
  • the main solution of the embodiment of the present application is: after receiving a verification instruction triggered through a verification interface, receiving verification information, identifying the verification code in the verification information, and converting The verification code is input into the input box of the verification interface.
  • the terminal in this embodiment of the present application may be a smart phone, or may be a terminal device such as a PC, a tablet computer, and a portable computer.
  • the terminal may include: a processor 1001 , such as a CPU, a network interface 1003 , a memory 1004 , and a communication bus 1002 .
  • the communication bus 1002 is used to realize the connection and communication between these components.
  • the network interface 1003 may include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface (eg, a WI-FI interface).
  • the memory 1004 may be high-speed RAM memory, or may be non-volatile memory, such as disk memory.
  • the memory 1004 may also be a storage device independent of the aforementioned processor 1001 .
  • terminal structure shown in FIG. 3 does not constitute a limitation on the input terminal of the verification code, and may include more or less components than the one shown, or combine some components, or different components layout.
  • the memory 1004 which is a computer storage medium, may include an operating system, a network communication module, a user interface module, and a verification code input program.
  • the network interface 1003 is mainly used to connect to the background server and perform data communication with the background server; and the processor 1001 can be used to call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and perform the following operations:
  • the verification code is automatically displayed in the input box of the verification interface.
  • processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
  • the received information is verification information.
  • processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
  • processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
  • processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
  • the initial input position is obtained according to the position of the input box.
  • processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
  • processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
  • the initial input position is acquired according to the language type and/or the position of the input box.
  • processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
  • the step of filling the verification code into the verification code input box is performed; and/or,
  • the verification code in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code are associated and recorded.
  • processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
  • the recorded verification code is filled in the verification code input box of the target application.
  • the present application provides a twenty-third embodiment of a method for displaying an input method.
  • the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
  • Step S310 after receiving the verification instruction triggered by the verification interface, receiving verification information
  • Step S320 identifying the verification code in the verification information
  • Step S330 input the verification code into the input box of the verification interface.
  • the execution terminal in this embodiment may be a smart phone, a portable computer, or a tablet computer.
  • the execution terminal in this embodiment can exchange data, and can send and receive short messages or email messages.
  • the verification code in the text message or email message is automatically entered into the corresponding verification code input box.
  • an input method display program is provided on the terminal device. After receiving the information and judging that the information is verification information, the verification code in the verification information is identified, and then the verification code is input into the In the input box of the verification interface described above, the automatic input of the verification code is realized.
  • Receiving the verification instruction triggered by the verification interface means that the execution terminal receives the verification code request triggered by the user on the verification interface. Send a request to send the verification code information to the preset mobile phone number or email address, and receive the sent verification information in real time.
  • the verification information includes a verification code and an application name corresponding to the verification code.
  • the verification code in the verification information is identified, that is, the execution terminal parses the content of the verification information, and obtains the verification code in the verification information, and the The verification code can be multiple digits, a combination of multiple letters, or a combination of multiple digits and letters.
  • the verification code can be multiple digits, a combination of multiple letters, or a combination of multiple digits and letters.
  • the verification code input terminal after receiving the verification instruction triggered through the verification interface, the verification code input terminal first receives verification information, then recognizes the verification code in the verification information, and finally inputs the verification code into the verification interface input box.
  • the verification code input terminal By parsing and identifying the content of the verification information, obtaining the verification code, and then automatically entering the verification code into the verification box of the verification interface, the automatic input of the verification code is realized, the operation is intelligent and simple, and the user experience and the intelligence of the execution terminal are improved.
  • the present application provides a twenty-fourth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method. Based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 32 , after receiving the verification instruction triggered by the verification interface, the The steps to verify the information include:
  • Step S311 receiving the information in real time after receiving the verification instruction triggered by the verification interface
  • Step S312 identifying keywords in the content of the information
  • Step S313 when it is recognized that there is a preset keyword in the content, it is determined that the received information is verification information.
  • the execution terminal can receive information in real time, and the information may be a short message or an email containing a verification code, or a short message or an email without a verification code. It can be understood that the short message or email containing the verification code contains special keywords, such as keywords such as verification code and verification. Therefore, after receiving the information, first identify whether there is a preset keyword in the content of the information, and determine whether the information is verification information based on the preset keyword.
  • the received information is verification information, for example: when there is a "verification code" in the content of the information, it can be The information is considered verification information.
  • the information is received in real time, the keywords in the content of the information are first identified, and then when it is identified that there is a preset keyword in the content, the It is determined that the received information is the verification information, so that the verification information containing the verification code can be identified from the information, and the operation is quick and intelligent.
  • the present application provides a twenty-fifth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method.
  • the verification code is entered into the input box of the verification interface.
  • the steps in include:
  • Step S331 obtaining the initial input position of the input box of the verification interface
  • Step S332 Input the verification code into the input box from the initial input position.
  • the input box is the verification code filling box
  • the initial input position is the verification code when filling in the input box.
  • the position of the input box of the verification interface can be obtained by first identifying the verification interface to determine whether there is a preset keyword in the verification interface, and when there is a preset keyword, according to The keyword obtains the position of the input box. For example, according to the identification of the current interface, the verification interface has keywords such as "verification code” and "verification code input”, and the position of the input box corresponding to the keyword is the position of the input box of the verification interface.
  • the initial input position is obtained according to the position of the input box.
  • the initial input position can be obtained by first obtaining the current language type of the execution terminal, and then obtaining the initial input position according to the language type. . For example: when the acquired language of the current execution terminal is English, the initial input position is the leftmost end of the input box; when the acquired language of the current execution terminal is Arabic, the initial input position is is the rightmost end of the input box.
  • the verification code is input into the input box from the initial input position, and the verification code is input from the initial input position.
  • the input box after obtaining the initial input position of the input box, simulate a manual click, insert a cursor at the initial input position, and enter the copy of the clipboard or stored in the preset memory at the cursor. verification code.
  • the execution terminal after recognizing the verification code of the verification information, the execution terminal first obtains the initial input position of the input box of the verification interface, and then inputs the verification code into the input from the initial input position box, the recognized verification code can be accurately input into the verification code input box, and the operation is simple and intelligent.
  • the present application provides a twenty-sixth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method. Based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 32 , after the step of recognizing the verification code in the verification information, also includes:
  • Step S340 obtain the verification code feature in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code
  • Step S330 when the application of the current interface matches the target application, execute the step of filling the verification code into the verification code input box; and/or,
  • Step S350 when the application on the current interface does not match the target application, associate and record the verification code in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code.
  • the verification code feature in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code can also be obtained according to the content in the verification information, and the verification code feature is
  • the composition method includes numbers, letters, and the combination of numbers and letters.
  • the step of filling the verification code into the verification code input box is performed, that is, the verification code is filled in the verification code input box. Paste or output the copied or stored verification code into the input box of the verification interface.
  • the application of the current interface does not match the target application, that is, the current interface is not the verification interface corresponding to the verification code
  • the verification code in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code are used.
  • the associated information is then recorded, and the record can be copied to the clipboard or stored in a preset memory.
  • the interface after switching is identified, and the application corresponding to the interface after switching is obtained, and when it is recognized that the interface after switching is matched with the target application , wherein the target application is the application corresponding to the recorded verification code, so after recognizing that the switched interface is the verification interface corresponding to the recorded verification code, the recorded verification code is filled in the switched
  • the verification code input box of the interface is filled in the verification code input box of the target application.
  • the verification code feature in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code can also be obtained according to the content, and in the current interface
  • the application matches the target application perform the step of filling the verification code into the verification code input box, and/or, when the application on the current interface does not match the target application, enter the verification code in the verification information.
  • the verification code is associated and recorded with the target application corresponding to the verification code, so that when multiple applications need to be verified, multiple verification codes are received at the same time, and multiple verification codes can be filled in the corresponding applications according to each verification information.
  • the operation is simple and intelligent.
  • FIG. 36 is a reference diagram of a verification interface for user interaction involved in the solution of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the interface is a reference diagram of a verification interface for user interaction, in particular, the interface is a verification code input interface after triggering a verification instruction, and the interface may include a verification code input box, an input keyboard, and the like.
  • the obtained verification code can be automatically input into the verification code input box, so that after the verification instruction is triggered, the obtained verification code is input into the verification code input box of the verification code input interface.
  • the present application also provides a display method of the input method.
  • the method includes:
  • Step S410 when receiving the verification code, analyze the verification code type of the verification code
  • the received verification code can be a short message or text verification code sent by the server, or a picture verification code displayed in the app.
  • the type of verification code is analyzed.
  • the type of verification code includes text verification. It also includes the type of information in the verification code, such as pure digital verification code, pure letter verification code, mixed type verification code, etc.
  • Step S420 determining a predefined keyboard style according to the application information and/or the verification code type
  • the current application information and/or the text type of the verification code will be obtained, according to the current application information and/or verification code.
  • Type which determines the predefined keyboard style.
  • the application can be classified first, and the classification is based on the verification code type of the application, such as a plain English verification code. A pure digital verification code or a verification code mixed with English and digital.
  • the classification results can be saved in the local database or in the cloud database. When needed, the current application information can be compared with the information in the database.
  • the verification code type when the terminal receives the verification code, it obtains the keywords in the verification code, parses according to the keywords, and obtains the verification code type.
  • an initial keyboard style is first determined according to the application information.
  • the verification code is received, the verification code is parsed, and the final keyboard style is determined according to the verification code type.
  • the predefined keyboard style is the numeric input keyboard style.
  • the predefined keyboard style is the 26-key English keyboard style.
  • the predefined keyboard style is the 26-key English keyboard style.
  • the predefined keyboard styles can also be adjusted accordingly according to the user's habits.
  • Step S430 displaying the predefined keyboard style
  • FIG. 38 , FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 it is a schematic diagram of the user interface when the verification codes of pure numbers, pure letters and mixed styles are respectively. Of course, more other interface schematic styles may also be included.
  • the verification code type of the verification code is analyzed; a predefined keyboard style is determined according to the application information and/or the verification code type; and the predefined keyboard style is displayed.
  • the corresponding predefined keyboard style is obtained, and the keyboard is automatically displayed according to the corresponding predefined keyboard style, without the need for the user to manually switch, which is convenient for the user to verify the code. input, reduce user operations, and make the terminal more intelligent.
  • a twenty-eighth embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided.
  • the twenty-eighth embodiment is provided.
  • Step S420 includes:
  • Step S421 when an in-app verification code request is received, obtain current application information
  • Step S422 determining the predefined keyboard style according to the application information
  • the application information includes at least one of an application category, an application name, and an application icon.
  • the applications whose verification code types are relatively fixed classify these applications by more verification code types in advance.
  • the applications whose verification code type is pure numbers are classified into one category, and the applications whose verification code type is pure letters are classified into one category.
  • the verification code type is a combination of numbers and letters into one category, and the classification results are stored in the database at the same time.
  • the user's selection operation on the in-app verification code input box is received, that is, when the user has an action intention to enter the verification code
  • the name information in the application information is obtained, and the obtained name information is stored in the database.
  • the information is compared, the classification of the current application is determined, and the corresponding predefined keyboard style is determined.
  • the predefined keyboard style is the numeric input keyboard style
  • the predefined keyboard style is the 26-key English keyboard style
  • the predefined keyboard style is 26 keys.
  • the predefined keyboard style is determined through the application information, and the most suitable keyboard style can be directly determined when the user needs to input the verification code, without waiting for the verification code to be received for parsing, which is faster.
  • a twenty-ninth embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided.
  • the twenty-ninth embodiment is provided.
  • Step S420 includes:
  • the terminal After receiving the user's selection operation on the verification code input box in the application, the terminal will obtain the corresponding verification code according to the received selection operation.
  • the application sends a request for obtaining the verification code to the server, and obtains the verification code information sent by the server, or displays the verification code content that needs to be input by the user through a picture.
  • Step S424 judging the verification code type according to the verification code content
  • the obtained verification code information is parsed to determine the verification code type.
  • the verification code SMS you can judge by the keywords in the verification code. If the verification code is used as a keyword, the content immediately after the verification code is the specific verification code content, and it is judged whether the verification code content is pure numbers, pure letters or A combination of numbers and letters to determine the type of verification code. If the content of the verification code is displayed through the picture information, the verification code information in the picture is identified by the picture recognition technology, and the type of the verification code is judged.
  • the corresponding predefined keyboard style is determined according to the verification code type.
  • the predefined keyboard style is the numeric input keyboard style
  • the predefined keyboard style is the 26-key English keyboard style
  • the verification code combining numbers and letters is 26 keys.
  • the predefined keyboard style is determined by the verification code type, and the keyboard style can be switched accurately according to the verification code content, which is convenient for the user to quickly input the verification code.
  • a thirtieth embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided.
  • the thirtieth embodiment is provided.
  • Step S420 includes:
  • the obtained application information is compared with the application information in the database to determine the application classification of the current application in the database, and the corresponding classification of the application is determined.
  • the corresponding keyboard style is determined according to different application types.
  • the predefined keyboard style is the digital input keyboard style.
  • the predefined keyboard style is a 26-key English keyboard style.
  • the predefined keyboard style is a 26-key English keyboard plus a mixed keyboard style of numbers.
  • Step S427 after receiving the verification code content, obtain the verification code type and determine the second keyboard style according to the verification code type;
  • the content of the verification code in the obtained short message or image is analyzed to determine the type of verification code, such as pure digital verification code, pure letter verification code or mixed type verification code.
  • the second style is determined.
  • the predefined keyboard style is the numeric input keyboard style
  • the predefined keyboard style is the 26-key English keyboard style
  • the predefined keyboard style is 26 keys.
  • Mixed keyboard style of English keyboard plus numbers is 26 keys.
  • Step S429 if the second keyboard style is the same as the first keyboard style, the predefined keyboard style is the first keyboard style;
  • the first keyboard style When the first keyboard style is different from the second keyboard style, it means that the first keyboard style determined according to the application information matches the verification code type, and there is no need to switch the keyboard style initially. If the first keyboard style is different from the second keyboard style, then It means that there may be changes in the verification code type of the current application, that is, the verification code type of the application has been updated, the keyboard style is switched from the first keyboard style to the second keyboard style, and the application classification information in the database can also be marked. If the current application has been marked many times within a certain period of time, it means that the verification code type of the application has changed, and at this time, the classification of the corresponding application in the database can be updated.
  • the first keyboard style is determined according to the application information
  • the second verification code type is determined according to the actual verification code type. Determine whether the first keyboard style is the same as the second keyboard style, and determine the final keyboard style.
  • the most accurate keyboard style can be obtained by comprehensively judging the keyboard style by the application information and the verification code type.
  • a thirty-first embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided.
  • the thirty-first embodiment
  • step S430 it includes:
  • Step A after receiving the verification code input operation in the predefined keyboard style, the keyboard style remains unchanged or switches to the previous keyboard style;
  • the style of the keyboard can remain unchanged, that is, it is still the current predefined keyboard style. If the predefined keyboard style is the numeric keyboard, the keyboard is still kept as the numeric keyboard , you can also switch the keyboard style to the last recorded keyboard style, such as the current predefined keyboard style is a numeric keyboard, and the recorded keyboard style last used is a 26-key keyboard, then switch from the numeric keyboard to a 26-key keyboard keyboard.
  • a thirty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided.
  • the thirty-second embodiment
  • step S420 it includes:
  • Step B1 obtaining the current input method type and/or the language information of the input method
  • Step B2 adjusting the predefined keyboard style according to the input method type and/or the language information
  • the input method type is whether the current input method supports the simultaneous display of numeric keys on a 26-key keyboard , if it cannot be displayed, when you need to display a mixed keyboard of 26 keys and numbers, adjust the keyboard style to the 26-key keyboard style.
  • the current input language is Chinese and the content of the verification code includes letters, you also need to enter the The input voice in the keyboard style of the method is switched to English input.
  • the keyboard style needs to be adjusted according to the input method type and voice information, which is more convenient for the user to input the verification code.
  • a thirty-third embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided.
  • the thirty-third embodiment is provided.
  • step S430 it includes:
  • Step S431 obtaining the current input mode of the terminal
  • the input mode includes a one-hand input mode and a two-hand input mode, which corresponds to the operation mode of the terminal, that is, whether the terminal is currently in a one-hand operation mode or a normal operation mode.
  • Step S432 determining the current keyboard display area according to the input mode
  • the keyboard display area is the normal display area. If it is in one-hand mode, the keyboard is displayed in the left area or the right area according to the current left-hand operation mode or right-hand operation mode.
  • Step S433 displaying a keyboard in the keyboard display area according to the predefined keyboard mode
  • the keyboard can be displayed in the display area according to the predefined keyboard style.
  • Step S434 acquiring the touch area in the display area of the terminal that receives the touch signal within a preset time
  • Step S435 adjusting the display size of the keyboard according to the touch area and the display area;
  • the touch signal is detected in the display area of the terminal, that is, the touch area where the user can easily perform touch operations in the terminal, and adjust the display size of the displayed keyboard according to the total size of the touch area in the display area, such as When the user's touch area is small, the keyboard is appropriately reduced so that the user can quickly adjust the size of the keyboard according to the current usage.
  • Steps S431 to S433 are the steps of adjusting the display area of the keyboard
  • steps S434 to S435 are the steps of adjusting the size of the keyboard, which can be adjusted individually, but not the display area and the keyboard size at the same time.
  • the display area and display size of the keyboard can also be adjusted to further improve the input efficiency for the user to input the verification code.
  • an embodiment of the present application also proposes a display device for an input method, and the display device for the input method includes:
  • an analysis module for analyzing the verification code type of the verification code when the verification code is received
  • a determining module for determining a predefined keyboard style according to the application information and/or the verification code type
  • the display module is used for displaying the predefined keyboard style.
  • the determining module is also used to:
  • the predefined keyboard style is determined according to the application information.
  • the application information includes at least one of an application category, an application name, and an application icon.
  • the determining module is also used to:
  • the predefined keyboard style is determined according to the verification code type.
  • the determining module is also used to:
  • the operation information is at least one of a selection operation, a positioning operation, an input operation, an editing operation, and a deletion operation;
  • the predefined keyboard style is the second keyboard style
  • the predefined keyboard style is the first keyboard style.
  • the keyboard style switching device further includes:
  • the switching module is configured to keep the keyboard style unchanged or switch to the previous keyboard style after receiving the verification code input operation in the predefined keyboard style.
  • the keyboard style switching device further includes:
  • the second acquisition module is used to acquire the current input method type and/or the language information of the input method
  • An adjustment module configured to adjust the predefined keyboard style according to the input method type and/or the language information.
  • the keyboard style switching device further includes:
  • the third obtaining module is used to obtain the current input mode of the terminal
  • a second determining module configured to determine the current keyboard display area according to the input mode
  • a display module configured to display a keyboard in the keyboard display area according to the predefined keyboard mode.
  • the adjustment module is also used to:
  • the display size of the keyboard is adjusted according to the touch area and the display area.
  • the present application also proposes a terminal device, which includes a memory, a processor, and a display program for an input method stored in the memory and running on the processor, and the display program for the input method is implemented when executed by the processor.
  • a terminal device which includes a memory, a processor, and a display program for an input method stored in the memory and running on the processor, and the display program for the input method is implemented when executed by the processor.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a display program of an input method is stored, and when the display program of the input method is executed by a processor, the input described in any of the above embodiments can be implemented method showing the steps of the method.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the method described in the various possible implementation manners above.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, including a memory and a processor, where the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a chip installed with the chip is
  • the apparatus performs the method as described in the various possible embodiments above.
  • the embodiments of the terminal device and the readable storage medium provided by this application include all the technical features of the above-mentioned embodiments of the input method display method, and the expansion and explanation contents of the description are basically the same as those of the above-mentioned embodiments of the input method display method. are the same, and will not be repeated here.
  • first, second, third, etc. may be used herein to describe various information, such information should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the same type of information from each other.
  • first information may also be referred to as second information, and similarly, second information may also be referred to as first information, without departing from the scope of this document.
  • the word “if” as used herein can be interpreted as “at the time of” or “when” or “in response to determining”, depending on the context.
  • the singular forms "a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context dictates otherwise.
  • A, B, C means “any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C", for example, " A, B or C” or "A, B and/or C” means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C". Exceptions to this definition arise only when combinations of elements, functions, steps, or operations are inherently mutually exclusive in some way.
  • step codes such as XX, XX are used, and the purpose is to express the corresponding content more clearly and briefly, and does not constitute a substantial restriction on the order. Those skilled in the art may XX will be executed first and then XX, etc., but these should all fall within the protection scope of this application.
  • step codes such as S10 and S20 are used, the purpose of which is to express the corresponding content more clearly and briefly, and does not constitute a substantial restriction on the sequence.
  • S20 will be executed first and then S10, etc., but these should all fall within the protection scope of this application.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Software Systems (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Telephone Function (AREA)

Abstract

A display method for an input method, and a terminal device and a computer-readable storage medium. The method comprises: opening an input display interface of a terminal device that has an input keyboard, and acquiring an unlocking operation triggered on the basis of the input display interface (S100); and triggering a preset password and a display password according to the unlocking operation and a preset unlocking rule, wherein the display password is displayed on a lock-screen interface, and the preset password is different from the display password (S110). In the display method for an input method, an inaccurate display password is displayed on a lock-screen interface when an unlocking operation is detected, such that the variety of display modes is increased, and a password leak and a threat to privacy security caused by another person performing an input operation or peeping at a screen can be effectively prevented when a user is inputting a password.

Description

输入法的显示方法、终端设备及计算机可读存储介质Input method display method, terminal device and computer-readable storage medium
关于优先权引用的声明：Statement on Priority Citation:
本申请要求于2020年08月11日提交中国专利局，申请号为202010798732.5、发明名称为“界面布局调整方法、终端设备及计算机可读存储介质”、This application is required to be submitted to the China Patent Office on August 11, 2020, the application number is 202010798732.5, and the name of the invention is "Interface layout adjustment method, terminal device and computer-readable storage medium",
本申请要求于2020年08月11日提交中国专利局，申请号为202010811210.4、发明名称为“隐私保护方法、设备和存储介质”、This application is required to be submitted to the China Patent Office on August 11, 2020, the application number is 202010811210.4, the name of the invention is "Privacy Protection Method, Device and Storage Medium",
本申请要求于2020年08月11日提交中国专利局，申请号为202010811348.4、发明名称为“信息发送方法、终端设备及计算机可读存储介质”、This application is required to be submitted to the China Patent Office on August 11, 2020, the application number is 202010811348.4, the name of the invention is "information sending method, terminal device and computer-readable storage medium",
本申请要求于2020年08月11日提交中国专利局，申请号为202010803797.4、发明名称为“验证码的输入方法、设备及存储介质”、This application is required to be submitted to the China Patent Office on August 11, 2020, the application number is 202010803797.4, and the name of the invention is "Verification Code Input Method, Device and Storage Medium",
本申请要求于2020年08月11日提交中国专利局，申请号为202010811209.1、发明名称为“键盘样式切换方法、设备及可读存储介质”、This application is required to be submitted to the China Patent Office on August 11, 2020, the application number is 202010811209.1, and the name of the invention is "Keyboard style switching method, device and readable storage medium",
本申请要求于2020年08月11日提交中国专利局，申请号为202010804614.0、发明名称为“字符输入方法、终端设备及计算机可读存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202010804614.0 and the title of the invention "character input method, terminal device and computer-readable storage medium", which was filed with the China Patent Office on August 11, 2020, the entire contents of which are by reference Incorporated in this application.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及移动终端技术领域，尤其涉及一种输入法的显示方法、终端设备及计算机可读存储介质。The present application relates to the technical field of mobile terminals, and in particular, to an input method display method, a terminal device, and a computer-readable storage medium.
背景技术Background technique
随着移动通信网络和互联网的飞速发展，手机、PAD等便携式的智能设备已成为人们生活和工作中必不可少的部分。在使用智能设备的过程中，基于智能设备的显示界面，通过各种操作如触控操作以实现对智能设备的便捷使用。举例来说，基于输入显示界面如进行解锁操作的解锁界面，又如进行调整操作的布局界面等，通过输入触发信号以实现各种功能，如解锁操作即可实现解锁，又如调整操作实现界面调整。然而，在实际应用过程中，基于输入显示界面以通过输入触发信号以实现各种功能，在输入触发信号时，输入显示界面的显示状态并不会发生改变，显示方式单一。With the rapid development of mobile communication networks and the Internet, portable smart devices such as mobile phones and PADs have become an indispensable part of people's life and work. In the process of using the smart device, based on the display interface of the smart device, various operations such as touch operations are used to realize the convenient use of the smart device. For example, based on the input display interface, such as the unlocking interface for unlocking operation, and the layout interface for adjusting operation, etc., various functions are realized by inputting trigger signals, such as unlocking operation to realize unlocking, and adjustment operation to realize interface. Adjustment. However, in a practical application process, various functions are realized by inputting a trigger signal based on the input display interface. When the trigger signal is input, the display state of the input display interface does not change, and the display mode is single.
前面的叙述在于提供一般的背景信息，并不一定构成现有技术。The preceding statements are intended to provide general background information and may not constitute prior art.
申请内容Application content
本申请的主要目的在于提供一种输入法的显示方法、终端设备及计算机可读存储介质，旨在解决基于输入显示界面以通过输入触发信号以实现各种功能，在输入触发信号时，输入显示界面的显示状态并不会发生改变，显示方式单一的问题。The main purpose of this application is to provide an input method display method, a terminal device and a computer-readable storage medium, aiming to solve the problem of realizing various functions by inputting a trigger signal based on an input display interface. The display state of the interface does not change, and the display method is a single problem.
可选地，本申请提供一种输入法的显示方法，所述输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：Optionally, the present application provides a method for displaying an input method, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作；以及，Get the unlock operation triggered based on the input display interface; and,
根据所述解锁操作和预设解锁规则触发预设密码和显示密码，所述显示密码显示于锁屏界面上，其中，所述预设密码与所述显示密码不相同。The preset password and the displayed password are triggered according to the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule, and the displayed password is displayed on the lock screen interface, wherein the preset password and the displayed password are different.
可选地，本申请还提供一种输入法的显示方法，所述输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：Optionally, the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
检测到解锁操作时，获取当前使用模式并根据所述解锁操作触发显示密码；When an unlocking operation is detected, obtain the current usage mode and trigger the display of the password according to the unlocking operation;
若所述当前使用模式为预设模式，则输出所述显示密码；和/或，If the current use mode is a preset mode, output the displayed password; and/or,
若所述当前使用模式不为预设模式，则不输出所述显示密码。If the current use mode is not the preset mode, the displayed password is not output.
可选地，本申请还提供一种输入法的显示方法，所述输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：Optionally, the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
在接收到输入显示界面的界面调整信号，所述输入显示界面包括显示区域和/或输入功能区域；以及，receiving an interface adjustment signal of an input display interface, the input display interface including a display area and/or an input function area; and,
根据所述界面调整信号调整所述显示区域和/或输入功能区域，其中，所述输入功能区域随着界面调整信号不同显示至少一种布局显示方式。The display area and/or the input function area are adjusted according to the interface adjustment signal, wherein the input function area displays at least one layout display manner according to the interface adjustment signal.
可选地，本申请还提供一种输入法的显示方法，所述输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：Optionally, the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
于输入显示界面输入的待发送信息；The information to be sent entered on the input display interface;
于所述输入显示界面选择目标发送应用；以及，Selecting a target sending application on the input display interface; and,
将所述待发送信息发送至所述目标发送应用。Send the to-be-sent information to the target sending application.
可选地，本申请还提供一种输入法的显示方法，所述输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：Optionally, the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
于输入显示界面，选择目标发送应用；In the input display interface, select the target sending application;
所述输入显示界面根据所述目标发送应用显示对应的待输入样式；以及，The input display interface displays the corresponding to-be-input style according to the target sending application; and,
于所述待输入样式中输入待发送消息并发送。Input the message to be sent in the to-be-input style and send it.
此外，可选地，本申请还提供一种终端设备，所述终端设备包括：存储器、处理器以及存储在所述存储器里并可在所述处理器上运行的输入法的显示程序，所述输入法的显示程序被所述处理器执行时实现如以上所述输入法的显示方法的各个步骤。In addition, optionally, the present application further provides a terminal device, the terminal device includes: a memory, a processor, and an input method display program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, the When the display program of the input method is executed by the processor, each step of the display method of the input method as described above is implemented.
此外，可选地，本申请还提供一种可读存储介质，所述可读存储介质上存储有输入法的显示程序，所述输入法的显示程序被所述处理器执行时实现如以上所述输入法的显示方法的各个步骤。In addition, optionally, the present application further provides a readable storage medium, on which a display program of an input method is stored, and the display program of the input method is implemented as described above when executed by the processor. Each step of the display method of the input method is described.
本申请提出的输入法的显示方法，通过检测到解锁操作时，将非准确的显示密码显示于锁屏界面上，增加了显示方式的多样，获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作，并根据所述解锁操作和预设解锁规则触发预设密码和显示密码，并将所述预设密码与显示密码区别设置，由此用户在隐私保护设备上的密码输入操作区别于传统意义的单击输入，并且锁屏界面的显示密码也并非为准确密码，使得他人无法通过用户的输入操作获取用户的密码，避免了他人通过用户操作或在屏幕显示的密码信息获取用户密码造成隐私泄露的问题。The display method of the input method proposed by the present application displays an inaccurate display password on the lock screen interface when an unlock operation is detected, thereby increasing the variety of display modes, obtaining the unlock operation triggered based on the input display interface, and according to the The unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule trigger the preset password and the displayed password, and the preset password and the displayed password are set differently, so that the user's password input operation on the privacy protection device is different from the traditional single-click input, In addition, the displayed password on the lock screen interface is not an accurate password, so that others cannot obtain the user's password through the user's input operation, which avoids the problem of privacy leakage caused by others obtaining the user's password through the user's operation or the password information displayed on the screen.
附图说明Description of drawings
此处的附图被并入说明书中并构成本说明书的一部分，示出了符合本申请的实施例，并与说明书一起用于解释本申请的原理。为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍，显而易见地，对于本领域普通技术人员而言，在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of this specification, illustrate embodiments consistent with the application and together with the description serve to explain the principles of the application. In order to illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, the accompanying drawings required for the description of the embodiments will be briefly introduced below. Obviously, for those of ordinary skill in the art, without creative efforts On the premise, other drawings can also be obtained according to these drawings.
图1为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图；1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络***架构图；FIG. 2 is an architecture diagram of a communication network system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例方案涉及的硬件运行环境的装置结构示意图；3 is a schematic diagram of the device structure of the hardware operating environment involved in the solution of the embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请输入法的显示方法第一实施例的流程示意图；FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of the first embodiment of the display method of the input method of the application;
图5为双击记为一次密码输入的示意图；Fig. 5 is the schematic diagram that double-click is marked as one-time password input;
图6为解锁规则设置界面的示意图；6 is a schematic diagram of an unlocking rule setting interface;
图7为输入密码与显示密码数量级不同的示意图；Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of different orders of magnitude between inputting a password and displaying a password;
图8为对部分显示密码进行特殊处理的示意图；8 is a schematic diagram of performing special processing on part of the displayed password;
图9为解锁规则变更后提示消息的示意图；9 is a schematic diagram of a prompt message after the unlocking rule is changed;
图10为本申请输入法的显示方法第十实施例的流程示意图；10 is a schematic flowchart of a tenth embodiment of a display method for an input method according to the present application;
图11为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十一实施例的流程示意图；11 is a schematic flowchart of an eleventh embodiment of an input method display method of the present application;
图12为第十一实施例中快捷工具栏悬浮于输入显示界面对输入显示界面进行遮挡的示意图；12 is a schematic diagram of a shortcut toolbar suspended on an input display interface to block the input display interface in the eleventh embodiment;
图13为第十一实施例中在检测到***第三方的快捷功能信息根据输入键盘与快捷工具栏的整***置进行自适应调整后的示意图；13 is a schematic diagram of the eleventh embodiment after detecting that the shortcut function information inserted into a third party is adaptively adjusted according to the overall position of the input keyboard and the shortcut toolbar;
图14为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十二实施例的流程示意图；14 is a schematic flowchart of the twelfth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图15为本申请的输入法的显示方法在第十二实施例中输入功能区域分区显示的流程示意图；15 is a schematic flowchart of the display method of the input method of the present application in the twelfth embodiment of the input function area partition display;
图16为第十二实施例中输入子显示区域显示输入键盘以及功能子显示区域显示快捷功能信息的示意图；16 is a schematic diagram of displaying an input keyboard in an input sub-display area and displaying shortcut function information in a function sub-display area in the twelfth embodiment;
图17为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十三实施例的流程示意图；17 is a schematic flowchart of the thirteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图18为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十四实施例的流程示意图；FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图19为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十五实施例的流程示意图；19 is a schematic flowchart of a fifteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图20为本申请的输入法的显示方法方法第十六实施例的流程示意图；20 is a schematic flowchart of a sixteenth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method according to the present application;
图21为本申请的输入法的显示方法方法第十六实施例的发送选择界面显示于信息输入界面的第一显示方式；21 is a first display mode in which a transmission selection interface is displayed on the information input interface in the sixteenth embodiment of the method for displaying the input method of the present application;
图22为本申请的输入法的显示方法方法第十六实施例的发送选择界面显示于信息输入界面的第二显示方式；22 is a second display mode in which the transmission selection interface is displayed on the information input interface in the sixteenth embodiment of the method for displaying the input method of the present application;
图23为本申请的输入法的显示方法方法第十七实施例的流程示意图；23 is a schematic flowchart of a seventeenth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method of the present application;
图24为本申请的输入法的显示方法方法第十八实施例的流程示意图；24 is a schematic flowchart of an eighteenth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method of the present application;
图25为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十九实施例的流程示意图；FIG. 25 is a schematic flowchart of the nineteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图26为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十九实施例的字符以预设规则对应的显示方式显示流程示意图；FIG. 26 is a schematic flowchart of displaying characters in a display mode corresponding to a preset rule according to the nineteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图27为本申请的输入法的显示方法第二十实施例的流程示意图；27 is a schematic flowchart of the twentieth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图28为本申请的输入法的显示方法第二十一实施例的流程示意图；FIG. 28 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-first embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图29为本申请的输入法的显示方法第二十二实施例的流程示意图；29 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图30为本申请的输入法的显示方法第二十二实施例中字符修正类型为删除字符的示意图；30 is a schematic diagram showing that the character correction type in the twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the application is to delete characters;
图31为本申请的输入法的显示方法第二十二实施例中字符修正类型为恢复字符的示意图；31 is a schematic diagram showing that the character correction type is recovery characters in the twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the application;
图32为本申请提供的输入法的显示方法第二十三实施例的流程示意图；32 is a schematic flowchart of a twenty-third embodiment of a display method for an input method provided by the present application;
图33为本申请提供的输入法的显示方法第二十四实施例的流程示意图；33 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-fourth embodiment of the display method of the input method provided by the present application;
图34为本申请提供的输入法的显示方法第二十五实施例的流程示意图；34 is a schematic flowchart of a twenty-fifth embodiment of a display method for an input method provided by the present application;
图35为本申请提供的输入法的显示方法第二十六实施例的流程示意图；35 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-sixth embodiment of the display method of the input method provided by the present application;
图36是本申请实施例方案涉及的用户交互的验证界面参考图；36 is a reference diagram of a verification interface for user interaction involved in the solution of the embodiment of the present application;
图37为本申请输入法的显示方法第二十七实施例的流程示意图；37 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-seventh embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图38为本申请输入法的显示方法第二十七实施例中一用户界面示意图；38 is a schematic diagram of a user interface in the twenty-seventh embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图39为本申请输入法的显示方法第二十七实施例中又一用户界面示意图；39 is a schematic diagram of another user interface in the twenty-seventh embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图40为本申请输入法的显示方法第二十七实施例中另一用户界面示意图；40 is a schematic diagram of another user interface in the twenty-seventh embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图41为本申请输入法的显示方法第二十八实施例中对于图37步骤S410的细化流程图；FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of step S410 in FIG. 37 in the twenty-eighth embodiment of the input method display method of the present application;
图42为本申请输入法的显示方法第二十九实施例中对于图37步骤S410的细化流程图；FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of step S410 in FIG. 37 in the twenty-ninth embodiment of the input method display method of the present application;
图43为本申请输入法的显示方法第三十实施例中对于图37步骤S410的细化流程图；FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of step S410 in FIG. 37 in the thirtieth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application;
图44为本申请输入法的显示方法第三十三实施例中对于步骤S420之后的流程示意图。FIG. 44 is a schematic flowchart after step S420 in the thirty-third embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application.
本申请目的的实现、功能特点及优点将结合实施例，参照附图做进一步说明。通过上述附图，已示出本申请明确的实施例，后文中将有更详细的描述。这些附图和文字描述并不是为了通过任何方式限制本申请构思的范围，而是通过参考特定实施例为本领域技术人员说明本申请的概念。The realization, functional characteristics and advantages of the purpose of the present application will be further described with reference to the accompanying drawings in conjunction with the embodiments. Specific embodiments of the present application have been shown by the above-mentioned drawings, and will be described in more detail hereinafter. These drawings and written descriptions are not intended to limit the scope of the concepts of the present application in any way, but to illustrate the concepts of the present application to those skilled in the art by referring to specific embodiments.
具体实施方式detailed description
应当理解，此处所描述的具体实施例仅仅用以解释本申请，并不用于限定本申请。It should be understood that the specific embodiments described herein are only used to explain the present application, but not to limit the present application.
在后续的描述中，使用用于表示元件的诸如“模块”、“部件”或者“单元”的后缀仅为了有利于本申请的说明，其本身没有特定的意义。因此，“模块”、“部件”或者“单元”可以混合地使用。In the following description, suffixes such as "module", "component" or "unit" used to represent elements are used only to facilitate the description of the present application, and have no specific meaning per se. Thus, "module", "component" or "unit" may be used interchangeably.
终端设备可以以各种形式来实施。例如，本申请中描述的终端设备可以包括诸如手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、便捷式媒体播放器(Portable Media Player，PMP)、导航装置、可穿戴设备、智能手环、计步器等移动终端，以及诸如数字TV、台式计算机等固定终端。Terminal devices can be implemented in various forms. For example, the terminal equipment described in this application may include mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, palmtop computers, personal digital assistants (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), portable media players (Portable Media Player, PMP), navigation devices, Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers, as well as stationary terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
后续描述中将以移动终端为例进行说明，本领域技术人员将理解的是，除了特别用于移动目的的元件之外，根据本申请的实施方式的构造也能够应用于固定类型的终端。The following description will take a mobile terminal as an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that, in addition to elements specially used for mobile purposes, the configurations according to the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to stationary type terminals.
请参阅图1，其为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图，该移动终端100可以包括：RF(Radio Frequency，射频)单元101、WiFi模块102、音频输出单元103、A/V(音频/视频)输入单元104、传感器105、显示单元106、用户输入单元107、接口单元108、存储器109、处理器110、以及电源111等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解，图1中示出的移动终端结构并不构成对移动终端的限定，移动终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。Please refer to FIG. 1 , which is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application. The mobile terminal 100 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) unit 101, a WiFi module 102, an audio output unit 103, a /V (audio/video) input unit 104, sensor 105, display unit 106, user input unit 107, interface unit 108, memory 109, processor 110, and power supply 111 and other components. Those skilled in the art can understand that the structure of the mobile terminal shown in FIG. 1 does not constitute a limitation on the mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal may include more or less components than the one shown, or combine some components, or different components layout.
下面结合图1对移动终端的各个部件进行具体的介绍：Below in conjunction with Fig. 1, each component of the mobile terminal is introduced in detail:
射频单元101可用于收发信息或通话过程中，信号的接收和发送，具体的，将基站的下行信息接收后，给处理器110处理；另外，将上行的数据发送给基站。通常，射频单元101包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。此外，射频单元101还可以通过无线通信与网络和其他设备通信。上述无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议，包括但不限于GSM(Global System of Mobile communication，全球移动通讯***)、GPRS(General Packet Radio Service，通用分组无线服务)、CDMA2000(Code Division Multiple Access 2000，码分多址2000)、WCDMA(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,宽带码分多址)、TD-SCDMA(Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access，时分同步码分多址)、FDD-LTE(Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution，频分双工长期演进)和TDD-LTE(Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution，分时双工长期演进)等。The radio frequency unit 101 can be used for receiving and sending signals during transmission and reception of information or during a call. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is processed by the processor 110; in addition, the uplink data is sent to the base station. Generally, the radio frequency unit 101 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like. In addition, the radio frequency unit 101 can also communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication. The above-mentioned wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communication), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service, General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000 , Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, frequency division duplexing long term evolution) and TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, time division duplexing long term evolution) and so on.
WiFi属于短距离无线传输技术，移动终端通过WiFi模块102可以帮助用户收发电子邮件、浏览网页和访问流式媒体等，它为用户提供了无线的宽带互联网访问。虽然图1示出了WiFi模块102，但是可以理解的是，其并不属于移动终端的必须构成，完全可以根据需要在不改变发明的本质的范围内而省略。WiFi is a short-distance wireless transmission technology, and the mobile terminal can help users to send and receive emails, browse web pages, access streaming media, etc. through the WiFi module 102, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access. Although FIG. 1 shows the WiFi module 102, it can be understood that it is not a necessary component of the mobile terminal, and can be completely omitted as required within the scope of not changing the essence of the invention.
音频输出单元103可以在移动终端100处于呼叫信号接收模式、通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式、广播接收模式等等模式下时，将射频单元101或WiFi模块102接收的或者在存储器109中存储的音频数据转换成音频信号并且输出为声音。而且，音频输出单元103还可以提供与移动终端100执行的特定功能相关的音频输出(例如，呼叫信号接收声音、消息接收声音等等)。音频输出单元103可以包括扬声器、蜂鸣器等等。When the mobile terminal 100 is in a call signal receiving mode, a talking mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast receiving mode, etc., the audio output unit 103 can store the data received by the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 or stored in the memory 109. The audio data is converted into audio signal and output as sound. Also, the audio output unit 103 may also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 100 (eg, call signal reception sound, message reception sound, etc.). The audio output unit 103 may include a speaker, a buzzer, and the like.
A/V输入单元104用于接收音频或视频信号。A/V输入单元104可以包括图形处理器(Graphics Processing Unit，GPU)1041和麦克风1042，图形处理器1041对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。处理后的图像帧可以显示在显示单元106上。经图形处理器1041处理后的图像帧可以存储在存储器109(或其它存储介质)中或者经由射频单元101或WiFi模块102进行发送。麦克风1042可以在电话通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式等等运行模式中经由麦克风1042接收声音(音频数据)，并且能够将这样的声音处理为音频数据。处理后的音频(语音)数据可以在电话通话模式的情况下转换为可经由射频单元101发送到移动通信基站的格式输出。麦克风1042可以实施各种类型的噪声消除(或抑制)算法以消除(或抑制)在接收和发送音频信号的过程中产生的噪声或者干扰。The A/V input unit 104 is used to receive audio or video signals. The A/V input unit 104 may include a graphics processor (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) 1041 and a microphone 1042, and the graphics processor 1041 responds to still pictures or images obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode. The image data of the video is processed. The processed image frames may be displayed on the display unit 106 . The image frames processed by the graphics processor 1041 may be stored in the memory 109 (or other storage medium) or transmitted via the radio frequency unit 101 or the WiFi module 102 . The microphone 1042 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 1042 in a telephone call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, etc. operating modes, and can process such sound into audio data. The processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format that can be transmitted to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 101 for output in the case of a telephone call mode. The microphone 1042 may implement various types of noise cancellation (or suppression) algorithms to remove (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and transmitting audio signals.
移动终端100还包括至少一种传感器105，比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。具体地，光传感器包括环境光传感器及接近传感器，其中，环境光传感器可根据环境光线的明暗来调节显示面板1061的亮度，接近传感器可在移动终端100移动到耳边时，关闭显示面板1061和/或背光。作为运动传感器的一种，加速计传感器可检测各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小，静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向，可用于识别手机姿态的应用(比如横竖屏切换、相关游戏、磁力计姿态校准)、振动识别相关功能(比如计步器、敲击)等；至于手机还可配置的指纹传感器、压力传感器、虹膜传感器、分子传感器、 陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器，在此不再赘述。The mobile terminal 100 also includes at least one sensor 105, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors. Specifically, the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor, wherein the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 1061 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor can close the display panel 1061 and the display panel 1061 when the mobile terminal 100 is moved to the ear. / or backlight. As a kind of motion sensor, the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (usually three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when it is stationary. games, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tapping), etc.; as for the fingerprint sensor, pressure sensor, iris sensor, molecular sensor, gyroscope, barometer, hygrometer, Other sensors such as thermometers, infrared sensors, etc. will not be repeated here.
显示单元106用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息。显示单元106可包括显示面板1061，可以采用液晶显示器(Liquid Crystal Display，LCD)、有机发光二极管(Organic Light-Emitting Diode,OLED)等形式来配置显示面板1061。The display unit 106 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user. The display unit 106 may include a display panel 1061, and the display panel 1061 may be configured in the form of a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), an Organic Light-Emitting Diode (OLED), or the like.
用户输入单元107可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息，以及产生与移动终端的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。具体地，用户输入单元107可包括触控面板1071以及其他输入设备1072。触控面板1071，也称为触摸屏，可收集用户在其上或附近的触摸操作(比如用户使用手指、触笔等任何适合的物体或附件在触控面板1071上或在触控面板1071附近的操作)，并根据预先设定的程式驱动相应的连接装置。触控面板1071可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。其中，触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位，并检测触摸操作带来的信号，将信号传送给触摸控制器；触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息，并将它转换成触点坐标，再送给处理器110，并能接收处理器110发来的命令并加以执行。此外，可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等至少一种类型实现触控面板1071。除了触控面板1071，用户输入单元107还可以包括其他输入设备1072。具体地，其他输入设备1072可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆等中的一种或至少一种，具体此处不做限定。The user input unit 107 may be used to receive input numerical or character information, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal. Specifically, the user input unit 107 may include a touch panel 1071 and other input devices 1072 . The touch panel 1071, also referred to as a touch screen, can collect the user's touch operations on or near it (such as the user's finger, stylus, etc., any suitable object or accessory on or near the touch panel 1071). operation), and drive the corresponding connection device according to the preset program. The touch panel 1071 may include two parts, a touch detection device and a touch controller. Among them, the touch detection device detects the user's touch orientation, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts it into contact coordinates, and then sends it to the touch controller. To the processor 110, and can receive the command sent by the processor 110 and execute it. In addition, the touch panel 1071 can be realized by adopting at least one type of resistive type, capacitive type, infrared ray, and surface acoustic wave. In addition to the touch panel 1071 , the user input unit 107 may also include other input devices 1072 . Specifically, other input devices 1072 may include, but are not limited to, one or at least one of physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), trackballs, mice, joysticks, etc. limited.
进一步的，触控面板1071可覆盖显示面板1061，当触控面板1071检测到在其上或附近的触摸操作后，传送给处理器110以确定触摸事件的类型，随后处理器110根据触摸事件的类型在显示面板1061上提供相应的视觉输出。虽然在图1中，触控面板1071与显示面板1061是作为两个独立的部件来实现移动终端的输入和输出功能，但是在某些实施例中，可以将触控面板1071与显示面板1061集成而实现移动终端的输入和输出功能，具体此处不做限定。Further, the touch panel 1071 can cover the display panel 1061, and when the touch panel 1071 detects a touch operation on or near it, it transmits it to the processor 110 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 110 determines the type of the touch event according to the touch event. Type provides corresponding visual output on display panel 1061 . Although in FIG. 1 , the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 are used as two independent components to realize the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, but in some embodiments, the touch panel 1071 and the display panel 1061 may be integrated The input and output functions of the mobile terminal are implemented, which is not specifically limited here.
接口单元108用作至少一个外部装置与移动终端100连接可以通过的接口。例如，外部装置可以包括有线或无线头戴式耳机端口、外部电源(或电池充电器)端口、有线或无线数据端口、存储卡端口、用于连接具有识别模块的装置的端口、音频输入/输出(I/O)端口、视频I/O端口、耳机端口等等。接口单元108可以用于接收来自外部装置的输入(例如，数据信息、电力等等)并且将接收到的输入传输到移动终端100内的一个或多个元件或者可以用于在移动终端100和外部装置之间传输数据。The interface unit 108 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected to the mobile terminal 100 . For example, external devices may include wired or wireless headset ports, external power (or battery charger) ports, wired or wireless data ports, memory card ports, ports for connecting devices with identification modules, audio input/output (I/O) ports, video I/O ports, headphone ports, and more. The interface unit 108 may be used to receive input (eg, data information, power, etc.) from an external device and transmit the received input to one or more elements within the mobile terminal 100 or may be used between the mobile terminal 100 and the external Transfer data between devices.
存储器109可用于存储软件程序以及各种数据。存储器109可主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区，其中，存储程序区可存储操作***、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等；存储数据区可存储根据手机的使用所创建的数据(比如音频数据、电话本等)等。此外，存储器109可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。The memory 109 may be used to store software programs as well as various data. The memory 109 may mainly include a stored program area and a stored data area, wherein the stored program area may store an operating system, an application program (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.) required for at least one function, and the like; Data created by the use of the mobile phone (such as audio data, phone book, etc.), etc. Additionally, memory 109 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid state storage device.
处理器110是移动终端的控制中心，利用各种接口和线路连接整个移动终端的各个部分，通过运行或执行存储在存储器109内的软件程序和/或模块，以及调用存储在存储器109内的数据，执行移动终端的各种功能和处理数据，从而对移动终端进行整体监控。处理器110可包括一个或多个处理单元；优选的，处理器110可集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器，其中，应用处理器主要处理操作***、用户界面和应用程序等，调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信。可以理解的是，上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器110中。The processor 110 is the control center of the mobile terminal, uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal, runs or executes the software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 109, and calls the data stored in the memory 109. , perform various functions of the mobile terminal and process data, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole. The processor 110 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 110 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor, wherein the application processor mainly processes the operating system, user interface, and application programs, etc., and the modem The processor mainly handles wireless communication. It can be understood that, the above-mentioned modulation and demodulation processor may not be integrated into the processor 110 .
移动终端100还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源111(比如电池)，优选的，电源111可以通过电源管理***与处理器110逻辑相连，从而通过电源管理***实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。The mobile terminal 100 may also include a power supply 111 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components. Preferably, the power supply 111 may be logically connected to the processor 110 through a power management system, so as to manage charging, discharging, and power consumption management through the power management system and other functions.
尽管图1未示出，移动终端100还可以包括蓝牙模块等，在此不再赘述。Although not shown in FIG. 1 , the mobile terminal 100 may also include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be described herein again.
为了便于理解本申请实施例，下面对本申请的移动终端所基于的通信网络***进行描述。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, a communication network system on which the mobile terminal of the present application is based is described below.
请参阅图2，图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络***架构图，该通信网络*** 为通用移动通信技术的LTE***，该LTE***包括依次通讯连接的UE(User Equipment，用户设备)201，E-UTRAN(Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network，演进式UMTS陆地无线接入网)202，EPC(Evolved Packet Core，演进式分组核心网)203和运营商的IP业务204。Please refer to FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is an architecture diagram of a communication network system provided by an embodiment of the application. The communication network system is an LTE system of universal mobile communication technology. ) 201, E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network, Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 202, EPC (Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core) 203 and the operator's IP service 204.
具体地，UE201可以是上述终端100，此处不再赘述。Specifically, the UE 201 may be the above-mentioned terminal 100, which will not be repeated here.
E-UTRAN202包括eNodeB2021和其它eNodeB2022等。其中，eNodeB2021可以通过回程(backhaul)(例如X2接口)与其它eNodeB2022连接，eNodeB2021连接到EPC203，eNodeB2021可以提供UE201到EPC203的接入。 E-UTRAN 202 includes eNodeB 2021 and other eNodeB 2022 and the like. The eNodeB 2021 can be connected to other eNodeBs 2022 through a backhaul (eg X2 interface), the eNodeB 2021 is connected to the EPC 203 , and the eNodeB 2021 can provide access from the UE 201 to the EPC 203 .
EPC203可以包括MME(Mobility Management Entity，移动性管理实体)2031，HSS(Home Subscriber Server，归属用户服务器)2032，其它MME2033，SGW(Serving Gate Way，服务网关)2034，PGW(PDN Gate Way，分组数据网络网关)2035和PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function，政策和资费功能实体)2036等。其中，MME2031是处理UE201和EPC203之间信令的控制节点，提供承载和连接管理。HSS2032用于提供一些寄存器来管理诸如归属位置寄存器(图中未示)之类的功能，并且保存有一些有关服务特征、数据速率等用户专用的信息。所有用户数据都可以通过SGW2034进行发送，PGW2035可以提供UE 201的IP地址分配以及其它功能，PCRF2036是业务数据流和IP承载资源的策略与计费控制策略决策点，它为策略与计费执行功能单元(图中未示)选择及提供可用的策略和计费控制决策。 EPC 203 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity, Mobility Management Entity) 2031, HSS (Home Subscriber Server, Home Subscriber Server) 2032, other MME 2033, SGW (Serving Gate Way, Serving Gateway) 2034, PGW (PDN Gate Way, packet data network gateway) 2035 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function, policy and charging functional entity) 2036 and so on. Among them, MME2031 is a control node that processes signaling between UE201 and EPC203, and provides bearer and connection management. The HSS2032 is used to provide some registers to manage functions such as the home location register (not shown in the figure), and to store some user-specific information about service characteristics, data rates, etc. All user data can be sent through SGW2034, PGW2035 can provide IP address allocation and other functions of UE 201, PCRF2036 is the policy and charging control policy decision point of service data flow and IP bearer resources, it is the policy and charging execution function A unit (not shown) selects and provides available policy and charging control decisions.
IP业务204可以包括因特网、内联网、IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem，IP多媒体子***)或其它IP业务等。The IP service 204 may include the Internet, an intranet, an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services.
虽然上述以LTE***为例进行了介绍，但本领域技术人员应当知晓，本申请不仅仅适用于LTE***，也可以适用于其他无线通信***，例如GSM、CDMA2000、WCDMA、TD-SCDMA以及未来新的网络***等，此处不做限定。Although the above takes the LTE system as an example, those skilled in the art should know that this application is not only applicable to the LTE system, but also applicable to other wireless communication systems, such as GSM, CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and future new The network system, etc., is not limited here.
基于上述移动终端硬件结构以及通信网络***，提出本申请各个实施例。Based on the above-mentioned mobile terminal hardware structure and communication network system, various embodiments of the present application are proposed.
由于在现有密码输入方法中，当用户输入密码时，容易被周围别有用心的人窥见并记录密码，导致密码泄露，威胁隐私安全。In the existing password input method, when a user enters a password, it is easy to be seen and recorded by people with ulterior motives around, which leads to the leakage of the password and threatens privacy security.
本申请实施例提出的一种输入法的显示方法、设备和存储介质，通过检测用户的解锁操作是否为预设解锁规则，将解锁操作区分为解密解锁操作和干扰解锁操作，若是解密解锁操作则正常输入密码，若干扰解锁操作则在未开启干扰功能的时候则判定该次解锁操作无效，或在干扰模式开启时输入干扰码，终端在进行密码对比时将自动过滤干扰码，此外，还可以根据用户当前所处的环境自动选择使用该输入法的显示方法或是使用传统的密码输入方法，实现了改变用户在密码输入的交互方式并在密码输入时展示带有干扰信息的密码值，从而避免了他人通过用户操作或在屏幕显示的密码信息获取用户密码造成隐私泄露的问题。The display method, device and storage medium of an input method proposed by the embodiments of the present application, by detecting whether the user's unlocking operation is a preset unlocking rule, the unlocking operation is divided into a decryption unlocking operation and an interference unlocking operation. Enter the password normally. If the unlocking operation is interfered, the unlocking operation is determined to be invalid when the interference function is not enabled, or the interference code is entered when the interference mode is enabled, and the terminal will automatically filter the interference code when comparing the password. According to the current environment of the user, the display method of the input method or the traditional password input method is automatically selected, which realizes the change of the user's interactive mode of password input and displays the password value with interference information when the password is input. It avoids the problem of privacy leakage caused by others obtaining user passwords through user operations or password information displayed on the screen.
如图3所示，图3是本申请实施例方案涉及的硬件运行环境的终端设备(其中终端设备可以是隐私保护设备，其中，隐私保护设备可以是由单独的隐私保护装置构成，也可以是由其他装置与隐私保护装置组合形成)一结构示意图。As shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 3 is a terminal device of the hardware operating environment involved in the solution of the embodiment of the present application (wherein the terminal device may be a privacy protection device, wherein the privacy protection device may be composed of a separate privacy protection device, or may be a It is formed by combining other devices and privacy protection devices) a schematic diagram of the structure.
本申请实施例终端可以是固定终端，也可以是移动终端，如，带联网功能的智能空调、智能电灯、智能电源、智能音箱、自动驾驶汽车、PC(personal computer)个人计算机、智能手机、平板电脑、电子书阅读器、便携计算机等。The terminal in the embodiment of the present application may be a fixed terminal or a mobile terminal, such as a smart air conditioner with networking function, a smart light bulb, a smart power supply, a smart speaker, an autonomous vehicle, a personal computer (PC), a smart phone, a tablet Computers, e-book readers, portable computers, etc.
如图3所示，该终端可以包括：处理器1001，例如，中央处理器Central Processing Unit，CPU)，网络接口1004，用户接口1003，存储器1005，通信总线1002。其中，通信总线1002用于实现这些组件之间的连接通信。用户接口1003可以包括显示屏(Display)、输入单元比如键盘(Keyboard)，可选用户接口1003还可以包括标准的有线接口、无线接口。网络接口1004可选的可以包括标准的有线接口、无线接口(如无线保真WIreless-FIdelity，WIFI接口)。存储器1005可以是高速RAM存储器，也可以是 稳定的存储器(non-volatile memory)，例如，磁盘存储器。存储器1005可选的还可以是独立于前述处理器1001的存储装置。As shown in FIG. 3 , the terminal may include: a processor 1001, for example, a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU), a network interface 1004, a user interface 1003, a memory 1005, and a communication bus 1002. Among them, the communication bus 1002 is used to realize the connection and communication between these components. The user interface 1003 may include a display screen (Display), an input unit such as a keyboard (Keyboard), and the optional user interface 1003 may also include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface. Optionally, the network interface 1004 may include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface (eg, wireless fidelity WIreless-FIdelity, WIFI interface). The memory 1005 may be high-speed RAM memory, or may be non-volatile memory, such as disk memory. Optionally, the memory 1005 may also be a storage device independent of the aforementioned processor 1001 .
可选地，终端还可以包括摄像头、RF(Radio Frequency，射频)电路，传感器、音频电路、WiFi模块；输入单元，比显示屏，触摸屏；网络接口可选除无线接口中除WiFi外，蓝牙、探针等等。其中，传感器比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。具体地，光传感器可包括环境光传感器及接近传感器；当然，移动终端还可配置陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器，在此不再赘述。Optionally, the terminal may also include a camera, an RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) circuit, a sensor, an audio circuit, and a WiFi module; an input unit, a display screen, and a touch screen; the network interface can be selected in addition to WiFi in the wireless interface, Bluetooth, Probes, etc. Among them, sensors such as light sensors, motion sensors and other sensors. Specifically, the light sensor may include an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor; of course, the mobile terminal may also be configured with other sensors such as a gyroscope, a barometer, a hygrometer, a thermometer, an infrared sensor, etc., which will not be repeated here.
本领域技术人员可以理解，图3中示出的终端结构并不构成对终端的限定，可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。Those skilled in the art can understand that the terminal structure shown in FIG. 3 does not constitute a limitation on the terminal, and may include more or less components than the one shown, or combine some components, or arrange different components.
参照图4，本申请的申请一种输入法的显示方法的第一实施例中，所述输入法的显示方法包括：Referring to FIG. 4 , in the first embodiment of an input method display method of the present application, the input method display method includes:
步骤S100，打开终端设备具有输入键盘的输入显示界面，获取基于所述输入显示界面触发的解锁操作；Step S100, opening an input display interface with an input keyboard on the terminal device, and acquiring an unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface;
隐私保护设备获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作。The privacy protection device acquires an unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface.
可选地，所述输入显示界面包括解锁界面、熄屏界面、应用界面、***界面、设置界面中的至少一种。Optionally, the input display interface includes at least one of an unlock interface, a screen-off interface, an application interface, a system interface, and a setting interface.
所述隐私保护设备包含手机、PAD、智能手表等设备，在此不做具体限定，隐私保护设备监测到进入锁屏界面的方法可以为如用户按下预设的打开/关闭屏幕的按键，也可以是如抬手、双击等唤醒进入锁屏界面的方法，并获取用户在锁屏界面触发的解锁操作，所述解锁操作是用户的输入操作，如单击、双击、长按和滑动，还可以是带有压感设备上的不同压力的点击行为，所述解锁操作可参照是否存在与其对应过的预设解锁规则分为解密解锁操作和干扰解锁操作，所述解锁操作都是基于锁屏界面的输入按键，如实体按键或是屏幕显示的虚拟按键，所述输入按键可为数字按键、字母按键、字符按键等或多种混合按键。The privacy protection device includes mobile phones, PADs, smart watches and other devices, which are not specifically limited here. The method for the privacy protection device to detect entering the lock screen interface may be, for example, the user presses a preset button to open/close the screen, or It can be a method of waking up to enter the lock screen interface, such as raising a hand, double-clicking, etc., and obtaining the unlock operation triggered by the user on the lock screen interface. It can be a click behavior with different pressures on the pressure-sensitive device. The unlocking operation can be divided into decryption unlocking operation and interference unlocking operation with reference to whether there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to it. The unlocking operation is based on the lock screen. Input keys of the interface, such as physical keys or virtual keys displayed on the screen, the input keys may be numeric keys, letter keys, character keys, etc., or a variety of mixed keys.
步骤S110，根据所述解锁操作和预设解锁规则触发预设密码和显示密码，所述显示密码显示于锁屏界面上，其中，所述预设密码与所述显示密码不相同。Step S110 , triggering a preset password and a displayed password according to the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule, and the displayed password is displayed on the lock screen interface, wherein the preset password and the displayed password are different.
隐私保护设备根据所述解锁操作和预设解锁规则触发预设密码和显示密码，所述显示密码显示于锁屏界面上，其中，所述预设密码与所述显示密码不相同。所述预设解锁规则中包含了用户的解锁操作到隐私保护设备输入密码的映射，也包含着用户的解锁操作到隐私保护设备锁屏显示密码的映射，参见图5，如预设解锁规则中包含规则a(双击某一字符算一次输入，锁屏界面显示两个个对应字符)则当用户在输入密码时双击3，则输入了密码3，锁屏界面显示33，即在用户输入密码时于锁屏界面显示的密码即显示密码与用户实际输入的密码如预设密码并不相同，参见图6，所述预设解锁规则可由用户自行设定和更改，也可采用***预置的预设解锁规则，所述预设密码为解锁隐私保护设备的正确密码，由用户自行设定，特别的，所述预设密码可推广至其他密码，用户在隐私保护设备每次输入的密码未必均为正确的预设密码，在输入非预设密码的错误密码时，依然采用预设解锁规则进行处理并在锁屏界面展示显示密码。The privacy protection device triggers a preset password and a displayed password according to the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule, and the displayed password is displayed on the lock screen interface, wherein the preset password and the displayed password are different. The preset unlocking rule includes the mapping from the unlocking operation of the user to the password entered by the privacy protection device, and also includes the mapping from the unlocking operation of the user to the password displayed on the lock screen of the privacy protection device, see FIG. 5 , as in the preset unlocking rule. Contains rule a (double-clicking a character counts as one input, and the lock screen displays two corresponding characters), then when the user double-clicks 3 when entering the password, the password 3 is entered, and the lock screen interface displays 33, that is, when the user enters the password The password displayed on the lock screen interface means that the displayed password is not the same as the password actually input by the user, such as the preset password. Referring to Figure 6, the preset unlocking rules can be set and changed by the user, or the preset unlocking rules preset by the system can be used. Set unlocking rules, the preset password is the correct password for unlocking the privacy protection device, which is set by the user. In particular, the preset password can be extended to other passwords, and the passwords that the user enters each time on the privacy protection device may not be the same. For the correct preset password, when a wrong password other than the preset password is entered, the preset unlocking rules are still used for processing and the password is displayed on the lock screen interface.
此外，所述显示密码与所述预设密码的属性不同和/或数量级不同/或样式不同/或内容不同。In addition, the displayed password and the preset password have different properties and/or different orders of magnitude/or different styles/or different contents.
前述内容已说明显示密码与预设密码不相同，所述不同可为属性不同，所述属性包含如字母、图形、字母、汉字等，具体的，如预设密码可为数字而显示密码包含字母、汉字等其他属性；所述不同还可为数量级不同，所述数量级指预设密码和显示密码包含的密码位数，参见图7，如预设密码为abc123，即数量级为6，而显示密码为ABC112233数量级为9；所述不同还可为样式不同，如字母大小写的不对应带来的不同。The aforementioned content has explained that the displayed password is different from the preset password, and the difference can be different in attributes. The attributes include letters, graphics, letters, Chinese characters, etc. Specifically, if the preset password can be a number, the displayed password includes letters. , Chinese characters and other attributes; the difference can also be a different order of magnitude, and the order of magnitude refers to the number of digits of the password contained in the preset password and the display password, see Figure 7, if the preset password is abc123, that is, the order of magnitude is 6, and the display password is The order of magnitude is 9 for ABC112233; the difference may also be a difference in style, such as a difference caused by the mismatch of upper and lower case letters.
此外，所述显示密码为持续显示或间断显示或部分显示。In addition, the displayed password is continuous display or intermittent display or partial display.
当所述显示密码为持续显示时，在隐私保护设备上持续展示显示密码，而不进行隐藏、 模糊或替换等操作，当所述显示密码为间断显示时，在隐私保护设备上展示所述显示密码后在一定时间后进行隐藏、模糊或替换等操作，如隐私保护设备上展示显示密码abc的1s之后，进行替换处理为***，而所述部分显示则为对部分的显示密码进行特殊处理，参见图8，如将密码abc123，处理为*b*1**。When the displayed password is continuously displayed, the displayed password is continuously displayed on the privacy protection device without performing operations such as hiding, blurring or replacement, and when the displayed password is intermittently displayed, the displayed password is displayed on the privacy protection device After the password is hidden, blurred or replaced after a certain period of time, for example, after 1s of the password abc is displayed on the privacy protection device, the replacement is processed as ***, and the partial display is a special display of the partial password. For processing, see Figure 8. For example, the password abc123 is processed as *b*1**.
此外，所述解锁操作对应至少一显示密码。In addition, the unlocking operation corresponds to at least one displayed password.
可以理解的是，当预设解锁规则唯一且未发生变化时，用户为了解锁隐私保护设备，每次进行的解锁操作相同，虽然所述解锁操作相同，但所述显示密码未必相同，即统一解锁操作可对应多个显示密码。It can be understood that when the preset unlocking rules are unique and unchanged, the user performs the same unlocking operation every time in order to unlock the privacy protection device. Although the unlocking operations are the same, the displayed passwords may not be the same, that is, unified unlocking. The operation can correspond to multiple displayed passwords.
此外，所述显示密码由用户选择和/或***预设确定。In addition, the displayed password is determined by user selection and/or system preset.
具体的，用户可通过调整预设解锁规则对所述显示密码的显示方式进行调整，所述显示密码的显示方式也可采用***预设的方式确定。Specifically, the user can adjust the display mode of the displayed password by adjusting the preset unlocking rule, and the display mode of the displayed password can also be determined in a system preset mode.
此外，所述显示密码为随机显示。In addition, the displayed password is displayed randomly.
具体的，所述显示密码可为毫无规律的随机显示，如每当获取到解锁操作时，在预设字符库中随机选取随机数量个字符进行作为显示密码进行显示。Specifically, the displayed password may be displayed randomly and irregularly. For example, whenever an unlocking operation is obtained, a random number of characters are randomly selected from the preset character library to be displayed as the displayed password.
此外，所述预设解锁规则对应每一个密码字符的输入方式。In addition, the preset unlocking rule corresponds to the input mode of each password character.
所述预设规则中包含每一个密码字符的输入方式，如预设规则中定义长按某一字符为该密码字符的输入方式，则当用户解锁操作为长按该密码字符时，所述密码字符才被输入。The preset rule includes the input method of each password character. If the preset rule defines a long-pressing a certain character as the input method of the password character, when the user unlocks the operation by long-pressing the password character, the password characters are entered.
在本实施例中，通过获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作，并根据所述解锁操作和预设解锁规则触发预设密码和显示密码，并将所述预设密码与显示密码区别设置，使得他人无法通过用户的输入操作获取用户的密码，达到了保护用户隐私的目的。In this embodiment, by acquiring the unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface, triggering the preset password and the displayed password according to the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule, and setting the preset password and the displayed password differently, so that Others cannot obtain the user's password through the user's input operation, thereby achieving the purpose of protecting the user's privacy.
进一步的，在本申请第一实施例的基础上，进一步提出了本申请输入法的显示方法的第二实施例，本实施例为第一实施例中步骤S20的细化步骤，所述输入法的显示方法包括：Further, on the basis of the first embodiment of the present application, a second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed. This embodiment is a refinement step of step S20 in the first embodiment. display methods include:
判断是否存在与所述解锁操作对应的预设解锁规则。It is judged whether there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to the unlocking operation.
若存在与所述解锁操作对应的预设解锁规则，则生成与所述解锁操作对应的密码。If there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to the unlocking operation, a password corresponding to the unlocking operation is generated.
若所述密码为预设密码则完成预设密码的触发。If the password is the preset password, the triggering of the preset password is completed.
隐私保护设备判断是否存在与所述解锁操作对应的预设解锁规则，如解锁操作为长按，则判断预设解锁规则中是否包含长按的输入方式，若存在与所述解锁操作对应的预设解锁规则，则隐私保护设备生成与所述解锁操作对应的密码，所述密码为解锁操作通过预设解锁规则映射得到的密码，若所述密码为预设密码则完成预设密码的触发，当所述密码与可用于解锁隐私保护的预设密码相同时则完成预设密码的触发，后续隐私保护设备可以据此完成解锁操作。The privacy protection device determines whether there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to the unlocking operation. If the unlocking operation is a long press, it determines whether the preset unlocking rule includes a long-pressing input method. If there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to the unlocking operation. If the unlocking rule is set, the privacy protection device generates a password corresponding to the unlocking operation, and the password is the password obtained by mapping the unlocking operation through the preset unlocking rule. If the password is the preset password, the triggering of the preset password is completed, When the password is the same as the preset password that can be used to unlock the privacy protection, the triggering of the preset password is completed, and the subsequent privacy protection device can complete the unlocking operation accordingly.
此外，所述步骤:若存在与所述解锁操作对应的预设解锁规则，则生成与所述解锁操作对应的密码之后还可包括：In addition, the step: if there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to the unlocking operation, then generating the password corresponding to the unlocking operation may further include:
若所述密码不为预设密码则判定输入错误并记录输入错误次数。If the password is not the preset password, it is determined that the input is wrong and the number of wrong input is recorded.
当所述错误次数达到预设错误次数时，切换为简易模式并输出切换提示。When the number of errors reaches the preset number of errors, it switches to the simple mode and outputs a switching prompt.
若所述密码不为预设密码则隐私保护设备判定输入错误并记录错误次数，当所述错误次数达到预设错误次数时，隐私保护设备切换为简易模式并输出切换提示，在所述密码与预设密码不相同时，隐私保护设备判定为密码错误并记录错误次数。所述密码的获取方法与预设密码在前述实施例中已作说明，此处不再赘述，当用户输入的面与预设密码不相同时，认定为密码错误继续保持锁定状态，并记录错误的次数，当所述错误次数达到预设错误次数时，隐私保护设备切换为常规模式并输出切换提示，所述常规模式即现有的较为简单但安全性较低的模式，如单击输入密码，在锁屏界面展示常规的密码，解锁也相对较为容易，在模式切换时，输出模式切换的提示，以告知用户注意改变输入策略，避免用户对模式变化不知情而造成的输入错误，所述预设错误次数为用户自行设定的参数，如5次、8次等。If the password is not the preset password, the privacy protection device determines that the input is wrong and records the number of errors. When the number of errors reaches the preset number of errors, the privacy protection device switches to the simple mode and outputs a switching prompt. When the preset passwords are different, the privacy protection device determines that the password is incorrect and records the number of errors. The method for obtaining the password and the preset password have been described in the foregoing embodiments, and will not be repeated here. When the user input is different from the preset password, it is determined that the password is incorrect and the locked state is continued, and the error is recorded. When the number of errors reaches the preset number of errors, the privacy protection device switches to the normal mode and outputs a switching prompt. The normal mode is the existing simpler but less secure mode, such as clicking to enter a password , the conventional password is displayed on the lock screen interface, and it is relatively easy to unlock. When the mode is switched, the prompt of the mode switch is output to inform the user to pay attention to changing the input strategy and avoid input errors caused by the user's ignorance of the mode change. The preset error times are parameters set by the user, such as 5 times, 8 times, etc.
在本实施例中，通过记录密码输入的错误次数，并在错误次数达到预设错误次数时， 将当前的密码输入模式切换为常规模式，避免用户因忘记预设标准行为从而导致无法解锁设备的情况，在兼顾安全性的同时使得解锁操作更加人性化。In this embodiment, by recording the number of errors of password input, and when the number of errors reaches the preset number of errors, the current password input mode is switched to the normal mode, so as to prevent the user from being unable to unlock the device due to forgetting the preset standard behavior. situation, while taking into account security, the unlocking operation is more user-friendly.
进一步的，在本申请第一实施例的基础上，进一步提出了本申请输入法的显示方法的第三实施例，本实施例为第一实施例中步骤：获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作的前置步骤，所述输入法的显示方法包括：Further, on the basis of the first embodiment of the present application, a third embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed. This embodiment is the step in the first embodiment: obtaining an unlocking operation triggered by an input display interface. The pre-steps of the input method include:
检测当前环境是否为安全环境。Check whether the current environment is a secure environment.
若所述当前环境不是安全环境，则执行获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作的步骤。If the current environment is not a secure environment, the step of acquiring the unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface is performed.
隐私保护设备检测当前环境是否为安全环境，所述检测方法可以为通过预设定位装置检测隐私保护设备是否处于用户预先划定的安全范围内，可以为隐私保护设备当前连入的网络是否为用户预先设置的预设白名单中的网络，还可以为当前隐私保护设备是否已经连接用户预先指定的智能设备，如家庭中的蓝牙智能设备，通过以上方法均可以确定隐私保护设备是否处于安全环境当中，若所述当前环境为安全环境，则进入常规模式，所述常规模式即现有的较为简单但安全性较低的模式，如单击输入密码，在锁屏界面展示常规的密码，解锁也相对较为容易，在模式切换时，输出模式切换的提示，以告知用户注意改变输入策略，避免用户对模式变化不知情而造成的输入错误，若所述当前环境不是安全环境，则执行获取基于输入显示界面触发的操作行为的步骤，使用前述实施例的方法进行密码输入，提升安全性。The privacy protection device detects whether the current environment is a safe environment, and the detection method may be to detect whether the privacy protection device is within the security range pre-defined by the user through a preset positioning device, and it may be whether the network currently connected by the privacy protection device is the user. The network in the preset preset whitelist can also be used to determine whether the current privacy protection device has been connected to a smart device pre-specified by the user, such as a Bluetooth smart device in the home. Through the above methods, it can be determined whether the privacy protection device is in a safe environment , if the current environment is a secure environment, enter the normal mode, which is the existing simpler but less secure mode, such as clicking to enter a password, displaying the conventional password on the lock screen interface, and unlocking the It is relatively easy. When the mode is switched, the prompt of the mode switch is output to inform the user to pay attention to changing the input strategy, so as to avoid input errors caused by the user's ignorance of the mode change. In the step of displaying the operation behavior triggered by the interface, the method of the foregoing embodiment is used to input the password, so as to improve the security.
此外，所述步骤：检测当前环境是否为安全环境可包括以下步骤：In addition, the step of: detecting whether the current environment is a secure environment may include the following steps:
获取当前的定位信息，判断所述定位信息是否处于预设范围内。Acquire current positioning information, and determine whether the positioning information is within a preset range.
若所述定位信息处于预设范围内，则当前环境为安全环境。If the positioning information is within the preset range, the current environment is a safe environment.
隐私保护设备获取当前的定位信息，判断所述定位信息是否处于预设范围内。所述获取当前定位信息的方法包括GPS定位、基站定位、AGPS定位、WIFI定位，以上为现有定位信息获取方法，具体实现方式在此不再赘述，可根据实际使用场景和使用需求进行选择更加适用的方法，所述预设范围是指用户预先设置的范围，如，用户将自己的住处和公司的地址作为原点，半径约为50米的两个圆形范围作为预设范围，则当用户回到家中和进入公司时即为进入安全环境，只要不处于预设范围均不为安全环境，并根据是否为安全环境选择不同的密码输入策略。The privacy protection device obtains the current positioning information, and determines whether the positioning information is within a preset range. The methods for obtaining the current positioning information include GPS positioning, base station positioning, AGPS positioning, and WIFI positioning. The above are the existing positioning information obtaining methods, and the specific implementation methods are not repeated here, and can be selected according to actual use scenarios and use requirements. Applicable method, the preset range refers to the range preset by the user. For example, the user takes his residence and the address of the company as the origin, and two circular ranges with a radius of about 50 meters are used as the preset range. When you return home and enter the company, you will enter a safe environment. As long as it is not within the preset range, it will not be a safe environment, and different password input strategies will be selected according to whether it is a safe environment.
此外，所述步骤：检测当前环境是否为安全环境还可包括以下步骤：In addition, the step: detecting whether the current environment is a safe environment may further include the following steps:
获取当前连接的网络信息，判断所述网络信息是否在预设白名单内。Obtain currently connected network information, and determine whether the network information is in the preset whitelist.
若所述网络信息在预设白名单内，则当前环境为安全环境。If the network information is in the preset whitelist, the current environment is a secure environment.
隐私保护设备获取当前连接的网络信息，判断所述网络信息是否在预设白名单内。当前连接的网络信息可以为WIFI信息，蓝牙信息等短距离传输网络信息，所述预设白名单则为用户预先设置，包含有用户认为安全的网络信息，如用户将住所的WIFI信息、住所中音箱的蓝牙信息添加至预设白名单中，则当用户回到住所连接WIFI或蓝牙音箱的时候，则认为当前环境为安全环境，当用户离开住所时上述WIFI网络或蓝牙音箱断开连接，则认为当前环境不是安全环境，并根据是否为安全环境切换相应的密码输入策略。The privacy protection device acquires currently connected network information, and determines whether the network information is in the preset whitelist. The currently connected network information can be short-distance transmission network information such as WIFI information, Bluetooth information, etc. The preset whitelist is preset by the user, and includes network information that the user considers safe, such as the user's WIFI information of the residence, and the information in the residence. The Bluetooth information of the speaker is added to the preset whitelist. When the user returns to the residence to connect to the WIFI or Bluetooth speaker, the current environment is considered to be a safe environment. When the user leaves the residence, the above-mentioned WIFI network or Bluetooth speaker is disconnected. It is considered that the current environment is not a safe environment, and the corresponding password input policy is switched according to whether it is a safe environment.
在本实施例中，通过判断当前环境是否为安全环境自动采用不同的密码输入和验证策略，使得隐私保护设备的解锁更加灵活，在保证在不安全环境中隐私安全的同时也兼顾了在安全环境中的便捷性，使得隐私保护设备更加人性化。In this embodiment, by judging whether the current environment is a safe environment, different password input and verification strategies are automatically adopted, so that the unlocking of the privacy protection device is more flexible, while ensuring privacy and security in an unsafe environment, it also takes into account the security environment. The convenience in the privacy protection device makes the privacy protection device more user-friendly.
进一步的，在本申请第一实施例的基础上，进一步提出了本申请输入法的显示方法的第四实施例，本实施例为第一实施例中步骤：获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作的前置步骤，所述输入法的显示方法包括：Further, on the basis of the first embodiment of the present application, a fourth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed. This embodiment is the step in the first embodiment: obtaining the unlocking operation and the preset The pre-steps of the decryption and unlocking operation with the same unlocking rules, the display method of the input method includes:
获取当前的使用模式。Get the current usage mode.
步骤c2，根据所述使用模式确定对应的预设解锁规则。Step c2: Determine a corresponding preset unlocking rule according to the usage mode.
隐私保护设备获取当前的使用模式，根据所述使用模式确定对应的预设解锁规则，所 述使用模式包含如复杂模式、简易模式和自定义模式等，在不同的模式下包含对应的预设解锁规则，当发生模式切换时，所述预设解锁规则随着模式一同切换，如检测到用户处于人员密集的环境后切换至复杂模式，或是由用户自行开启复杂模式后，用户需要依据复杂模式下的预设解锁规则进行相对复杂的解锁操作流程方可完成解锁，而当用户回到家中自动开启或自行开启简易模式后，用户仅需按照简易模式下的预设解锁规则进行相对简单的解锁操作流程即可完成解锁。The privacy protection device obtains the current usage mode, and determines the corresponding preset unlocking rules according to the usage mode. The usage modes include, for example, complex mode, simple mode, and custom mode, and include corresponding preset unlocking rules in different modes. Rules, when a mode switch occurs, the preset unlocking rules switch together with the mode, such as switching to the complex mode after detecting that the user is in a crowded environment, or after the user turns on the complex mode by himself, the user needs to follow the complex mode. The preset unlocking rules below can complete the unlocking by performing a relatively complex unlocking operation process, and when the user returns home and automatically turns on the easy mode or turns on the easy mode by himself, the user only needs to follow the preset unlocking rules in the easy mode to perform a relatively simple unlocking. The operation process can complete the unlocking.
此外，所述步骤c2之后还可包括：In addition, after the step c2, it may further include:
步骤c21，当检测到所述使用模式发生变更时，提示所述预设解锁规则或当检测到密码输入错误时，提示所述预设解锁规则。Step c21, prompting the preset unlocking rule when it is detected that the usage mode is changed, or prompting the preset unlocking rule when a password input error is detected.
当隐私保护设备检测到所述使用模式发生变更时，提示用户所述预设解锁规则或当隐私保护设备检测到密码输入错误时，提示所述预设解锁规则。可以理解的是，当隐私保护设备的使用模式发生变更时，用户可能因为不清楚预设解锁规则已发生变更而产生多次错误输入的情况，为避免此问题，如图9所示，在发生模式变更后提示用户所述预设解锁规则发生变更，所述提示可为仅提示发生变更这一事件，也可提示特殊的提示信息，如用户设置的与变更后预设解锁规则关联的提示信息，以提示用户觉察策略的转变，特别的，所述提示时机还可以设置在检测到密码输入错误时。当输入密码至少两次输入错误时，切换至原使用模式。When the privacy protection device detects that the usage mode is changed, the user is prompted for the preset unlocking rule, or when the privacy protection device detects an incorrect password input, the preset unlocking rule is prompted. It is understandable that when the usage mode of the privacy protection device is changed, the user may make multiple incorrect inputs because it is unclear that the preset unlocking rules have been changed. To avoid this problem, as shown in Figure 9, when the After the mode is changed, the user is prompted that the preset unlocking rule is changed. The prompt may only prompt the event of the change, or it may prompt special prompting information, such as the prompting information associated with the preset unlocking rule after the change set by the user , so as to prompt the user to be aware of the change of the policy. In particular, the prompt timing can also be set when a password input error is detected. When the password is entered incorrectly at least twice, switch to the original use mode.
在本实施例中，通过在隐私保护设备的使用模式发生改变时改变预设解锁规则，并在发生模式切换或密码输入错误时提示用户，实现了预设解锁方式的灵活变动以适应用户当前所在场景，避免了因为预设解锁方式发生变化而导致的用户解锁困难，提升了用户使用舒适度。In this embodiment, by changing the preset unlocking rules when the usage mode of the privacy protection device changes, and prompting the user when a mode switching or password input error occurs, the preset unlocking mode can be flexibly changed to suit the current location of the user. It avoids the difficulty in unlocking the user caused by the change of the preset unlocking method, and improves the user's comfort.
本申请的申请一种输入法的显示方法的第五实施例中，所述输入法的显示方法包括：In the fifth embodiment of the present application for a display method of an input method, the display method of the input method includes:
获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作。Get the unlock operation triggered by the input display interface.
可选地，所述输入显示界面包括解锁界面、熄屏界面、应用界面、***界面、设置界面中的至少一种。Optionally, the input display interface includes at least one of an unlock interface, a screen-off interface, an application interface, a system interface, and a setting interface.
隐私保护设备获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作。所述隐私保护设备包含手机、PAD、智能手表等设不做在此不做具体限定，隐私保护设备监测到进入锁屏界面的方法可以为如用户按下预设的打开/关闭屏幕的按键，也可以是如抬手、双击等唤醒进入锁屏界面的方法，并获取用户在锁屏界面触发的解锁操作，所述解锁操作是用户的输入操作，如单击、双击、长按和滑动，还可以是带有压感设备上的不同压力的点击行为，所述解锁操作可参照是否与预设解锁规则相同分为解密解锁操作和干扰解锁操作，所述解锁操作都是基于锁屏界面的输入按键，如实体按键或是屏幕显示的虚拟按键，所述输入按键可为数字按键、字母按键、字符按键等或多种混合按键。The privacy protection device acquires an unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface. The privacy protection device includes a mobile phone, a PAD, a smart watch, etc. It is not specifically limited here. The privacy protection device detects that the method for entering the lock screen interface may be, for example, the user presses a preset button to open/close the screen, It can also be a method of waking up to enter the lock screen interface, such as raising a hand, double-clicking, etc., and obtaining the unlocking operation triggered by the user on the lock-screen interface. It can also be a click behavior with different pressures on the pressure-sensitive device. The unlocking operation can be divided into a decryption unlocking operation and an interference unlocking operation with reference to whether it is the same as the preset unlocking rule. The unlocking operations are all based on the lock screen interface. Input keys, such as physical keys or virtual keys displayed on the screen, the input keys may be numeric keys, letter keys, character keys, etc. or a variety of mixed keys.
获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作。Obtain the decryption unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation.
隐私保护设备获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作。所述预设解锁规则是用户预先在密码输入设置中设置的解锁操作，如区别于传统的单击按键输入密码的方法，所述预定义解锁操作可以是双击、长按和滑动，还可以是带有压感设备上的不同压力的点击行为，如用户设置的预设解锁规则是双击，则在密码输入中，对按键的双击操作才会被输入，区别于传统的单击，获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作即为获取解锁操作中进行了有效输入的部分，可以理解的是，解密解锁操作因为区别于传统的单击输入，因此在进行密码输入时，具有模糊输入操作的作用，他人无法通过用户的密码点击次数获取用户的密码信息，对于解锁操作中与预设解锁规则不同的部分，可以视为无效操作或作为干扰操作解锁操作，将在后续实施例中进行详细描述。The privacy protection device acquires the same decryption and unlocking operation as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation. The preset unlocking rule is the unlocking operation set by the user in the password input settings in advance. For example, different from the traditional method of clicking a button to input a password, the predefined unlocking operation can be double-click, long-press and slide, or Click behaviors with different pressures on the pressure-sensitive device. For example, the preset unlocking rule set by the user is double-click. In the password input, the double-click operation of the button will be input, which is different from the traditional single-click. The decryption and unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation is the part of obtaining the valid input in the unlocking operation. It has the function of fuzzy input operation. Others cannot obtain the user's password information through the number of clicks of the user's password. For the part of the unlocking operation that is different from the preset unlocking rules, it can be regarded as an invalid operation or as an interference operation. The unlocking operation will be implemented in the future. described in detail in the example.
获取所述解密解锁操作对应的密码，并显示在锁屏界面上。The password corresponding to the decryption and unlocking operation is obtained and displayed on the lock screen interface.
隐私保护设备获取所述解密解锁操作对应的密码，并显示在锁屏界面上。如步骤：获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作中所述，所述解锁操作都是基于锁屏界面的输入按 键，因此与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作对应着一次密码输入，隐私保护设备获取与预设解锁规则相同的解密操作对应输入的密码，并显示在锁屏界面上，所述显示可以为持续显示密码，以帮助用户判断输入进度和准确性，也可以是短暂显示密码后以某个标识符号代替，以帮助用户判断输入进度和准确性同时兼顾防他人窥屏，如输入7后1秒内在锁屏界面显示7，随后以*替代，还可以直接显示某个标识符号，以完全杜绝他人通过窥屏获知密码，用户可根据自身需求选用具体显示方法。The privacy protection device obtains the password corresponding to the decryption and unlocking operation, and displays it on the lock screen interface. As described in Step: Obtaining the unlocking operation triggered by the input display interface, the unlocking operations are all based on the input keys of the lock screen interface, so the decryption and unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule corresponds to a password input, and the privacy protection device Obtain the password input corresponding to the decryption operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule, and display it on the lock screen interface. The display can be a continuous display of the password to help the user judge the progress and accuracy of the input, or it can be displayed after a short period of time. It can be replaced by a certain identifier to help users judge the progress and accuracy of the input while taking into account the protection of others from peeping. Completely prevent others from knowing the password through the screen, and users can choose specific display methods according to their own needs.
判断所述密码与预设密码是否相同。Determine whether the password is the same as the preset password.
隐私保护设备判断所述密码与预设密码是否相同。所述预设密码为用户在锁屏设置中提前设置的密码，用于和用户输入的密码进行比对，两密码相同时即成功校验，通过步骤：获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作、步骤：获取所述解密解锁操作对应的密码，并显示在锁屏界面上获取解密解锁操作对应的密码，当所述密码达到一定数量如用户预设密码为7384，所述的一定数量为4，解密解锁操作输入密码达到4位时触发判断，或者是采用隐私保护设备接收到确认信号时触发判断，所述确认信号为用户自行确认的方法，如用户输入完成不做击确认按键即可，本次点击不做是否为预设解锁规则的判断，在该触发方法下用户需要多操作一个步骤，但安全性更高，所述触发方法用户可以在设置内容中自行选定。The privacy protection device determines whether the password is the same as the preset password. The preset password is the password set in advance by the user in the lock screen setting, which is used to compare with the password input by the user. When the two passwords are the same, the verification is successful. The steps are: obtaining the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking. Decryption and unlocking operations and steps with the same rules: Obtain the password corresponding to the decryption and unlocking operation, and display the password corresponding to the decryption and unlocking operation on the lock screen interface. When the password reaches a certain number, such as the user preset password is 7384, so The above-mentioned certain number is 4, and the judgment is triggered when the input password for the decryption and unlocking operation reaches 4 digits, or the judgment is triggered when the privacy protection device receives a confirmation signal. The confirmation signal is a method for the user to confirm by himself. Just click the confirm button. This time the click does not judge whether it is the preset unlocking rule. Under this trigger method, the user needs to operate one more step, but the security is higher. The user can choose the trigger method in the setting content. Certainly.
在所述密码与预设密码相同时，执行解锁操作。When the password is the same as the preset password, the unlocking operation is performed.
在所述密码与预设密码相同时，隐私保护设备执行解锁操作。When the password is the same as the preset password, the privacy protection device performs an unlocking operation.
具体的，如用户预先在锁屏的密码设置中选中双击为预设解锁规则，7384为预设密码，当用户在锁屏界面中在预设按键中双击7、双击3、双击8、双击4后，实际输入的密码为7384，而当用户在锁屏界面中在预设按键中双击7、单击5、双击3、双击8、双击4后，由于对于按键5的解锁操作不是预定义解锁操作，则忽略该次操作，实际输入的密码为7384，随后根据用户自行设置的判断触发方法将密码与预设密码比对，相同则完成解锁。Specifically, if the user selects double-click as the preset unlocking rule in the password setting of the lock screen in advance, and 7384 is the preset password, when the user double-clicks 7, double-click 3, double-click 8, and double-click 4 in the preset buttons in the lock screen interface , the actual input password is 7384, and when the user double-clicks 7, clicks 5, double-clicks 3, double-clicks 8, and double-clicks 4 in the preset buttons in the lock screen interface, because the unlock operation for button 5 is not a predefined unlock operation, the operation is ignored, the actual input password is 7384, and then the password is compared with the preset password according to the judgment trigger method set by the user, and the unlocking is completed if they are the same.
本实施例的方法不仅适用于锁屏的设置当中，还可以用于如应用锁、账号密码输入等多种情形中，均可达到模糊用户的密码输入操作，让他人无法通过用户操作获知密码的目的。The method of this embodiment is not only applicable to the setting of the screen lock, but also can be used in various situations such as application lock, account password input, etc., all of which can obscure the user's password input operation, so that others cannot know the password through the user operation. Purpose.
在本实施例中，通过检测用户的解锁操作是否为预设解锁规则，若是预设标准解锁操作则正常输入，实现了具有一定隐蔽性的密码输入方法，使得他人无法通过用户的输入操作获取用户的密码，达到了保护用户隐私的目的。In this embodiment, by detecting whether the user's unlocking operation is a preset unlocking rule, and if it is a preset standard unlocking operation, input it normally, a password input method with a certain concealment is realized, so that others cannot obtain the user through the user's input operation. password to protect user privacy.
进一步的，在本申请第五实施例的基础上，进一步提出了本申请输入法的显示方法的第六实施例，本实施例为第一实施例中步骤：获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作的后置步骤，所述输入法的显示方法包括：Further, on the basis of the fifth embodiment of the present application, a sixth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed, and this embodiment is the step in the first embodiment: obtaining an unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface The post-step of the input method, the display method of the input method includes:
判断干扰模式是否已经开启；Determine whether the interference mode has been turned on;
隐私保护设备判断干扰模式是否已经开启。所述干扰模式是隐私保护设备针对解锁操作中不同于预设解锁规则(即不同于解密解锁操作)的其他解锁操作作出干扰的模式，所述其他解锁操作在后续步骤中称为干扰解锁操作，区别于用户设置的预设解锁规则，如用户设置双击为预设解锁规则，则点击、长按等操作均为干扰解锁操作，如前述实施例描述，与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作会生成对应的密码，在干扰模式开启的情况下，隐私保护设备会针对与预设解锁规则不同的干扰解锁操作生成特殊的干扰信息。The privacy protection device determines whether the interference mode has been turned on. The interference mode is a mode in which the privacy protection device interferes with other unlocking operations in the unlocking operation that are different from the preset unlocking rules (that is, different from the decryption unlocking operation), and the other unlocking operations are called interference unlocking operations in subsequent steps, Different from the preset unlocking rule set by the user, if the user sets double-click as the preset unlocking rule, operations such as clicking and long-pressing are all interference unlocking operations. A corresponding password is generated. When the interference mode is turned on, the privacy protection device will generate special interference information for interference unlocking operations different from the preset unlocking rules.
在所述干扰模式没有开启时，执行所述获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作的步骤；When the interference mode is not enabled, the step of obtaining the decryption and unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation is performed;
在所述干扰模式没有开启时，隐私保护设备执行所述获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作的步骤，即第一实施例中的步骤：获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作，特别地，在干扰模式没有开启时，隐私保护设备可以不做干扰解锁操作，即对干扰解锁操作不做任何响应，如用户预设的密码为7734，则用户可以任意使用除双击外的操作点击任何按键，只要整个过程中包含双击7、双击7、双击3、双击 4，即可完成解锁，因此他人无法从用户的解锁操作中获取密码信息。When the interference mode is not turned on, the privacy protection device performs the step of obtaining the decryption and unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation, that is, the step in the first embodiment: obtaining the unlocking operation with Decryption and unlocking operations with the same preset unlocking rules. In particular, when the interference mode is not enabled, the privacy protection device may not perform the interference unlocking operation, that is, it does not respond to the interference unlocking operation. For example, the user’s preset password is 7734, then The user can use any operation except double-click to click any button. As long as the whole process includes double-click 7, double-click 7, double-click 3, and double-click 4, the unlocking can be completed, so others cannot obtain the password information from the user's unlocking operation.
在所述干扰模式开启时，获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则不同的干扰解锁操作和与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作；When the interference mode is turned on, obtain the interference unlocking operation that is different from the preset unlocking rule and the decryption unlocking operation that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation;
在所述干扰模式开启时，隐私保护设备获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则不同的干扰解锁操作和与预设解锁规则相同的解密不再赘述操作。所述解密解锁操作和干扰解锁操作等同于步骤第一实施例和本实施步骤：判断干扰模式是否已经开启、步骤：在所述干扰模式没有开启时，执行所述获取所述解锁操作中与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作的步骤的解释，此处不再赘述，通过本步骤，隐私保护设备完成将解锁操作区分成解密操作和干扰操作。When the interference mode is turned on, the privacy protection device obtains the interference unlocking operation that is different from the preset unlocking rule and the decryption that is the same as the preset unlocking rule in the unlocking operation, and will not repeat operations. The decryption unlocking operation and the interference unlocking operation are equivalent to the steps in the first embodiment and this implementation step: judging whether the interference mode has been turned on, step: when the interference mode is not turned on, execute the obtaining in the unlocking operation and the preset steps. It is assumed that the explanation of the steps of the decryption and unlocking operation with the same unlocking rule will not be repeated here. Through this step, the privacy protection device completes the separation of the unlocking operation into a decryption operation and an interference operation.
获取所述干扰解锁操作对应的干扰码与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作对应的密码，并显示在锁屏界面上。The interference code corresponding to the interference unlocking operation is obtained and the password corresponding to the decryption unlocking operation with the same preset unlocking rule is obtained, and displayed on the lock screen interface.
隐私保护设备获取所述干扰解锁操作对应的干扰码与预设解锁规则相同的解密解锁操作对应的密码，并显示在锁屏界面上。所述预设干扰码可为用户在设置中自行设置的值，如用户在设置中将#设置为预设干扰码，则当用户解锁操作不是预设解锁规则时，则生成“#”输出显示在锁屏界面上，所述预设干扰码也可以是设备自动生成的值，该值可以为特殊字符、数字、字母等，所述获取与预做解释规则相同的解密解锁操作对应的密码的方法在第一实施例中已作解释，在获取干扰码和密码值后，显示在锁屏界面上。The privacy protection device obtains the interference code corresponding to the interference unlocking operation and the password corresponding to the decryption unlocking operation with the same preset unlocking rule, and displays it on the lock screen interface. The preset interference code can be a value set by the user in the settings. For example, if the user sets # as the preset interference code in the settings, when the user's unlocking operation is not the preset unlocking rule, a "#" output display will be generated. On the lock screen interface, the preset interference code can also be a value automatically generated by the device, and the value can be a special character, number, letter, etc. The method has been explained in the first embodiment, after obtaining the interference code and password value, it is displayed on the lock screen interface.
具体的，使用本实施例的方法，当用户预先在锁屏的密码设置中选中双击为预设解锁规则，7384为预设密码，#为干扰码，当用户在锁屏界面依次双击7、单击5、双击3、双击8、双击4，则当前显示的密码和干扰码为7#384。Specifically, using the method of this embodiment, when the user selects the double-click as the preset unlocking rule in the password setting of the lock screen in advance, 7384 is the preset password, and # is the interference code, when the user double-clicks 7, single-click on the lock screen interface in turn Double-click 5, double-click 3, double-click 8, double-click 4, then the currently displayed password and interference code are 7#384.
在本实施例中，通过开启干扰模式为干扰解锁操作生成干扰码并与密码混合显示，使得他人无法通过用户的输入操作和锁屏界面显示的信息获取用户准确的密码，提升了用户隐私安全，同时，所述干扰模式用户可选择进行自己或关闭，增加了灵活性，适用的人群也更为广泛。In this embodiment, by turning on the interference mode, an interference code is generated for the interference unlocking operation and displayed together with the password, so that others cannot obtain the user's accurate password through the user's input operation and the information displayed on the lock screen interface, which improves the user's privacy and security. At the same time, the user of the interference mode can choose to do it himself or turn it off, which increases flexibility and is applicable to a wider range of people.
进一步的，在本申请第以上实施例的基础上，进一步提出了本申请输入法的显示方法的第七实施例，所述输入法的显示方法包括：Further, on the basis of the above embodiment of the present application, a seventh embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed, and the display method of the input method includes:
使用预设解锁规则过滤所述干扰码保留密码。Use preset unlocking rules to filter the jamming code to preserve the password.
判断所述密码与预设密码是否相同。Determine whether the password is the same as the preset password.
在所述密码与预设密码相同时，执行解锁操作。When the password is the same as the preset password, the unlocking operation is performed.
当隐私保护设备接收到确认信号时，按照使用预设解锁规则过滤所述干扰码保留密码。所述确认信号为用户自行确认的方法，如用户输入完成后点击确认按键即产生确认信号，表示用户已经完成输入，本次不做操作不做是否为预定义解锁操作的判断，所述预设解锁规则一般在用户自行设置预设干扰码时产生，即用户设置#为预设干扰码，则生成用于过滤预设解锁规则，当所述预设干扰码为生成的值时，如自动在特殊字符库中生成预设干扰码，则将特殊字符库的内容均加入预设解锁规则中以进行后续的过滤操作，保留下密码用于后续与预设密码比对的操作，当所述密码与预设密码相同时，执行解锁操作。When the privacy protection device receives the confirmation signal, it filters the interference code and retains the password according to the preset unlocking rule. The confirmation signal is a method of self-confirmation by the user. If the user clicks the confirmation button after the input is completed, a confirmation signal is generated, indicating that the user has completed the input. This time, no operation is performed and no judgment is made as to whether it is a predefined unlocking operation. The unlocking rule is generally generated when the user sets the preset interference code, that is, the user sets # as the preset interference code, and then generates the preset unlocking rule for filtering. When the preset interference code is the generated value, such as automatically If a preset interference code is generated in the special character library, the contents of the special character library are added to the preset unlocking rules for subsequent filtering operations, and the password is reserved for subsequent comparison operations with the preset password. When it is the same as the preset password, the unlock operation is performed.
具体的，使用本实施例的方法，当用户预先在锁屏的密码设置中选中双击为预定义解锁操作，7384为预设密码，#为干扰码，当用户在锁屏界面依次双击7、单击5、双击3、双击8、双击4，则当前显示的密码与干扰码为7#384，当用户点击确认按键触发确认信号后，隐私保护设备根据预设解锁规则(过滤#)对7#384进行过滤，实际用于与预设密码比对的密码为7384，与预设密码相同则完成解锁。Specifically, using the method of this embodiment, when the user pre-selects the double-click as a predefined unlocking operation in the password setting of the lock screen, 7384 is the preset password, and # is the interference code. Double-click 5, double-click 3, double-click 8, double-click 4, then the currently displayed password and interference code is 7#384. When the user clicks the confirmation button to trigger the confirmation signal, the privacy protection device will lock 7# according to the preset unlocking rule (filter #). 384 to filter, the password actually used for comparison with the preset password is 7384, and the unlock is completed if it is the same as the preset password.
在本实施例中，通过过滤输入的干扰码保留密码进行与预设面的比对，实现了锁屏界面展示干扰码但过滤所述干扰码以密码比对，是的比对结果准确性不会受到干扰码的影响，在干扰他人的同时兼顾了密码的准确性。In this embodiment, by filtering the input interference code to keep the password and comparing it with the preset surface, it is realized that the lock screen interface displays the interference code but filters the interference code and compares the password with the password. Yes, the accuracy of the comparison result is not accurate. It will be affected by the jamming code, which takes into account the accuracy of the password while interfering with others.
进一步的，在本申请第上述实施例的基础上，进一步提出了本申请输入法的显示方法的第八实施例，本实施例为第一实施例中步骤：获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作 的前置步骤，所述输入法的显示方法包括：Further, on the basis of the above-mentioned embodiment of the present application, an eighth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed. This embodiment is the step in the first embodiment: obtaining an unlocking operation triggered by an input display interface. The pre-steps of the input method include:
检测当前环境是否为安全环境。Check whether the current environment is a secure environment.
若所述当前环境为安全环境，则进入常规模式。If the current environment is a secure environment, enter the normal mode.
若所述当前环境不是安全环境，则执行获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作的步骤。If the current environment is not a secure environment, the step of acquiring the unlocking operation triggered based on the input display interface is performed.
隐私保护设备检测当前环境是否为安全环境，所述检测方法可以为通过预设定位装置检测隐私保护设备是否处于用户预先划定的安全范围内，可以为隐私保护设备当前连入的网络是否为用户预先设置的预设白名单中的网络，还可以为当前隐私保护设备是否已经连接用户预先指定的智能设备，如家庭中的蓝牙智能设备，通过以上方法均可以确定隐私保护设备是否处于安全环境当中，若所述当前环境为安全环境，则进入常规模式，所述常规模式即现有的较为简单但安全性较低的模式，如单击输入密码，在锁屏界面展示常规的密码，解锁也相对较为容易，在模式切换时，输出模式切换的提示，以告知用户注意改变输入策略，避免用户对模式变化不知情而造成的输入错误，若所述当前环境不是安全环境，则执行获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作的步骤，使用前述实施例的方法进行密码输入，提升安全性。The privacy protection device detects whether the current environment is a safe environment, and the detection method may be to detect whether the privacy protection device is within the security range pre-defined by the user through a preset positioning device, and it may be whether the network currently connected to the privacy protection device is the user. The network in the preset preset whitelist can also be used to determine whether the current privacy protection device has been connected to a smart device pre-specified by the user, such as a Bluetooth smart device in the home. Through the above methods, it can be determined whether the privacy protection device is in a safe environment , if the current environment is a secure environment, enter the normal mode, which is the existing simpler but less secure mode, such as clicking to enter a password, displaying the conventional password on the lock screen interface, and unlocking the It is relatively easy. When the mode is switched, the prompt of the mode switch is output to inform the user to pay attention to changing the input strategy, so as to avoid input errors caused by the user's ignorance of the mode change. In the steps of the unlocking operation triggered by the display interface, the method of the foregoing embodiment is used to input the password to improve security.
在本实施例中，通过判断当前环境是否为安全环境自动采用不同的密码输入和验证策略，使得隐私保护设备的解锁更加灵活，在保证在不安全环境中隐私安全的同时也兼顾了在安全环境中的便捷性，使得隐私保护设备更加人性化。In this embodiment, by judging whether the current environment is a safe environment, different password input and verification strategies are automatically adopted, so that the unlocking of the privacy protection device is more flexible, while ensuring privacy and security in an unsafe environment, it also takes into account the security environment. The convenience in the privacy protection device makes the privacy protection device more user-friendly.
进一步的，在本申请第上述实施例的基础上，进一步提出了本申请输入法的显示方法的第九实施例，本实施例为第一实施例中步骤：判断所述密码与预设密码是否相同的后置步骤，所述输入法的显示方法包括：Further, on the basis of the above-mentioned embodiment of the present application, a ninth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is further proposed. This embodiment is the step in the first embodiment: judging whether the password and the preset password are not. The same post-step, the display method of the input method includes:
在所述密码与预设密码不相同时，判定为密码错误并记录错误次数。When the password is different from the preset password, it is determined that the password is wrong and the number of errors is recorded.
当所述错误次数达到预设错误次数时，切换为常规模式并输出切换提示。When the number of errors reaches the preset number of errors, it switches to the normal mode and outputs a switching prompt.
在所述密码与预设密码不相同时，隐私保护设备判定为密码错误并记录错误次数。所述密码的获取方法与预设密码在前述实施例中已作说明，此处不再赘述，当用户输入的面与预设密码不相同是，认定为密码错误继续保持锁定状态，并记录错误的次数，当所述错误次数达到预设错误次数时，隐私保护设备切换为常规模式并输出切换提示，所述常规模式即现有的较为简单但安全性较低的模式，如单击输入密码，在锁屏界面展示常规的密码，解锁也相对较为容易，在模式切换时，输出模式切换的提示，以告知用户注意改变输入策略，避免用户对模式变化不知情而造成的输入错误，所述预设错误次数为用户自行设定的参数，如5次、8次等。When the password is different from the preset password, the privacy protection device determines that the password is incorrect and records the number of errors. The method of obtaining the password and the preset password have been described in the foregoing embodiments, and will not be repeated here. When the input input by the user is different from the preset password, it is determined that the password is incorrect and the locked state is continued, and the error is recorded. When the number of errors reaches the preset number of errors, the privacy protection device switches to the normal mode and outputs a switching prompt. The normal mode is the existing simpler but less secure mode, such as clicking to enter a password , the conventional password is displayed on the lock screen interface, and it is relatively easy to unlock. When the mode is switched, the prompt of the mode switch is output to inform the user to pay attention to changing the input strategy and avoid input errors caused by the user's ignorance of the mode change. The preset error times are parameters set by the user, such as 5 times, 8 times, etc.
在本实施例中，通过记录密码输入的错误次数，并在错误次数达到预设错误次数时，将当前的密码输入模式切换为常规模式，避免用户因忘记预设解锁规则从而导致无法解锁设备的情况，在兼顾安全性的同时使得解锁操作更加人性化。In this embodiment, by recording the number of errors of password input, and when the number of errors reaches the preset number of errors, the current password input mode is switched to the normal mode, so as to avoid the failure of the user to unlock the device due to forgetting the preset unlocking rules. situation, while taking into account security, the unlocking operation is more user-friendly.
参照图10，本申请的申请一种输入法的显示方法的第十实施例中，所述输入法的显示方法包括：Referring to FIG. 10 , in the tenth embodiment of an input method display method of the present application, the input method display method includes:
步骤S120，打开终端设备具有输入键盘的输入显示界面，基于所述输入显示界面检测到解锁操作时，获取当前使用模式并根据所述解锁操作触发显示密码。In step S120, an input display interface with an input keyboard of the terminal device is opened, and when an unlocking operation is detected based on the input display interface, a current usage mode is acquired and a password is triggered to be displayed according to the unlocking operation.
隐私保护设备基于具有输入键盘的输入显示界面检测到解锁操作时，获取当前使用模式并根据所述解锁操作触发显示密码。所述隐私保护设备可包含手机、PAD、智能手表等设备，在此不做具体限定，所述解锁操作指的是用户在隐私保护设备的锁屏界面发生的密码输入操作，所述解锁操作可参照是否存在与其对应过的预设解锁规则分为解密解锁操作和干扰解锁操作，所述解锁操作都是基于锁屏界面的输入按键，如实体按键或是屏幕显示的虚拟按键，所述输入按键可为数字按键、字母按键、字符按键等或多种混合按键，所述隐私保护设备带有多种使用模式，根据所述使用模式下是否设置了显示密码与预设密码的不同进行区分，即在一使用模式下显示密码与预设密码不同则该使用模式为预设模式，所 述预设密码为由用户设置的真实解锁密码，可以理解的是，所述预设模式下包含多种使用模式，各使用模式具体体现在用于输出的显示密码与预设密码的不同，而在一使用模式显示密码和预设密码相同则该使用模式不为预设模式。When the privacy protection device detects an unlocking operation based on the input display interface with the input keyboard, it acquires the current usage mode and triggers the display of the password according to the unlocking operation. The privacy protection device may include mobile phones, PADs, smart watches and other devices, which are not specifically limited here. The unlocking operation refers to a password input operation performed by the user on the lock screen interface of the privacy protection device. With reference to whether there is a preset unlocking rule corresponding to it, it is divided into decryption unlocking operation and interference unlocking operation. The unlocking operation is based on the input button of the lock screen interface, such as a physical button or a virtual button displayed on the screen. The input button It can be a number button, a letter button, a character button, etc. or a variety of mixed buttons. The privacy protection device has a variety of use modes, which are distinguished according to whether the display password and the preset password are set in the use mode. In a usage mode, the displayed password is different from the preset password, then the usage mode is the default mode, and the preset password is the real unlock password set by the user. It can be understood that the preset mode includes multiple usage modes. Each use mode is embodied in that the displayed password for output is different from the preset password, and in a use mode the displayed password and the preset password are the same, the use mode is not the default mode.
步骤S130，若所述当前使用模式为预设模式，则输出所述显示密码。Step S130, if the current use mode is a preset mode, output the display password.
若所述当前使用模式为预设模式，则隐私保护设备输出所述显示密码，可以理解的是，根据前述步骤描述，在预设模式下，用户的解锁操作实际点击输入的密码即显示密码与预先设置的预设密码存在不同，因此可将所述显示密码在锁屏界面输出显示，甚至在部分视障人士使用的设备上声音输出显示密码，由于显示密码与预设密码的不同，该输出并不会导致预设密码的泄露。If the current usage mode is the preset mode, the privacy protection device outputs the displayed password. It can be understood that, according to the description of the foregoing steps, in the preset mode, the user's unlocking operation actually clicks on the entered password to display the password and the password. The preset passwords set in advance are different, so the displayed password can be output and displayed on the lock screen interface, and even the displayed password can be output by voice on the devices used by some visually impaired people. Because the displayed password is different from the preset password, the output It will not lead to the leakage of the default password.
步骤S140，若所述当前使用模式不为预设模式，则不输出所述显示密码。Step S140, if the current use mode is not the preset mode, the display password is not output.
若所述当前使用模式使用模式不为预设模式，则隐私保护设备不输出所述显示密码，根据前述步骤描述，在当前模式不为预设模式时，用户的解锁操作实际点击输入的密码即显示密码与预先设置的预设密码相同，因此不将所述显示密码显示于锁屏界面上，以降低密码泄露风险，或是直接采用*****、·····或从1至n的递增数值提示用户已输入的密码位数，在保障密码安全的同时便于用户记忆当前已输入的密码位数。If the current use mode is not the preset mode, the privacy protection device does not output the displayed password. According to the description of the preceding steps, when the current mode is not the preset mode, the user's unlocking operation actually clicks on the entered password, which is The display password is the same as the preset preset password, so the display password is not displayed on the lock screen interface to reduce the risk of password leakage, or directly use *****, ···, or from 1 to The incremental value of n reminds the user of the number of digits of the password that the user has entered, which is convenient for the user to remember the number of digits of the password that has been entered currently while ensuring the security of the password.
此外，所述预设模式对应一预设解锁规则和显示密码，根据所述预设解锁规则输出所示显示密码。In addition, the preset mode corresponds to a preset unlocking rule and a display password, and the displayed display password is output according to the preset unlocking rule.
前述步骤已说明预设模式下包含多个使用模式，各使用模式具体体现在用于输出的显示密码与预设密码的不同，而该点不同由预设解锁规则决定，所述预设解锁规则中包含了用户的解锁操作到隐私保护设备输入密码的映射，也包含着用户的解锁操作到隐私保护设备锁屏显示密码的映射，如预设解锁规则中包含规则a(双击某一字符算一次输入，锁屏界面显示两个个对应字符)则当用户在输入密码时双击3，则输入了密码3，锁屏界面显示33，即在用户输入密码时于锁屏界面显示的密码即显示密码与用户实际输入的密码如预设密码并不相同，所述预设解锁规则可由用户自行设定和更改，也可采用***预置的预设解锁规则，所述预设密码为解锁隐私保护设备的正确密码，由用户自行设定，特别的，所述预设密码可推广至其他密码，用户在隐私保护设备每次输入的密码未必均为正确的预设密码，在输入非预设密码的错误密码时，依然采用预设解锁规则进行处理并在锁屏界面展示显示密码。The foregoing steps have explained that the preset mode includes multiple use modes, and each use mode is embodied in the difference between the displayed password used for output and the preset password, and this difference is determined by the preset unlocking rule. The preset unlocking rule It contains the mapping from the user's unlocking operation to the password entered by the privacy protection device, and also includes the mapping from the user's unlocking operation to the password displayed on the lock screen of the privacy protection device. For example, the preset unlocking rule contains rule a (double-click a character to count once Input, the lock screen interface displays two corresponding characters), then when the user double-clicks 3 when entering the password, the password 3 is entered, and the lock screen interface displays 33, that is, the password displayed on the lock screen interface when the user enters the password will display the password. Different from the password actually input by the user, such as the preset password, the preset unlocking rule can be set and changed by the user, or the preset unlocking rule preset by the system can be used, and the preset password is to unlock the privacy protection device. The correct password is set by the user. In particular, the preset password can be extended to other passwords. The password that the user enters each time on the privacy protection device may not be the correct preset password. When the password is incorrect, the preset unlocking rules are still used for processing and the password is displayed on the lock screen interface.
此外，在不输出所述显示密码时，将所述显示密码与预设密码进行比对，以验证显示密码的正确性。In addition, when the displayed password is not output, the displayed password is compared with the preset password to verify the correctness of the displayed password.
如前述步骤所述，在不输出所述显示密码时，隐私保护设备即处于非预设模式下，该模式下没有指定的预设解锁规则指导，解锁操作输入的密码即用于直接与预设密码进行比对，在比对通过后完成解锁。As described in the previous steps, when the displayed password is not output, the privacy protection device is in a non-preset mode, in which there is no specified preset unlocking rule guidance, and the password entered in the unlocking operation is used to directly communicate with the preset The password is compared, and the unlock is completed after the comparison is passed.
此外，在所述预设模式下，所述显示密码与所述预设密码不同。In addition, in the preset mode, the displayed password is different from the preset password.
若隐私保护设备的所述当前使用模式为预设模式，根据前述步骤描述，在预设模式下，用户的解锁操作实际点击输入的密码即显示密码与预先设置的预设密码在预设解锁规则的转化下存在不同。If the current usage mode of the privacy protection device is the preset mode, according to the description of the preceding steps, in the preset mode, the user's unlocking operation actually clicks on the entered password, that is, the password and the preset preset password are displayed in the preset unlocking rule. There are differences under the transformation.
此外，所述当前使用模式可为自动切换也可为由用户自行切换。In addition, the current usage mode can be switched automatically or switched by the user.
隐私保护设备的所述当前使用模式可为自动切换也可为由用户自行切换，如隐私保护设备检测到地理位置变化时，判断当前定位是否处于预设范围内，若处于所述预设范围内，使用模式可在安全系数较高解锁较为复杂的预设模式与安全系数相对较低解锁相对较为简单的预设模式之间切换，或在预设模式与非预设模式之间自动切换，所述预设范围为由用户自行指定的定位范围；又如隐私保护设备检测到连接的网络发生变化时，判断当前连接的网络是否为预设网络，若当前连接的网络为预设网络，使用模式可在安全系数较高解锁较为复杂的预设模式与安全系数相对较低解锁相对较为简单的预设模式之间切换，或在预设模式与非预设模式之间自动切换，所述预设网络也由用户预先指定，进一步的，前述 定位的预设范围、预设网络条件还可替换为麦克风采集周围人声信息，判断人员数量进而进行前述的使用模式切换，还可替换为如摄像头采集周围人像信息，判断人员数量进而进行前述的使用模式切换，以上为使用模式的自动切换方式，此外，用户还可自行选择使用模式进行切换。The current usage mode of the privacy protection device can be automatically switched or switched by the user. For example, when the privacy protection device detects a change in geographic location, it determines whether the current location is within a preset range, and if it is within the preset range , the use mode can be switched between the preset mode with a high safety factor that is more complicated to unlock and a preset mode with a relatively low safety factor that is relatively simple to unlock, or automatically switch between the preset mode and the non-preset mode, so The preset range is the positioning range specified by the user; for another example, when the privacy protection device detects that the connected network has changed, it determines whether the currently connected network is the preset network. If the currently connected network is the preset network, the usage mode It is possible to switch between a preset mode with a high safety factor that is more complicated to unlock and a preset mode with a relatively low safety factor that is relatively simple to unlock, or automatically switch between a preset mode and a non-preset mode. The network is also pre-specified by the user. Further, the preset range and preset network conditions of the aforementioned positioning can also be replaced with microphones to collect surrounding human voice information, and the number of people is judged to perform the aforementioned use mode switching, and can also be replaced with camera acquisition. Surrounding portrait information, determine the number of people and then switch the use mode mentioned above. The above is the automatic switching method of the use mode. In addition, the user can also choose the use mode to switch.
此外，所述显示密码与所述预设密码的属性不同和/或数量级不同/或样式不同/或内容不同。In addition, the displayed password and the preset password have different properties and/or different orders of magnitude/or different styles/or different contents.
前述内容已说明显示密码与预设密码不相同，所述不同可为属性不同，所述属性包含如字母、图形、字母、汉字等，具体的，如预设密码可为数字而显示密码包含字母、汉字等其他属性；所述不同还可为数量级不同，所述数量级指预设密码和显示密码包含的密码位数，如预设密码为abc123，即数量级为6，而显示密码为ABC112233数量级为9；所述不同还可为样式不同，如字母大小写的不对应带来的不同。The aforementioned content has explained that the displayed password is different from the preset password, and the difference can be different in attributes. The attributes include letters, graphics, letters, Chinese characters, etc. Specifically, if the preset password can be a number, the displayed password includes letters. , Chinese characters and other attributes; the difference can also be a different order of magnitude, and the order of magnitude refers to the number of digits of the password contained in the preset password and the displayed password. 9. The difference may also be a difference in style, such as a difference caused by the mismatch of upper and lower case letters.
此外，所述显示密码为持续显示或间断显示或部分显示。In addition, the displayed password is continuous display or intermittent display or partial display.
当所述显示密码为持续显示时，在隐私保护设备上持续展示显示密码，而不进行隐藏、模糊或替换等操作，当所述显示密码为间断显示时，在隐私保护设备上展示所述显示密码后在一定时间后进行隐藏、模糊或替换等操作，如隐私保护设备上展示显示密码abc的1s之后，进行替换处理为***，而所述部分显示则为对部分的显示密码进行特殊处理，如将密码abc123，处理为*b*1**。When the displayed password is continuously displayed, the displayed password is continuously displayed on the privacy protection device without performing operations such as hiding, blurring or replacement, and when the displayed password is intermittently displayed, the displayed password is displayed on the privacy protection device After the password is hidden, blurred or replaced after a certain period of time, for example, after 1s of the password abc is displayed on the privacy protection device, the replacement is processed as ***, and the partial display is a special display of the partial password. Processing, for example, the password abc123 is processed as *b*1**.
此外，所述解锁操作对应至少一显示密码。In addition, the unlocking operation corresponds to at least one displayed password.
可以理解的是，当预设解锁规则唯一且未发生变化时，用户为了解锁隐私保护设备，每次进行的解锁操作相同，虽然所述解锁操作相同，但所述显示密码未必相同，即统一解锁操作可对应多个显示密码。It can be understood that when the preset unlocking rules are unique and unchanged, the user performs the same unlocking operation every time in order to unlock the privacy protection device. Although the unlocking operations are the same, the displayed passwords may not be the same, that is, unified unlocking. The operation can correspond to multiple displayed passwords.
此外，所述显示密码由用户选择和/或***预设确定。In addition, the displayed password is determined by user selection and/or system preset.
具体的，用户可通过调整预设解锁规则对所述显示密码的显示方式进行调整，所述显示密码的显示方式也可采用***预设的方式确定。Specifically, the user can adjust the display mode of the displayed password by adjusting the preset unlocking rule, and the display mode of the displayed password can also be determined in a system preset mode.
此外，所述显示密码为随机显示。In addition, the displayed password is displayed randomly.
具体的，所述显示密码可为毫无规律的随机显示，如每当获取到解锁操作时，在预设字符库中随机选取随机数量个字符进行作为显示密码进行显示。Specifically, the displayed password may be displayed randomly and irregularly. For example, whenever an unlocking operation is obtained, a random number of characters are randomly selected from the preset character library to be displayed as the displayed password.
此外，所述预设解锁规则对应每一个密码字符的输入方式。In addition, the preset unlocking rule corresponds to the input mode of each password character.
所述预设规则中包含每一个密码字符的输入方式，如预设规则中定义长按某一字符为该密码字符的输入方式，则当用户解锁操作为长按该密码字符时，所述密码字符才被输入。The preset rule includes the input method of each password character. If the preset rule defines a long-pressing a certain character as the input method of the password character, when the user unlocks the operation by long-pressing the password character, the password characters are entered.
在本实施例中，通过根据用户的解锁操作和当前使用模式对隐私保护设备进行输出显示密码的解锁或不输出显示密码的解锁，并且在输出显示密码时，将所述显示密码区别于真正用于解锁的预设密码，使得他人无法轻易获知用户输入的密码，实现了保护用户隐私的目的。In this embodiment, according to the user's unlocking operation and the current usage mode, the privacy protection device is unlocked by outputting the displayed password or unlocking without outputting the displayed password, and when the displayed password is output, the displayed password is distinguished from the real password. The preset password for unlocking makes it impossible for others to easily know the password entered by the user, thus achieving the purpose of protecting user privacy.
此外，本申请提供还一种输入法的显示方法，请参考图11，图11为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十一实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：In addition, the present application provides an input method display method, please refer to FIG. 11 , which is a schematic flowchart of an eleventh embodiment of the input method display method of the present application. In this embodiment, the input method display method Include the following steps:
步骤S10，打开终端设备具有输入键盘的输入显示界面，在接收到输入显示界面的界面调整信号，所述输入显示界面包括显示区域和/或输入功能区域；Step S10, opening an input display interface with an input keyboard in the terminal device, and receiving an interface adjustment signal of the input display interface, where the input display interface includes a display area and/or an input function area;
步骤S20，根据所述界面调整信号调整所述显示区域和/或输入功能区域，其中，输入功能区域随着界面调整信号不同显示至少一种布局方式。Step S20, adjusting the display area and/or the input function area according to the interface adjustment signal, wherein the input function area displays at least one layout mode according to the interface adjustment signal.
输入显示界面为带有输入键盘的界面，其中，输入显示界面包括显示区域和/或输入功能区域，需要说明的是，输入显示界面中输入键盘所占区域为输入功能区域，输入显示界面中除了输入键盘所占区域外的其他区域为显示区域。The input display interface is an interface with an input keyboard, wherein the input display interface includes a display area and/or an input function area. It should be noted that the area occupied by the input keyboard in the input display interface is the input function area. The area other than the area occupied by the input keyboard is the display area.
输入显示界面的界面调整信号可通过检测到当前终端设备的显示状态发生改变触发，也可通过***第三方的快捷功能信息触发，对此不做限定。其中，当前终端设备的显示状态发生改变的情况包括但不限于横屏显示与竖屏显示之间的切换以及折叠屏的折叠转态 与展开状态之间的切换。The interface adjustment signal input to the display interface can be triggered by detecting that the display state of the current terminal device changes, or can be triggered by inserting shortcut function information of a third party, which is not limited. Wherein, the situation where the current display state of the terminal device changes includes, but is not limited to, the switching between the horizontal screen display and the vertical screen display, and the switching between the folding state and the unfolding state of the folding screen.
在实际应用过程中，本实施例的输入功能区域包括但不限于以下两种显示方式，第一种显示方式为输入功能区域显示输入键盘，第二种显示方式为输入功能区域包括输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域，其中，输入子显示区域显示输入键盘，功能子显示区域显示快捷功能信息。可选地，功能子显示区域是在检测到当前终端设备的显示状态发生改变，且终端设备的横向显示的显示区域增大时所对应增加的显示区域。需要说明的是，输入功能区域默认的显示方式为第一种显示方式，快捷功能信息包括快捷工具栏、组合快捷按键、当前显示界面中二级菜单对应的快捷功能以及输入键盘中二级菜单对应的快捷功能中的至少一种。In the actual application process, the input function area in this embodiment includes but is not limited to the following two display modes. The first display mode is that the input function area displays an input keyboard, and the second display mode is that the input function area includes an input sub-display area. and/or a function sub-display area, wherein the input sub-display area displays an input keyboard, and the function sub-display area displays shortcut function information. Optionally, the functional sub-display area is a correspondingly increased display area when it is detected that the display state of the current terminal device changes and the display area displayed in the horizontal direction of the terminal device increases. It should be noted that the default display mode of the input function area is the first display mode, and the shortcut function information includes the shortcut toolbar, the combination shortcut keys, the shortcut functions corresponding to the secondary menu in the current display interface, and the corresponding secondary menu in the input keyboard. at least one of the shortcut functions.
需要说明的是，对应于不同的界面调整信号，根据界面调整信号调整显示区域和/或输入功能区域的方式并不相同。其中，输入功能区域随着界面调整信号不同显示至少一种布局显示方式，也即，一调整信号可对应输入功能区域的一布局显示方式，不同调整信号与输入功能区域分别对应的布局显示方式中至少显示两种布局显示方式是不相同的。在界面调整信号为检测到当前终端设备的显示状态发生改变，具体地，当前终端设备的显示状态由竖屏状态切换至横屏显示状态，或者当前终端设备显示屏的显示状态由折叠状态切换至展开状态，也即终端设备的横向显示的显示区域增大时，可调整输入功能区域的显示状态由第一显示方式切换至第二显示方式；当前终端设备的显示状态由横屏状态切换至竖屏显示状态，或者当前终端设备显示屏的显示状态由展开状态切换至折叠状态，也即终端设备的横向显示的显示区域减小时，可调整输入功能区域的显示状态由第二显示方式切换至第一显示方式；It should be noted that, corresponding to different interface adjustment signals, the manners of adjusting the display area and/or the input function area according to the interface adjustment signals are not the same. Wherein, the input function area displays at least one layout display mode according to the interface adjustment signal, that is, an adjustment signal can correspond to a layout display mode of the input function area, and the layout display modes corresponding to the different adjustment signals and the input function area respectively At least two layouts are displayed differently. The interface adjustment signal is to detect that the display state of the current terminal device has changed. Specifically, the display state of the current terminal device is switched from the vertical screen state to the horizontal screen display state, or the display state of the current terminal device display screen is switched from the folded state to the folded state. Expanded state, that is, when the horizontal display area of the terminal device increases, the display state of the adjustable input function area is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode; the current display state of the terminal device is switched from the horizontal screen state to the vertical screen state. The display state of the screen, or the display state of the current terminal device display screen is switched from the unfolded state to the folded state, that is, when the display area of the horizontal display of the terminal device is reduced, the display state of the adjustable input function area is switched from the second display mode to the first display mode. a display mode;
在界面调整信号为检测到***第三方的快捷功能信息时，可选地，快捷功能信息为快捷工具栏，需要说明的是，由于当前的输入显示界面无法对该快捷工具栏进行识别，导致快捷工具栏悬浮于输入显示界面对输入显示界面进行遮挡，影响用户操作或者浏览查看输入显示界面中的信息，请参考图12，图12为本实施例中快捷工具栏悬浮于输入显示界面对输入显示界面进行遮挡的示意图。为避免快捷工具栏悬浮于输入显示界面对输入显示界面进行遮挡，可实施的具体步骤如下：When the interface adjustment signal is detection of the shortcut function information inserted by a third party, optionally, the shortcut function information is a shortcut toolbar. It should be noted that, because the current input display interface cannot identify the shortcut toolbar, the shortcut The toolbar is suspended on the input display interface to block the input display interface, which affects the user's operation or browse and view the information in the input display interface. Please refer to FIG. 12. In this embodiment, the shortcut toolbar is suspended on the input display interface to display the input display. Schematic diagram of interface occlusion. In order to avoid the shortcut toolbar floating on the input display interface to block the input display interface, the specific steps that can be implemented are as follows:
获取当前的输入功能区域的界面显示信息；其中，界面显示信息包括输入功能区域的显示位置以及第一显示尺寸；Obtain the interface display information of the current input function area; wherein, the interface display information includes the display position of the input function area and the first display size;
获取快捷工具栏的第二显示尺寸；Get the second display size of the shortcut toolbar;
根据显示位置、第一显示尺寸以及第二显示尺寸确定输入功能区域以及快捷工具栏作为目标功能区域的目标显示位置以及目标显示尺寸；Determine the target display position and target display size of the input function area and the shortcut toolbar as the target function area according to the display position, the first display size and the second display size;
根据目标显示位置以及目标显示尺寸对输入显示界面中的显示区域以及目标功能区域进行调整。可选地，具体的调整方式包括：显示区域面积减少，增大输入功能区域面积作为目标输入功能区域；显示区域面积不变，减小输入功能区域面积作为目标输入功能区域。Adjust the display area and the target function area in the input display interface according to the target display position and the target display size. Optionally, the specific adjustment method includes: reducing the area of the display area and increasing the area of the input function area as the target input function area; maintaining the area of the display area and reducing the area of the input function area as the target input function area.
其中，界面显示信息包括输入功能区域的显示位置和/或显示尺寸。其中，显示位置是输入功能区域在终端设备的显示屏上进行显示的坐标点，可以是输入功能区域的中心坐标点，也可以是输入子显示区域的任意一对角线确定的两坐标点；还可以是输入子显示区域的四个坐标点，对此不做限制。显示尺寸指的是输入功能区域的显示长度以及显示宽度。Wherein, the interface display information includes the display position and/or display size of the input function area. Wherein, the display position is the coordinate point where the input function area is displayed on the display screen of the terminal device, which may be the center coordinate point of the input function area, or may be two coordinate points determined by any diagonal line of the input sub-display area; It can also be four coordinate points of the input sub-display area, which is not limited. Display size refers to the display length and display width of the input functional area.
此外，为便于理解在界面调整信号为检测到***第三方的快捷功能信息时调整显示区域和/或输入功能区域，举例来说，在WhatsApp聊天界面，新增快捷工具栏后，该快捷工具栏紧贴输入键盘区域，输入显示界面所在区域根据输入键盘与快捷工具栏的整***置进行自适应调整，以避免快捷工具栏遮挡输入显示界面所显示的信息内容。请参考图13，图13为本实施例中在检测到***第三方的快捷功能信息根据输入键盘与快捷工具栏的整***置进行自适应调整后的示意图。In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, when the interface adjustment signal is to detect the short-cut function information inserted by a third party, adjust the display area and/or the input function area. For example, in the WhatsApp chat interface, after adding a shortcut toolbar, the shortcut toolbar Close to the input keyboard area, the area where the input display interface is located is adaptively adjusted according to the overall position of the input keyboard and the shortcut toolbar, so as to prevent the shortcut toolbar from blocking the information content displayed on the input display interface. Please refer to FIG. 13 . FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of adaptive adjustment according to the overall position of the input keyboard and the shortcut toolbar after detecting that the shortcut function information inserted by the third party is detected in this embodiment.
在界面调整信号为检测到终端设备的横向显示的显示区域增大的基础上，检测到*** 第三方的快捷功能信息如快捷功能栏时，可获取终端设备的增加的显示区域如功能子显示区域的显示尺寸，在快捷功能栏的显示尺寸小于增加的显示区域的显示尺寸时，可将快捷功能栏显示至增加的显示区域；On the basis that the interface adjustment signal is to detect the increase of the display area of the horizontal display of the terminal device, when it is detected that the shortcut function information inserted by a third party such as the shortcut function bar is detected, the increased display area of the terminal device, such as the function sub-display area, can be obtained. When the display size of the shortcut function bar is smaller than the display size of the increased display area, the shortcut function bar can be displayed to the increased display area;
在快捷功能栏的显示尺寸大于增加的显示区域的显示尺寸时，可按照检测到***第三方的快捷功能信息的方式对显示区域和/或输入功能区域进行调整，在此不再赘述；When the display size of the shortcut function bar is larger than the display size of the increased display area, the display area and/or the input function area can be adjusted according to the method of detecting the insertion of the third-party shortcut function information, which will not be repeated here;
在界面调整信号为检测到终端设备的横向显示的显示区域减小的基础上，检测到***第三方的快捷功能信息如快捷功能栏时，可按照检测到***第三方的快捷功能信息的方式对显示区域和/或输入功能区域进行调整，在此不再赘述。On the basis that the interface adjustment signal is to detect that the display area of the horizontal display of the terminal device is reduced, when it is detected that the shortcut function information inserted by the third party, such as the shortcut function bar, can be detected according to the method of detecting the shortcut function information inserted by the third party. The display area and/or the input function area are adjusted, which will not be repeated here.
综上，界面调整信号对应的调整操作包括以下至少一种：To sum up, the adjustment operation corresponding to the interface adjustment signal includes at least one of the following:
所述显示区域面积减少，所述输入功能区域面积增大；The area of the display area is reduced, and the area of the input function area is increased;
所述显示区域面积不变，所述输入功能区域面积减少；The area of the display area remains unchanged, and the area of the input function area decreases;
所述显示区域和/或所述输入功能区域的横向显示面积增大；The horizontal display area of the display area and/or the input function area is increased;
所述显示区域和/或所述输入功能区域的横向显示面积减小。The lateral display area of the display area and/or the input function area is reduced.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，通过界面调整信号对显示区域和/或输入功能区域进行输入显示界面整体调整的同时，还可实现对输入显示界面界面中的局部区域进行调整，以使得输入功能区域随界面调整信号的不同以不同的布局显示方式显示，增加了显示方式的多样性，提高了对输入功能区域的显示区域的利用率。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, while the overall adjustment of the input display interface is performed on the display area and/or the input function area through the interface adjustment signal, the partial area in the input display interface interface can also be adjusted, so that the input The functional area is displayed in different layout display modes according to the different interface adjustment signals, which increases the variety of display modes and improves the utilization rate of the display area of the input functional area.
基于上述第一实施例提出本申请的输入法的显示方法的第十二实施例，请参考图14，图14为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十二实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，步骤S20包括：Based on the above-mentioned first embodiment, a twelfth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is proposed. Please refer to FIG. 14 . FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of the twelfth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application. In an example, step S20 includes:
步骤S21，在检测到所述输入功能区域发生变化时，获取快捷功能信息；Step S21, when it is detected that the input function area has changed, obtain shortcut function information;
快捷功能信息包括快捷工具栏、组合快捷按键、当前显示界面中二级菜单对应的快捷功能以及输入键盘中二级菜单对应的快捷功能中的至少一种。其中，快捷功能信息的表示方式包括但不限于功能图标以及功能名称中至少一种。当前显示界面中二级菜单对应的快捷功能包括但不限于摄像功能、定位功能、发红包功能、语音/视频功能以及表情包选择功能。输入键盘中二级菜单对应的快捷功能包括但不限于数字键盘功能以及标点符号功能功能。The shortcut function information includes at least one of a shortcut toolbar, a combined shortcut key, a shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the currently displayed interface, and a shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the input keyboard. The representation of the shortcut function information includes, but is not limited to, at least one of a function icon and a function name. The shortcut functions corresponding to the secondary menu in the current display interface include, but are not limited to, the camera function, the positioning function, the red envelope function, the voice/video function, and the emoticon package selection function. The shortcut functions corresponding to the secondary menu in the input keyboard include but are not limited to the numeric keyboard function and the punctuation function function.
检测到输入功能区域发生变化可通过检测输入功能区的显示尺寸是否发生改变，若检测到输入功能区域的显示尺寸中长度及宽度中任意一项发生改变，即可判定输入功能区域发生变化；还可通过检测终端设备的显示屏的显示状态，在检测到显示状态改变时，可判定输入功能区域发生变化，对比不做限定。举例来说，输入功能区域发生变化可以是检测到终端设备由竖屏显示转换至横屏显示；也可以是检测到终端设备的显示屏由折叠状态切换至展开状态，对此不做限定。If it is detected that the input function area has changed, it can be detected by detecting whether the display size of the input function area has changed. If it is detected that any one of the length and width of the display size of the input function area has changed, it can be determined that the input function area has changed; By detecting the display state of the display screen of the terminal device, when a change in the display state is detected, it can be determined that the input function area has changed, and the comparison is not limited. For example, the change of the input function area may be detected that the terminal device is switched from vertical screen display to horizontal screen display; it may also be detected that the display screen of the terminal device is switched from a folded state to an unfolded state, which is not limited.
获取快捷功能信息可直接获取预设置的快捷功能信息；也可获取使用频率大于预设频率即使用频率高的快捷功能信息。其中，获取的快捷功能信息的数量可以是一个，也可以是多个。可选地，快捷功能信息的数量可通过输入功能区域的显示尺寸进行限定。Acquiring the shortcut function information may directly obtain the preset shortcut function information; or obtain the shortcut function information whose usage frequency is higher than the preset frequency, that is, the usage frequency is high. The quantity of the acquired shortcut function information may be one or multiple. Optionally, the quantity of shortcut function information may be limited by the display size of the input function area.
可选地，步骤S21中获取快捷功能信息之前包括：Optionally, before obtaining the shortcut function information in step S21, it includes:
判断发生变化的输入功能区域的目标显示区域的面积；Determine the area of the target display area of the changed input function area;
在所述目标显示区域的面积大于输入功能区域的初始显示区域的面积时，即执行步骤S21中的获取快捷功能信息的步骤。其中，初始显示区域面积指的是输入功能区域未变化前的显示区域面积。容易理解的是，在目标显示区域面积大于初始显示区域面积，也即显示区域面积增大，可在保持显示输入功能区域原有的显示内容如输入键盘的同时，增加其他的显示内容如快捷功能信息。When the area of the target display area is larger than the area of the initial display area of the input function area, the step of acquiring shortcut function information in step S21 is executed. Wherein, the initial display area area refers to the display area area before the input function area is not changed. It is easy to understand that when the area of the target display area is larger than the area of the initial display area, that is, the area of the display area increases, other display contents such as shortcut functions can be added while maintaining the original display contents of the display input function area, such as the input keyboard. information.
步骤S22，在所述输入功能区域显示所述快捷功能信息和/或输入键盘。Step S22, displaying the shortcut function information and/or the input keyboard in the input function area.
输入功能区域包括但不限于以下两种显示方式，第一种显示方式为输入功能区域显示输入键盘，第二种显示方式为输入功能区域包括输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域， 其中，输入子显示区域显示输入键盘，功能子显示区域显示快捷功能信息。The input function area includes but is not limited to the following two display modes, the first display mode is that the input function area displays an input keyboard, and the second display mode is that the input function area includes an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area, wherein, The input sub-display area displays the input keyboard, and the function sub-display area displays shortcut function information.
在实际应用过程中，输入功能区域默认的显示方式为第一种显示方式。在输入功能区域为第一种显示方式，且检测到输入功能区域发生变化时，可触发将输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域，也即由第一显示方式切换至第二显示方式。可选地，请参考图15，图15为本申请的输入法的显示方法在本实施例中输入功能区域分区显示的流程示意图，步骤S22包括：In the actual application process, the default display mode of the input function area is the first display mode. When the input function area is the first display mode, and it is detected that the input function area has changed, it can trigger the division of the input function area into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area, that is, switching from the first display mode to The second display mode. Optionally, please refer to FIG. 15 . FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of the display method of the input method of the present application in which the input function area is displayed by partition in this embodiment. Step S22 includes:
步骤S221，将所述输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域；Step S221, dividing the input function area into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area;
步骤S222，在所述输入子显示区域显示所述输入键盘；和/或，Step S222, displaying the input keyboard in the input sub-display area; and/or,
步骤S223，在所述功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息。具体地，请参考图16，图16为本实施例中输入子显示区域(右下)显示输入键盘以及功能子显示区域(左下)显示快捷功能信息的示意图。Step S223, displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area. Specifically, please refer to FIG. 16 , which is a schematic diagram of displaying the input keyboard in the input sub-display area (lower right) and displaying shortcut function information in the function sub-display area (lower left) in this embodiment.
作为一可选的实施方式，步骤S221包括：As an optional implementation manner, step S221 includes:
获取当前的操作模式；Get the current operating mode;
根据所述操作模式对应的界面布局将所述输入功能区域划分为所述输入子显示区域以及所述功能子显示区域。The input function area is divided into the input sub-display area and the function sub-display area according to the interface layout corresponding to the operation mode.
操作模式包括单手模式、左手模式、右手模式以及双手操作模式中的至少一种。获取当前的操作模式可通过用户在使用终端设备时，通过手纹采集装置采集用户的手纹信息，通过将采集的手纹信息与预存的手纹信息进行比对，其中，预存的手纹信息包括预先采集到的左手的手纹信息以及右手的手纹信息，进而根据比对结果确认用户当前采用的是左手操作、右手操作还是左右手同时操作。The operation modes include at least one of a one-handed mode, a left-handed mode, a right-handed mode, and a two-handed operation mode. The current operation mode can be obtained by collecting the user's handprint information through the handprint collection device when the user uses the terminal device, and by comparing the collected handprint information with the pre-stored handprint information, wherein the pre-stored handprint information It includes the handprint information of the left hand and the handprint information of the right hand collected in advance, and then confirms whether the user is currently using left-hand operation, right-hand operation, or simultaneous operation with both hands according to the comparison result.
根据操作模式对应的界面布局将输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域。对应于操作模式包括单手模式、左手模式、右手模式以及双手操作模式中的至少一种，可预先设置操作模式与界面布局之间的对应关系，其中，在操作模式为左手操作时，可将输入子显示区域设置于输入功能区域的左侧，将功能子显示区域设置于输入功能区域的右侧；在操作模式为右手操作时，可将输入子显示区域设置于输入功能区域的右侧，将功能子显示区域设置于输入功能区域的左侧；在操作模式为双手模式时，可以是上述左手操作或者右手操作对应的输入子显示区域与功能子显示区域的显示方式，也可获取左手操作频率以及右手操作频率，获取左手操作频率以及右手操作频率中操作频率高所对应的操作模式确定输入子显示区域与功能子显示区域的显示方式，对此不做限定。针对不同的操作模式采用不同的界面布局，可适应于用户的操作习惯对输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域进行布局，便于用户进行操作，且提供了至少一种显示布局方式，增加了显示多样性。The input function area is divided into input sub-display areas and/or function sub-display areas according to the interface layout corresponding to the operation mode. Corresponding to the operation mode including at least one of the one-handed mode, the left-handed mode, the right-handed mode and the two-handed operation mode, the corresponding relationship between the operation mode and the interface layout can be preset. The input sub-display area is set on the left side of the input function area, and the function sub-display area is set on the right side of the input function area; when the operation mode is right-hand operation, the input sub-display area can be set on the right side of the input function area. Set the function sub-display area on the left side of the input function area; when the operation mode is the two-hand mode, it can be the display mode of the input sub-display area and the function sub-display area corresponding to the above left-hand operation or right-hand operation, or the left-hand operation can be obtained. Frequency and right-hand operation frequency, obtain the left-hand operation frequency and the operation mode corresponding to the highest operation frequency among the right-hand operation frequencies to determine the display mode of the input sub-display area and the function sub-display area, which is not limited. Different interface layouts are adopted for different operation modes, and the input sub-display area and/or function sub-display area can be arranged according to the user's operation habits, which is convenient for the user to operate, and provides at least one display layout method, which increases the Show diversity.
可选地，步骤S223即在所述功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息之后包括以下至少一种：Optionally, step S223 includes at least one of the following after displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area:
在接收到第一预设显示指令，将所述输入子显示区域以及所述功能子显示区域之间的显示位置进行调换；After receiving the first preset display instruction, exchange the display positions between the input sub-display area and the function sub-display area;
在接收到第二预设显示指令，将整个所述输入功能区域切换为所述输入子显示区域；After receiving the second preset display instruction, switch the entire input function area to the input sub-display area;
在接收到第三预设显示指令，将整个所述输入功能区域切换为所述功能子显示区域。After receiving the third preset display instruction, the entire input function area is switched to the function sub-display area.
预设显示指令可通过显示按钮或者按键进行触发，也可通过与预设显示指令对应的触摸操作触发，对此不做限定。其中，预设显示指令包括但不限于第一预设显示指令、第二预设显示指令以及第三预设显示指令，且第一预设显示指令、第二预设显示指令以及第三预设显示指令分别触发的按钮或者按键或者对应的触摸操作均不相同。The preset display instruction may be triggered by a display button or key, or may be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the preset display instruction, which is not limited. The preset display instructions include but are not limited to a first preset display instruction, a second preset display instruction, and a third preset display instruction, and the first preset display instruction, the second preset display instruction, and the third preset display instruction The buttons or keys or corresponding touch operations triggered by the display instructions are different.
需要说明的是，预设显示指令与该预设显示指令对应的显示操作具有对应关系，该对应关系通过预先设置完成。接收到第一预设显示指令，将输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域之间的显示位置进行调换，也即实现输入键盘与快捷功能信息显示位置之间的交换；和/或，接收到第二预设显示指令，将整个输入功能区域切换为输入子显示区域，也 即将输入子显示区域所显示的输入键盘放大显示于整个输入功能区域；和/或，接收到第三预设显示指令，将整个输入功能区域切换为功能子显示区域，也即将功能子显示区域所显示的快捷功能信息输出显示于整个输入功能区域，可选地，还可增加快捷功能信息的数量输出显示于整个输入功能区域。通过预设置不同的预设切换指令，对应一预设切换指令设置显示操作，可增加输入功能区域中显示布局的多样性，为用户提供至少一种可选的显示布局，便于用户根据所需选择显示布局，操作简单且增加用户体验感。It should be noted that the preset display instruction has a corresponding relationship with the display operation corresponding to the preset display instruction, and the corresponding relationship is completed by preset. After receiving the first preset display instruction, the display positions between the input sub-display areas and/or the function sub-display areas are exchanged, that is, the exchange between the input keyboard and the display position of the shortcut function information is realized; and/or, receiving To the second preset display instruction, switch the entire input function area to the input sub-display area, that is, the input keyboard displayed in the input sub-display area is enlarged and displayed in the entire input function area; and/or, receiving the third preset display area command to switch the entire input function area to the function sub-display area, that is, output and display the shortcut function information displayed in the function sub-display area on the entire input function area, optionally, increase the number of shortcut function information output and display on the entire input function area. Enter the functional area. By presetting different preset switching instructions and setting the display operation corresponding to a preset switching instruction, the variety of display layouts in the input function area can be increased, and at least one optional display layout can be provided for the user, which is convenient for the user to choose according to their needs. Display layout, simple operation and increase user experience.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，基于在输入功能区域显示输入键盘，当检测到输入功能区域发生变化时，将获取到的快捷功能信息也显示至输入功能区域，即在输入功能区域同时显示快捷功能信息和/或输入键盘，在充分利用变化后的输入功能区域的同时，新增快捷功能信息进行显示，更便于直接获取所需的快捷功能信息进行操作。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, based on the display of the input keyboard in the input function area, when it is detected that the input function area changes, the acquired shortcut function information is also displayed in the input function area, that is, it is simultaneously displayed in the input function area. For the shortcut function information and/or the input keyboard, while making full use of the changed input function area, new shortcut function information is added for display, which is more convenient to directly obtain the required shortcut function information for operation.
基于上述任意一个实施例提出本申请的输入法的显示方法的第十三实施例，请参考图17，图17为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十三实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，步骤S221即将所述输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域包括：Based on any of the above embodiments, a thirteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is proposed. Please refer to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of the thirteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application. In an example, in step S221, dividing the input function area into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area includes:
步骤S2211，获取所述输入功能区域的界面显示信息；其中，所述界面显示信息包括所述输入功能区域的显示位置和/或显示尺寸；Step S2211, acquiring interface display information of the input function area; wherein, the interface display information includes the display position and/or display size of the input function area;
步骤S2212，根据所述显示界面信息将所述输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域。Step S2212: Divide the input function area into input sub-display areas and/or function sub-display areas according to the display interface information.
界面显示信息包括输入功能区域的显示位置和/或显示尺寸。其中，显示位置是输入功能区域在终端设备的显示屏上进行显示的坐标点，可以是输入功能区域的中心坐标点，也可以是输入子显示区域的任意一对角线确定的两坐标点；还可以是输入子显示区域的四个坐标点，对此不做限制。显示尺寸指的是输入功能区域的显示长度以及显示宽度。容易理解的是，可选取显示屏左下方的位置为坐标原点以作为确定其他显示区域的参考点。The interface display information includes the display position and/or display size of the input function area. Wherein, the display position is the coordinate point where the input function area is displayed on the display screen of the terminal device, which may be the center coordinate point of the input function area, or may be two coordinate points determined by any diagonal line of the input sub-display area; It can also be four coordinate points of the input sub-display area, which is not limited. Display size refers to the display length and display width of the input functional area. It is easy to understand that the position at the lower left of the display screen may be selected as the origin of the coordinates as a reference point for determining other display areas.
对应于输入子显示区域显示输入键盘，功能子显示区域显示快捷功能信息，根据界面显示信息将输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域的具体实现包括但不限于以下至少一种：The input keyboard is displayed corresponding to the input sub-display area, the function sub-display area displays shortcut function information, and the specific implementation of dividing the input function area into the input sub-display area and/or the function sub-display area according to the interface display information includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: kind:
第一，可在变化后的输入功能区域的目标显示区域的面积大于变化前的输入功能区域的初始显示区域的面积，且保持输入功能区域变化前以及变化后的输入键盘的显示尺寸不变的情况下，可将增大显示区域即目标显示区域与初始显示区域不重叠的部分确定为功能子显示区域，由此，根据显示界面信息确定输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域的子显示界面信息，以实现将输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域。容易理解的是，子显示界面信息包括子显示位置以及子显示尺寸。输入子显示区域对应的子显示界面信息为第一子显示信息，功能子显示区域对应的子显示界面信息为第二子显示信息；First, the area of the target display area of the input function area after the change can be larger than the area of the initial display area of the input function area before the change, and the display size of the input keyboard before and after the change of the input function area can be kept unchanged. In this case, the enlarged display area, that is, the part of the target display area that does not overlap with the initial display area, can be determined as the functional sub-display area, whereby the input sub-display area and/or the sub-display of the functional sub-display area can be determined according to the display interface information. interface information, so as to divide the input function area into input sub-display areas and/or function sub-display areas. It is easy to understand that the sub-display interface information includes the sub-display position and the sub-display size. The sub-display interface information corresponding to the input sub-display area is the first sub-display information, and the sub-display interface information corresponding to the function sub-display area is the second sub-display information;
第二，可根据输入功能区域所对应的显示尺寸预先设置显示布局方式，其中，显示布局方式指的是输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域之间的布局，不同的显示尺寸可分别设置显示布局方式，以在检测到输入功能区域发生变化时，根据输入功能区域的显示尺寸选择与该显示尺寸对应的显示布局方式，提高输入功能区域的显示空间的最大化使用。同理地，可根据输入功能区域所对应的显示长度与显示宽度的确定长宽比，根据长宽比预先设置显示布局方式，在此不再赘述。Second, the display layout mode can be preset according to the display size corresponding to the input function area, wherein the display layout mode refers to the layout between the input sub-display areas and/or the function sub-display areas, and different display sizes can be set separately The display layout mode is to select a display layout mode corresponding to the display size according to the display size of the input function area when the change of the input function area is detected, so as to maximize the use of the display space of the input function area. Similarly, the display layout mode can be preset according to the aspect ratio of the display length and the display width corresponding to the input function area, and details are not repeated here.
可选地，步骤S221即将所述输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域之后，包括：Optionally, step S221, after dividing the input function area into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area, includes:
在接收到显示调整指令时，根据所述显示调整指令调整所述输入子显示区域和/或所述功能子显示区域的尺寸。When a display adjustment instruction is received, the size of the input sub-display area and/or the function sub-display area is adjusted according to the display adjustment instruction.
显示调整指令可通过调整按钮或者按键触发，也可通过与显示调整指令对应的触摸操作触发，对此不做限定。根据显示调整指令调整输入子显示区域与功能子显示区域的尺寸的步骤包括：获取所述显示调整指令对应的调整方向和/或调整位移；根据所述调整方向 和/或所述调整位移调整所述输入子显示区域和/或所述功能子显示区域的显示区域的显示尺寸。The display adjustment instruction may be triggered by an adjustment button or key, or may be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the display adjustment instruction, which is not limited. The step of adjusting the size of the input sub-display area and the function sub-display area according to the display adjustment instruction includes: acquiring the adjustment direction and/or adjustment displacement corresponding to the display adjustment instruction; The display size of the display area of the input sub-display area and/or the function sub-display area.
需要说明的是，调整方向指的是基于待调整的显示区域，增大待调整的显示区域的移动方向。其中，待调整的显示区域包括输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域中至少一个。调整位移是基于待调整的显示区域，用于限定沿着调整方向确定待调整的显示区域增大的幅度。举例来说，在输入子显示区域与功能子显示区域的边界上检测到显示调整指令时，可将边界沿着显示调整指令的移动通过显示调整指令确定的调整位移，其中，调整方向即功能子显示区域指向输入子显示区域的方向，在待调整的显示区域为功能子显示区域时，实现增大功能子显示区域的显示尺寸，减小输入子显示区域的显示尺寸的动态调整。需要说明的是，功能子显示区域或者输入子显示区域所对应显示的内容随着显示尺寸的大小进行放缩。It should be noted that the adjustment direction refers to the movement direction of increasing the display area to be adjusted based on the display area to be adjusted. Wherein, the display area to be adjusted includes at least one of an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area. The adjustment displacement is based on the display area to be adjusted, and is used to define the magnitude of the increase of the display area to be adjusted along the adjustment direction. For example, when a display adjustment instruction is detected on the boundary between the input sub-display area and the functional sub-display area, the movement of the boundary along the display adjustment instruction can be adjusted by the adjustment displacement determined by the display adjustment instruction, wherein the adjustment direction is the function sub-display. The display area points to the direction of the input sub-display area. When the display area to be adjusted is a functional sub-display area, the dynamic adjustment of increasing the display size of the functional sub-display area and reducing the display size of the input sub-display area is realized. It should be noted that the content displayed corresponding to the function sub-display area or the input sub-display area is scaled with the size of the display size.
步骤S223即在所述功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息包括：In step S223, displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area includes:
根据所述功能子显示区域对应的所述界面显示信息确定所述快捷功能信息的输出比例；Determine the output ratio of the shortcut function information according to the interface display information corresponding to the function sub-display area;
根据所述输出比例将所述快捷功能信息输出至所述功能子显示区域。The shortcut function information is output to the function sub-display area according to the output ratio.
根据功能子显示区域对应的界面显示信息确定快捷功能信息的输出比例，实质上是根据功能子显示区域对应的第二子显示信息确定快捷功能信息的输出比例，具体是通过待显示的快捷功能信息的显示尺寸与功能子显示区域的显示尺寸确定快捷功能信息的输出比例；以根据输出比例放大或者缩小快捷功能信息对应的显示尺寸；进而将快捷功能信息输出至功能子显示区域进行适应性显示。The output ratio of the shortcut function information is determined according to the interface display information corresponding to the function sub-display area. In essence, the output ratio of the shortcut function information is determined according to the second sub-display information corresponding to the function sub-display area. Specifically, the shortcut function information to be displayed is determined. The display size of the function sub-display area and the display size of the function sub-display area determine the output scale of the shortcut function information; enlarge or reduce the display size corresponding to the shortcut function information according to the output scale; and then output the shortcut function information to the function sub-display area for adaptive display.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，根据输入功能区域的显示界面信息将输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域，在功能子显示区域直接显示快捷功能信息，可减少用户的操作层级，也即用户不必通过二次操作获取快捷功能信息，直接从功能子显示区域获取快捷功能信息，提升用户体验，操作简单。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, the input function area is divided into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area according to the display interface information of the input function area, and the shortcut function information is directly displayed in the function sub-display area, which can reduce the number of users This means that the user does not need to obtain the shortcut function information through secondary operations, but directly obtains the shortcut function information from the function sub-display area, which improves the user experience and is easy to operate.
基于上述任意一个实施例提出本申请的输入法的显示方法的第十四实施例，请参考图18，图18为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十四实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，快捷功能信息的显示属性为悬浮显示时，步骤S223即在所述功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息之前包括：Based on any of the above embodiments, a fourteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is proposed. Please refer to FIG. 18 . FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application. In an example, when the display attribute of the shortcut function information is floating display, step S223 includes before displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area:
步骤S30，获取所述快捷功能信息的第一显示尺寸；Step S30, obtaining the first display size of the shortcut function information;
步骤S40，获取所述功能子显示区域的第二显示尺寸；Step S40, acquiring the second display size of the functional sub-display area;
步骤S50，在所述第二显示尺寸大于所述第一显示尺寸时，执行在所述功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息的步骤。Step S50, when the second display size is larger than the first display size, execute the step of displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area.
快捷功能信息包括快捷工具栏、组合快捷按键、当前显示界面中二级菜单对应的快捷功能以及输入键盘中二级菜单对应的快捷功能中的至少一种The shortcut function information includes at least one of the shortcut toolbar, the combination shortcut keys, the shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the current display interface, and the shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the input keyboard
在实际应用过程中，举例来说，在快捷功能信息为快捷工具栏时，当***一第三方的快捷工具栏时，由于当前的输入显示界面无法对该快捷工具栏进行识别，导致快捷工具栏悬浮于原有的输入显示界面对原有的输入显示界面进行遮挡，影响用户操作或者浏览查看输入显示界面中的信息。在快捷功能信息的显示属性为悬浮显示时，通过判断功能子显示区域的第二显示尺寸是否大于快捷功能信息的第一显示尺寸，以获知功能子显示区域是否能够显示快捷功能信息，在第二显示尺寸大于第一显示尺寸时，也即功能子显示区域能够显示快捷功能信息，通过执行在功能子显示区域显示快捷功能信息以避免了悬浮显示的快捷功能信息遮挡原输入显示界面的显示信息，便于用户操作或者浏览查看输入显示界面中的信息的同时，可直接使用快捷功能信息。In the actual application process, for example, when the shortcut function information is a shortcut toolbar, when a third-party shortcut toolbar is inserted, the shortcut toolbar cannot be recognized by the current input display interface, resulting in the shortcut toolbar. Floating on the original input display interface blocks the original input display interface, affecting user operations or browsing and viewing information in the input display interface. When the display attribute of the shortcut function information is floating display, it is determined whether the second display size of the function sub-display area is larger than the first display size of the shortcut function information, so as to know whether the shortcut function information can be displayed in the function sub-display area. When the display size is larger than the first display size, that is, the function sub-display area can display the shortcut function information. By executing the display of the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area, it is avoided that the shortcut function information displayed in the floating display blocks the display information of the original input display interface. It is convenient for users to operate or browse and view the information in the input display interface, and at the same time, the shortcut function information can be directly used.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，通过将悬浮显示的快捷功能信息显示于功能子显示区域，可避免悬浮显示的快捷功能信息遮挡输入显示界面中显示的信息内容，在便于用户操作或者浏览查看输入显示界面中的信息的同时，可直接使用快捷功能信息。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, by displaying the shortcut function information displayed in the floating display in the function sub-display area, it is possible to prevent the shortcut function information displayed in the floating display from covering the information content displayed in the input display interface, which is convenient for the user to operate or browse. While inputting the information in the display interface, the shortcut function information can be used directly.
基于上述任意一个实施例提出本申请的输入法的显示方法的第十五实施例，请参考图19，图19为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十五实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，步骤S223即在所述功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息之后包括：Based on any one of the above embodiments, a fifteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is proposed. Please refer to FIG. 19 . FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of the fifteenth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application. In an example, step S223 includes after displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area:
步骤S60，在接收到预设切换指令时，将所述功能子显示区域中的快捷功能信息切换为隐藏的预设快捷功能信息。Step S60 , when the preset switching instruction is received, switch the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area to the hidden preset shortcut function information.
对应于快捷功能信息包括快捷工具栏、组合快捷按键、当前显示界面中二级菜单对应的快捷功能以及输入键盘中二级菜单对应的快捷功能中的至少一种，在实际应用过程中，由于功能子显示区域所显示的快捷功能信息是有限的，为便于将所有的快捷功能信息均可通过功能子显示区域进行显示，便于快速选择所需的快捷功能信息，可在功能子显示区域预设置多个快捷功能信息显示界面，其中，快捷功能信息显示界面可显示一个或者多个快捷功能信息。The information corresponding to the shortcut functions includes at least one of the shortcut toolbar, the combination shortcut keys, the shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the current display interface, and the shortcut function corresponding to the secondary menu in the input keyboard. The shortcut function information displayed in the sub-display area is limited. In order to display all the shortcut function information through the function sub-display area and to quickly select the desired shortcut function information, you can preset multiple functions in the function sub-display area. A shortcut function information display interface, wherein the shortcut function information display interface can display one or more shortcut function information.
需要说明的是，预设置的多个快捷功能信息显示界面中任意一快捷功能信息显示界面的界面状态包括显示状态以及隐藏状态。通过预设切换指令可实现多个快捷功能信息显示界面之间的切换，其中，显示于功能子显示区域的快捷功能信息显示界面对应界面状态为显示状态，未显示于功能子显示区域的快捷功能信息显示界面对应界面状态为隐藏状态，可将隐藏状态的快捷功能信息显示界面理解为非一级菜单，如二级菜单或者三级菜单，容易理解的是，显示于隐藏状态的快捷功能信息显示界面上的快捷功能信息也可认为是隐藏的快捷功能信息。It should be noted that the interface state of any one of the preset multiple shortcut function information display interfaces includes a displayed state and a hidden state. Switching between multiple shortcut function information display interfaces can be realized by preset switching instructions, wherein the interface state corresponding to the shortcut function information display interface displayed in the function sub-display area is the display state, and the shortcut function not displayed in the function sub-display area is in the display state. The corresponding interface state of the information display interface is the hidden state. The shortcut function information display interface in the hidden state can be understood as a non-first-level menu, such as the second-level menu or the third-level menu. It is easy to understand that the shortcut function information displayed in the hidden state is displayed. The shortcut function information on the interface may also be considered as hidden shortcut function information.
预设切换指令可通过切换按钮或者按键触发，也可以是通过与预设切换指令对应的触摸操作触发，对此不做限定。在接收到预设切换指令时，将功能子显示区域中的快捷功能信息切换为隐藏的预设快捷功能信息，也即，将显示于功能子显示区域的快捷功能信息显示界面切换至其他隐藏状态的快捷功能信息显示界面。具体地，可对预设置的多个快捷功能信息显示界面分别设置优先级，按照优先级由高至低进行排列设置，在接收到切换指令时，按照快捷功能信息显示界面的优先级由高至低进行切换，可选地，可获取各个快捷功能信息的使用频率，对应于快捷功能信息显示界面，将各个快捷功能信息的使用频率由高至低排列，并将使用频率高的显示于优先级高的快捷功能信息显示界面，以此类推，对此不做限定。The preset switching instruction may be triggered by a switching button or a key, or may be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the preset switching instruction, which is not limited. When receiving the preset switching instruction, switch the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area to the hidden preset shortcut function information, that is, switch the shortcut function information display interface displayed in the function sub-display area to another hidden state The shortcut function information display interface. Specifically, priorities can be set for the preset multiple shortcut function information display interfaces respectively, and the settings are arranged according to the priority from high to low. When a switching instruction is received, the priority of the shortcut function information display interface is from high to low. Switch from low to low. Optionally, the usage frequency of each shortcut function information can be obtained. Corresponding to the shortcut function information display interface, the usage frequency of each shortcut function information is arranged from high to low, and the one with the highest usage frequency is displayed in the priority. High shortcut function information display interface, and so on, which is not limited.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，通过预设切换指令将隐藏的预设快捷功能信息显示至功能子显示区域，实现了在同一功能子显示区域对不同的预设快捷功能信息之间的切换显示，操作简单，且增加了对快捷功能信息的可选择性。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, the hidden preset shortcut function information is displayed in the function sub-display area through the preset switching instruction, so as to realize switching between different preset shortcut function information in the same function sub-display area Display, operation is simple, and the selectivity of shortcut function information is increased.
此外，本申请提供一种输入法的显示方法方法，请参考图20，图20为本申请的输入法的显示方法方法第十六实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，输入法的显示方法方法包括以下步骤：In addition, the present application provides a method for displaying an input method. Please refer to FIG. 20 . FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of a sixteenth embodiment of the method for displaying an input method. The method method includes the following steps:
步骤S200，打开终端设备具有输入键盘的输入显示界面，于所述输入显示界面输入的待发送信息；Step S200, opening an input display interface having an input keyboard in the terminal device, and inputting the information to be sent on the input display interface;
待发送信息为用户基于具有输入键盘的输入显示界面预先输入的聊天信息，待发送消息包括文字、多媒体、表情、图片以及文件中至少一种。其中，多媒体包括语音或者图像视频。聊天信息包括但不限于语音信息、文字信息、表情信息以及图片。The information to be sent is chat information pre-input by the user based on an input display interface with an input keyboard, and the to-be-sent message includes at least one of text, multimedia, emoticons, pictures, and files. Among them, the multimedia includes voice or image video. Chat information includes but is not limited to voice information, text information, emoticon information and pictures.
步骤S210，于所述输入显示界面选择目标发送应用；以及，Step S210, selecting a target sending application on the input display interface; and,
步骤S220，将所述待发送信息发送至所述目标发送应用。Step S220, sending the information to be sent to the target sending application.
目标发送应用包括通讯应用程序、通讯应用程序的联系人、通讯应用程序的联系群以及公众号中的至少一种。The target sending application includes at least one of a communication application, a contact of the communication application, a contact group of the communication application, and an official account.
可选地，步骤S210包括：输出发送选择界面，所述发送选择界面包括至少一发送应用；Optionally, step S210 includes: outputting a sending selection interface, where the sending selection interface includes at least one sending application;
在所述发送选择界面接收到选择指令时，根据所述选择指令确定所述目标发送应用。When the sending selection interface receives a selection instruction, the target sending application is determined according to the selection instruction.
需要说明的是，发送选择界面内显示的至少一发送应用的标识信息，标识信息包括类 别、图标、名称中的至少一项，如发送应用为微信时，微信的标识信息可以是微信对应的应用图标，也可以是微信名称；发送应用为联系人时，联系人的标识信息可以是联系人的头像，也可以是联系人的姓名名称。发送应用包括通讯应用程序、通讯应用程序的联系人、通讯应用程序的联系群以及公众号中的至少一种。其中，通讯应用程序，如微信、QQ以及WhatsApp等。可以理解的是，目标发送应用是从发送选择界面内至少一发送应用中选中的部分或者全部发送应用，为待发送信息的目标发送对象。It should be noted that the identification information of at least one sending application displayed in the sending selection interface includes at least one of category, icon, and name. For example, when the sending application is WeChat, the identification information of WeChat can be the application corresponding to WeChat. The icon can also be the name of WeChat; when the application is sent as a contact, the identification information of the contact can be the avatar of the contact or the name of the contact. The sending application includes at least one of a communication application, a contact of the communication application, a contact group of the communication application, and an official account. Among them, communication applications, such as WeChat, QQ and WhatsApp, etc. It can be understood that the target sending application is a part or all of the sending applications selected from at least one sending application in the sending selection interface, and is the target sending object of the information to be sent.
对应于目标发送应用包括通讯应用程序、通讯应用程序的联系人、通讯应用程序的联系群以及公众号中的至少一种，在目标发送应用为多个时，如目标发送应用包括通讯应用程序、通讯应用程序的联系人、通讯应用程序的联系群以及公众号时，发送选择界面可以通过多级菜单形式选择获取目标发送应用，举例来说，多级菜单形式可以是目标发送应用的应用程序作为一级菜单，应用程序的联系人、联系群以及公众号作为并列二级菜单；还可以是目标发送应用的应用程序作为一级菜单，应用程序的联系人、联系群以及公众号分别作为二级菜单、三级菜单以及四级菜单，对此不做限定。Corresponding to the target sending application including at least one of the communication application, the contact of the communication application, the contact group of the communication application and the official account, when there are multiple target sending applications, for example, the target sending application includes the communication application, When the contact of the communication application, the contact group of the communication application and the official account, the sending selection interface can select and obtain the target sending application through the multi-level menu form. For example, the multi-level menu form can be the application of the target sending application as the The first-level menu, the contact, contact group and official account of the application are used as the secondary menu; it can also be the application of the target sending application as the first-level menu, and the contacts, contact group and official account of the application are respectively as the second-level menu The menu, the third-level menu and the fourth-level menu are not limited.
在发送选择界面接收到选择指令时，根据选择指令确定目标发送应用。选择指令可通过点击发送选择界面上各个发送应用对应的选择按键或者按钮触发，也可通过与选择指令对应触摸操作触发，对此不做限定。根据选择指令确定目标发送应用，也即在发送选择界面中通过选择指令选中的一个或者多个发送应用作为目标发送应用。When the selection instruction is received in the sending selection interface, the target sending application is determined according to the selection instruction. The selection instruction may be triggered by clicking a selection button or button corresponding to each sending application on the sending selection interface, or may be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the selection instruction, which is not limited. The target sending application is determined according to the selection instruction, that is, one or more sending applications selected by the selection instruction in the sending selection interface are used as the target sending application.
需要说明的是，步骤S220之前包括：It should be noted that the steps before step S220 include:
通过输入显示界面检测到信息发送指令时，获取于所述通过所述输入显示界面输入的待发送信息；When the information sending instruction is detected through the input display interface, obtain the information to be sent input through the input display interface;
获取于输入显示界面选择的目标发送应用。Obtain the target sending application selected on the input display interface.
信息发送指令可通过点击发送按键或者按钮触发，也可通过与信息发送指令对应触摸操作触发，对此不做限定。通过输入显示界面检测到信息发送指令可以是在输入显示界面检测到发送按键或者按钮的点击操作，也可以是在输入显示界面检测到与信息发送指令对应触摸操作，对此不做限定。获取用户通过输入显示界面输入的待发送信息，可从输入文本框中获取，也可从待选发送界面如表情选择界面直接获取已选中的待发送信息，对此不做限定。The information sending instruction may be triggered by clicking the sending button or button, or may be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the information sending instruction, which is not limited. The information sending instruction detected through the input display interface may be a click operation of a sending key or button detected on the input display interface, or a touch operation corresponding to the information sending instruction detected on the input display interface, which is not limited. The information to be sent entered by the user through the input display interface can be obtained from the input text box, or the selected information to be sent can be directly obtained from the to-be-sent interface such as the expression selection interface, which is not limited.
可选地，步骤S220包括：Optionally, step S220 includes:
在目标发送应用为通讯应用程序中的联系人时，获取所述通讯应用程序对应的联系人中所述待发送信息对应的目标联系人；When the target sending application is a contact in a communication application, obtain a target contact corresponding to the information to be sent in the contacts corresponding to the communication application;
所述将所述待发送信息发送至所述目标联系人。Sending the to-be-sent information to the target contact.
在目标发送应用为通讯应用程序的联系人时，通讯应用程序的联系人可以是一个也可以是多个，可通过发送选择界面从至少一通讯应用程序对应的所有联系人内选择确定，在通讯应用程序的联系人为多个时，通讯应用程序的多个联系人为待发送信息的目标发送对象，将待发送信息同时发送至目标发送对象即多个联系人，其中，多个联系人可以是属于同一个通讯应用程序对应的联系人，也可以是属于不同通讯应用程序对应的联系人。When the target sending application is a contact of a communication application, the number of contacts of the communication application may be one or more, and can be selected from all contacts corresponding to at least one communication application through the sending selection interface. When there are multiple contacts of the application, the multiple contacts of the communication application are the target senders of the information to be sent, and the information to be sent is simultaneously sent to the target senders, that is, multiple contacts. The contacts corresponding to the same communication application may also be contacts corresponding to different communication applications.
需要说明的是，发送选择界面的输出方式包括以下至少一种：It should be noted that the output mode of the sending selection interface includes at least one of the following:
发送选择界面显示于输入显示界面；The sending selection interface is displayed on the input display interface;
发送选择界面通过预设方式触发后显示于所述输入显示界面，可选地，预设方式包括点击按钮以及预设触摸操作中至少一种。The sending selection interface is triggered in a preset manner and displayed on the input display interface. Optionally, the preset manner includes at least one of clicking a button and a preset touch operation.
发送选择界面显示于输入显示界面可通过悬浮于输入显示界面进行显示，也可内嵌入输入显示界面进行显示，对此不做限定。参考图21，图21为本申请的输入法的显示方法方法在本实施例的发送选择界面显示于输入显示界面的第一显示方式。The sending selection interface displayed on the input display interface can be displayed by being suspended on the input display interface, or can be displayed by being embedded in the input display interface, which is not limited. Referring to FIG. 21 , FIG. 21 is a first display mode in which the input method display method of the present application is displayed on the input display interface in the transmission selection interface of this embodiment.
发送选择界面通过预设方式触发后显示于输入显示界面，其中，预设方式包括点击按钮以及预设触摸操作中至少一种。举例来说，输出发送选择界面可通过输入显示界面检 测到信息发送指令时触发。可选地，在发送选择界面检测到确认发送操作时，可将待发送信息发送至从发送选择界面中选中的目标发送应用。需要说明的是，步骤S210中输出发送选择界面的步骤与步骤S200中获取所述用户通过所述输入显示界面输入的待发送信息的执行顺序可以是步骤S210中输出发送选择界面在步骤S200中获取所述用户通过所述输入显示界面输入的待发送信息之前执行，也可以是步骤S210中输出发送选择界面在步骤S200中获取所述用户通过所述输入显示界面输入的待发送信息之后执行，对此不做限定。可以理解的是，输出发送选择界面也可通过在输入显示界面检测到发送选择指令时触发，其中，发送选择指令可以是设置于输入显示界面上的按钮或者按键触发，也可以是与发送选择指令对应的触摸操作触发，参考图22，图22为本申请的输入法的显示方法方法在本实施例的发送选择界面显示于输入显示界面的第二显示方式。其中，发送选择界面可通过“FB”按键或者发送按键触发显示于输入显示界面。需要说明的是，发送选择指令对应的触摸操作触发与信息发送指令对应的预设触摸操作触发不同。The sending selection interface is triggered in a preset manner and displayed on the input display interface, wherein the preset manner includes at least one of clicking a button and a preset touch operation. For example, the output sending selection interface can be triggered when an information sending instruction is detected through the input display interface. Optionally, when the confirmation sending operation is detected on the sending selection interface, the information to be sent may be sent to the target sending application selected from the sending selection interface. It should be noted that, the steps of outputting the sending selection interface in step S210 and the execution sequence of obtaining the information to be sent inputted by the user through the input display interface in step S200 may be the outputting sending selection interface in step S210 and obtaining in step S200. The execution is performed before the information to be sent input by the user through the input display interface, or it may be executed after the information to be sent input by the user through the input display interface is obtained in step S210 after the selection interface for transmission is output in step S200. This is not limited. It can be understood that the output transmission selection interface can also be triggered when the input display interface detects the transmission selection instruction, wherein the transmission selection instruction can be triggered by a button or a key set on the input display interface, or it can be triggered with the transmission selection instruction. For the corresponding touch operation trigger, refer to FIG. 22 , which is a second display manner of displaying the input method display method of the present application on the input display interface in the sending selection interface of this embodiment. Among them, the sending selection interface can be triggered and displayed on the input display interface through the "FB" button or the sending button. It should be noted that the touch operation trigger corresponding to sending the selection instruction is different from the preset touch operation trigger corresponding to the information sending instruction.
可选地，输出发送选择界面的步骤之后包括：Optionally, after the step of outputting the sending selection interface, the following steps are included:
在通过所述发送选择界面接收到调整指令时，对所述发送选择界面上的发送应用进行与所述调整指令对应的操作，其中，所述调整指令对应的操作包括增加、删减以及修改所述发送应用的数量或内容中至少一种。When an adjustment instruction is received through the transmission selection interface, an operation corresponding to the adjustment instruction is performed on the transmission application on the transmission selection interface, wherein the operation corresponding to the adjustment instruction includes addition, deletion and modification of all at least one of the number or content of the sending applications.
调整指令对应的操作包括增加、删除以及修改发送应用的数量或内容至少一种。对应于发送选择界面内显示的至少一发送应用的图标或名称，在调整指令为增加发送应用的数量或者内容，可以是增加应用程序、应用程序的联系人、应用程序的联系群以及公众号中的至少一种。举例来说，在发送选择界面已存在微信以及QQ时，可通过调整指令将whatsAPP添加至发送选择界面。与调整指令为增加发送应用的数量以及内容同理，调整指令为删减以及修改发送应用的数量或者内容在此不做赘述。The operation corresponding to the adjustment instruction includes at least one of adding, deleting, and modifying the quantity or content of the sending application. Corresponding to the icon or name of at least one sending application displayed in the sending selection interface, when the adjustment instruction is to increase the number or content of the sending application, it may be to increase the application, the contact of the application, the contact group of the application and the official account. at least one of. For example, when WeChat and QQ already exist in the sending selection interface, whatsAPP can be added to the sending selection interface by adjusting the instruction. Similar to that the adjustment instruction is to increase the number and content of the sending applications, the adjustment instruction is to delete and modify the number or content of the sending applications, which will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是，调整指令可通过点击发送选择界面内任意一个发送应用对应的切换按键或者按钮触发，也可通过与调整指令对应触摸操作触发，还可以是通过预设操作进入调整状态后，根据调整指令对发送选择界面内的发送应用进行与调整指令对应的操作，对此不做限定。It should be noted that the adjustment instruction can be triggered by clicking the switch button or button corresponding to any sending application in the sending selection interface, or triggered by the touch operation corresponding to the adjustment instruction, or after entering the adjustment state through a preset operation, according to the The adjustment instruction performs operations corresponding to the adjustment instruction on the sending application in the sending selection interface, which is not limited.
可选地，输出发送选择界面的步骤之后包括：Optionally, after the step of outputting the sending selection interface, the following steps are included:
在通过所述发送选择界面接收到切换显示指令时，获取当前发送应用的应用信息，可选地，应用信息包括类别、名称、图标中至少一个；When receiving the switching display instruction through the sending selection interface, obtain application information of the currently sent application, optionally, the application information includes at least one of a category, a name, and an icon;
将所述应用信息切换显示于所述切换显示指令对应的位置。Switching and displaying the application information at a position corresponding to the switching display instruction.
在实际应用过程中，对应于发送选择界面内显示的至少一发送应用，在发送选择界面接收到切换显示指令时，在同一输入显示界面将当前发送应用的聊天显示界面切换为显示指令确定的发送应用对应的聊天显示界面，相应地，通过获取当前发送应用的应用信息，如名称和/或图标，将应用信息切换显示于切换显示指令对应的位置，也即将当前发送应用的应用信息显示于发送选择界面内，以便下次对该发送应用进行操作如切换显示指令。可选地，将应用信息切换显示于切换显示指令对应的位置之前，可判断当前发送应用的应用信息与发送选择界面内显示的发送应用的标识信息是否匹配，容易理解的是，在不匹配时，执行将应用信息切换显示于切换显示指令对应的位置的步骤。可选地，发送应用为通讯应用程序。需要说明的是，切换显示指令可通过点击预设与发送选择界面内任意一个发送应用对应的切换按键或者按钮触发，也可通过与信息发送指令对应触摸操作触发如长按发送选择界面内显示的一发送应用，对此不做限定。In the actual application process, corresponding to at least one sending application displayed in the sending selection interface, when the sending selection interface receives the switching display instruction, the chat display interface of the currently sending application is switched to the sending determined by the display instruction on the same input display interface. The chat display interface corresponding to the application, correspondingly, by acquiring the application information of the currently sent application, such as the name and/or icon, the application information is switched and displayed at the position corresponding to the switching display instruction, that is, the application information of the currently sent application is displayed in the sending Select the interface, so that the next time the sending application can be operated, such as switching the display instruction. Optionally, before the application information is switched and displayed at the position corresponding to the switching display instruction, it can be judged whether the application information of the currently sending application matches the identification information of the sending application displayed in the sending selection interface. , and execute the step of switching and displaying the application information at the position corresponding to the switching display instruction. Optionally, the sending application is a communication application. It should be noted that the switching display instruction can be triggered by clicking the preset switching button or button corresponding to any sending application in the sending selection interface, or it can be triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the information sending instruction, such as long-pressing the displayed in the sending selection interface. Once the application is sent, this is not limited.
举例来说，在同时使用通讯应用程序如微信以及whatsApp与不同的朋友进行聊天时，在同一输入显示界面的输入框内输入内容可通过该输入显示界面实现在不同的通讯应用程序也即微信与whatsApp之间的无缝切换，不需要退出当前的应用程序界面如微信后，再通过点击whatsAPP进入whatsAPP的界面以查看或者回复消息。For example, when using communication applications such as WeChat and whatsApp to chat with different friends at the same time, inputting content in the input box of the same input and display interface can be realized through the input and display interface in different communication applications, namely WeChat and WeChat. Seamless switching between whatsApps, no need to exit the current application interface such as WeChat, and then click whatsAPP to enter the whatsAPP interface to view or reply to messages.
需要说明的是，通过输入显示界面选中的目标发送应用，是在基于一输入显示界面的 基础上聚合有不同的应用程序如通讯应用程序，微信、QQ以及whatsapp，实质上是通过获取各应用程序的API(Application Programming Interface，应用程序接口)聚合至同一界面，也可以理解为通过各应用程序的API或从Framework层接管不同应用程序的通知内容，将同一终端设备上的各种应用程序如通讯应用程序的聊天输入/输出界面归一到同一输入显示界面，也即用户只需通过一输入显示界面实现通讯应用程序的切换，不再需要退出当前通讯应用程序的输入显示界面，再选择切换到其它的应用程序界面去查看/输入/发送信息，如此，提高沟通效率，并能有效降低对智能终端设备的性能功耗负担。在输入显示界面，用户预先输入的待发送信息可通过调用聚合在输入显示界面的应用程序，将待发送信息发送至不同应用程序，减少不同应用程序之间的频繁切换，提高沟通效率。It should be noted that the target sending application selected through the input display interface is based on an input display interface and aggregates different applications such as communication applications, WeChat, QQ and whatsapp. The API (Application Programming Interface) is aggregated into the same interface, which can also be understood as taking over the notification content of different applications through the API of each application or from the Framework layer, and connecting various applications on the same terminal device, such as communication The chat input/output interface of the application is normalized to the same input display interface, that is, the user only needs to switch the communication application through one input display interface, and no longer needs to exit the input display interface of the current communication application, and then choose to switch to Other application program interfaces are used to view/input/send information, thus improving communication efficiency and effectively reducing the performance and power consumption burden on smart terminal devices. On the input display interface, the user pre-entered information to be sent can be sent to different applications by calling the applications aggregated on the input display interface, reducing frequent switching between different applications and improving communication efficiency.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，通过同一输入显示界面实现了输入待发送信息以及选中待发送信息发送的目标发送应用，将将待发送信息发送至目标发送应用，可选地，通过信息发送指令触发将待发送信息发送至目标发送应用，由于通过同一输入显示界面即可实现选择待发送信息发送的目标发送应用，而无需退出当前的输入显示界面进而切换至其他界面再返回至输入显示界面，大大减少了切换频率，降低对终端设备的性能功耗负担，从而提高通讯应用程序的沟通效率，提升用户体验。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, the input of the information to be sent and the selection of the target sending application for sending the information to be sent are realized through the same input display interface, and the information to be sent is sent to the target sending application, optionally, through the information sending The instruction triggers the sending of the information to be sent to the target sending application. Since the same input display interface can be used to select the target sending application to send the information to be sent, there is no need to exit the current input display interface, switch to other interfaces, and then return to the input display interface. , greatly reducing the switching frequency and reducing the performance and power consumption burden on the terminal device, thereby improving the communication efficiency of the communication application and improving the user experience.
基于上述第十六实施例提出本申请的输入法的显示方法方法的第十七实施例，请参考图23，图23为本申请的输入法的显示方法方法第十七实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，步骤S220包括：Based on the above-mentioned sixteenth embodiment, a seventeenth embodiment of the method for displaying the input method of the present application is proposed. Please refer to FIG. 23 . FIG. 23 is a schematic flowchart of the seventeenth embodiment of the method for displaying the input method of the present application. In this embodiment, step S220 includes:
步骤S221，在目标发送应用为多个时，将所述待发送信息同时发送至多个所述目标发送应用。Step S221, when there are multiple target sending applications, send the to-be-sent information to the multiple target sending applications at the same time.
对应于目标发送应用包括通讯应用程序、通讯应用程序的联系人、通讯应用程序的联系群以及公众号中的至少一种，在目标发送应用为多个通讯应用程序时，将待发送信息同时发送至多个目标发送应用，可预先设置每个通讯应用程序的默认发送对象如联系人、联系群以及公众号至少一种。其中，默认发送对象可以是一个，也可以是多个。在目标发送应用为通讯应用程序的多个联系人时，通讯应用程序的多个联系人通过发送选择界面从至少一通讯应用程序对应的所有联系人内选择确定，通讯应用程序的多个联系人为待发送信息的目标发送对象，将待发送信息同时发送至目标发送对象即多个联系人，其中，多个联系人可以是属于同一个通讯应用程序对应的联系人，也可以是属于不同通讯应用程序对应的联系人，通讯应用程序与通讯应用程序对应的联系人可通过多级菜单依次进行显示。与目标发送应用为通讯应用程序的多个联系人的同理，在目标发送应用为通讯应用程序的多个联系群或者通讯应用程序的多个公众号，在此不再赘述。Corresponding to at least one of the target sending application including the communication application, the contact of the communication application, the contact group of the communication application and the official account, when the target sending application is multiple communication applications, the information to be sent is sent simultaneously. For sending applications to multiple targets, it is possible to preset at least one of the default sending objects of each communication application, such as contacts, contact groups and official accounts. The default sending object may be one or more than one. When the target sending application is multiple contacts of the communication application, the multiple contacts of the communication application are selected from all the contacts corresponding to at least one communication application through the sending selection interface, and the multiple contacts of the communication application are The target sender of the information to be sent sends the information to be sent to the target sender simultaneously, that is, multiple contacts, wherein the multiple contacts may be contacts corresponding to the same communication application, or may belong to different communication applications The contacts corresponding to the program, the communication application and the contacts corresponding to the communication application can be displayed in sequence through the multi-level menu. Similar to the case where the target sending application is multiple contacts of the communication application, the target sending application is multiple contact groups of the communication application or multiple public accounts of the communication application, which will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是，在多个联系人属于不同通讯应用程序对应的联系人时，将待发送信息同时发送至不同通讯应用程序对应的联系人，实现了在不需要频繁切换通讯应用程序的基础上，通过同一输入显示界面将待发送信息同时发送至不同通讯应用程序的联系人，提高沟通效率，且减少通讯应用程序之间的切换频率，降低对终端设备的性能功耗负担，延长终端设备的使用时间。举例来说，埃及地区用户有早上通过通讯应用程序群发消息问侯早安的习惯，在用户输入早安内容即待发送内容后，可通过输入显示界面选择目标发送对象如通讯应用程序默认设置发送的目标发送对象、可选的通讯应用程序对应的联系人、可选的通讯应用程序的联系群或者公众号，进而将待发送信息一次性发送给不同通讯应用或者不同通讯应用对应的目标发送对象。需要说明的，目标发送对象可以是联系人、联系群以及公众号中至少一种。It should be noted that when multiple contacts belong to contacts corresponding to different communication applications, the information to be sent is sent to the contacts corresponding to different communication applications at the same time, which realizes that the communication application does not need to be switched frequently. , send the information to be sent to the contacts of different communication applications at the same time through the same input display interface, improve the communication efficiency, reduce the switching frequency between communication applications, reduce the performance and power consumption burden on the terminal equipment, and prolong the terminal equipment usage time. For example, users in Egypt have the habit of sending a message in the morning through a communication application to say good morning. After the user enters the good morning content, that is, the content to be sent, he can select the target sending object through the input display interface, such as the default setting of the communication application. The sending object, the contact corresponding to the optional communication application, the contact group or the official account of the optional communication application, and then the information to be sent is sent to different communication applications or target sending objects corresponding to different communication applications at one time. It should be noted that the target sending object may be at least one of a contact person, a contact group, and an official account.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，将待发送信息同时发送至多个目标发送应用，是基于同一输入显示界面将待发送信息同时发送至多个目标发送应用，其中，目标发送应用如不同通讯应用程序的多个联系人，多个目标发送应用通过获取发送选择界面选中的发送应用确定，实现了在与多个目标发送应用进行聊天时，不需要在不同的通讯应用程序之间进行 频繁切换，减少通讯应用程序之间的切换频率，降低对终端设备的性能功耗负担，延长终端设备的使用时间。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, sending the information to be sent to multiple target sending applications at the same time is based on the same input display interface to send the information to be sent to multiple target sending applications at the same time, wherein the target sending applications are different communication applications. The multiple contacts and multiple target sending applications are determined by obtaining the sending application selected on the sending selection interface, so that when chatting with multiple target sending applications, frequent switching between different communication applications is not required, reducing the need for The switching frequency between communication applications reduces the performance and power consumption burden on the terminal equipment and prolongs the use time of the terminal equipment.
基于上述任意一个实施例提出本申请的输入法的显示方法方法的第十八实施例，请参考图24，图24为本申请的输入法的显示方法方法第十八实施例的流程示意图，输入法的显示方法方法还包括：Based on any one of the above embodiments, an eighteenth embodiment of the method for displaying the input method of the present application is proposed. Please refer to FIG. 24 . FIG. 24 is a schematic flowchart of the eighteenth embodiment of the method for displaying the input method of the present application. The method of displaying the method also includes:
步骤S230，接收到消息后，在预设位置显示提示信息；Step S230, after receiving the message, displaying prompt information at a preset position;
步骤S240，添加所述消息的未读标记。Step S240, adding an unread mark of the message.
接收到的消息为发送应用接收或者返回的消息。提示信息的形式包括但不限于文字提示、悬浮框提示以及动态标记提示中至少一种。其中，动态标记提示可以是文字或者图标闪烁形式，也可以是颜色标记形式如接收到消息或者存在未读消息用绿色标记、紧急消息用红色标记以及消息已查看消除颜色标记等，对此不做限定。未读标记用于标记目标发送应用接收或者返回的消息未被用户查看的消息。未读标记可通过颜色标记如用绿色标记以及设置已/未读标记位等形式对目标发送应用未读的消息进行标记。其中，已/未读标记位，可通过设置标记位的标记值以对消息是否已读进行区分，如在接收到消息时，对该消息添加已/未读标记位，并设置标记位的值为1表示消息未读，在接收到消息查看指令时，将标记位的值设置为0表示消息已读。The received message is the message received or returned by the sending application. The form of the prompt information includes, but is not limited to, at least one of a text prompt, a floating frame prompt, and a dynamic mark prompt. Among them, the dynamic marking prompt can be in the form of text or icon flashing, or it can be in the form of color marking, such as green marking for received messages or unread messages, red marking for emergency messages, and color marking of messages that have been checked and removed, etc. limited. The unread mark is used to mark the messages received or returned by the target sending application that have not been viewed by the user. The unread mark can be used to mark messages that are not read by the target sending application by color marking such as marking with green and setting the read/unread flag bit. Among them, for the read/unread flag bit, you can distinguish whether the message has been read by setting the flag value of the flag bit. For example, when a message is received, add the read/unread flag bit to the message, and set the value of the flag bit. If it is 1, it means that the message is not read. When the message viewing command is received, set the value of the flag bit to 0 to indicate that the message has been read.
在预设位置显示提示信息，其中，预设位置包括如下至少一处：输入显示界面；对应的目标发送应用的图标或者名称上；跳转到目标发送应用显示界面；通讯应用程序的输入界面；终端显示界面。Display prompt information at a preset position, wherein the preset position includes at least one of the following: an input display interface; on the icon or name of the corresponding target sending application; jumping to the target sending application display interface; and an input interface of the communication application; Terminal display interface.
其中，在预设位置为输入显示界面时，提示信息可以悬浮框的形式悬浮显示于输入显示界面预设时长如1S(秒)，也可输出显示于输入显示界面中部分区域以进行提示。可选地，通过提示信息直接进入查看接收到的消息，如在提示信息检测到查看指令时，进入查看消息的输入显示界面以查看接收到的消息。在预设位置为消息对应的目标发送应用的图标或者名称上，通过设置图标或者名称以闪烁提示信息提示接收到消息，或者，对图标或者名称进行颜色标记形式提示接收到消息，对此不做限定。在预设位置为终端显示界面时，提示信息可以悬浮框的形式悬浮显示于终端显示界面预设时长如1S(秒)，也可输出显示于终端显示界面中部分区域以滚动条滚动形式进行提示。Wherein, when the preset position is the input display interface, the prompt information can be suspended and displayed on the input display interface in the form of a floating frame for a preset duration such as 1S (seconds), and can also be output and displayed in a part of the input display interface for prompting. Optionally, directly enter and view the received message through the prompt information, for example, when the prompt information detects a viewing instruction, enter the input display interface for viewing the message to view the received message. On the icon or name of the target sending application corresponding to the message at the preset position, set the icon or name to flash a prompt message to indicate that the message has been received, or color the icon or name to indicate that the message has been received. Do not do this. limited. When the preset position is the terminal display interface, the prompt information can be displayed in the form of a floating frame on the terminal display interface for a preset duration such as 1S (seconds), or it can be output and displayed in some areas of the terminal display interface in the form of scroll bars for prompting .
步骤S50，添加所述消息的未读标记之后，包括：Step S50, after adding the unread mark of the message, including:
获取与所述目标发送应用对应的所述消息中带有所述未读标记的消息数量；obtaining the number of messages with the unread mark in the messages corresponding to the target sending application;
将所述消息数量输出显示于所述输入显示界面中与所述目标发送应用的预设位置。The number of messages is output and displayed on the input display interface and in a preset position of the target sending application.
获取与目标发送应用对应的消息中带有未读标记的消息数量，对应于接收到消息时，添加消息的未读标记，可通过消息的未读标记对目标发送应用中的未读消息进行统计，以获得带有未读标记的消息数量，将消息数量输出显示于输入显示界面中与目标发送应用的预设位置如标识信息图标或者名称，具体可参考图21，如此，便于用户了解各个目标发送应用的未读消息数量，并提示用户进行阅读。Get the number of messages with unread marks in the messages corresponding to the target sending application. When a message is received, add the unread mark of the message. The unread mark of the message can be used to count the unread messages in the target sending application. , to obtain the number of messages with unread marks, and output and display the number of messages in the input display interface and the preset position of the target sending application, such as the identification information icon or name, for details, please refer to Figure 21, so that the user can understand each target easily. Sends the number of unread messages for the app and prompts the user to read it.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，接收到消息后，通过显示提示信息以告知用户有新消息可读，添加消息的未读标记，以使用户对未读信息一目了然，不会错过或者遗漏对消息的及时阅读。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, after a message is received, a prompt message is displayed to inform the user that there is a new message to read, and an unread mark of the message is added, so that the user can see the unread information at a glance, and will not miss or miss the right message. Timely reading of news.
本申请还提供一种输入法的显示方法方法，在该实施例中，输入法的显示方法方法包括以下步骤：The present application also provides a method for displaying an input method. In this embodiment, the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
打开终端设备具有输入键盘的输入显示界面；Open the input display interface of the terminal device with the input keyboard;
于所述输入显示界面，选择目标发送应用；In the input display interface, select the target sending application;
所述输入显示界面根据所述目标发送应用显示对应的待输入样式；The input display interface displays the corresponding to-be-input style according to the target sending application;
于所述待输入样式中输入待发送消息并发送。Input the message to be sent in the to-be-input style and send it.
需要说明的是，目标发送应用可是邮件或短信或即时通讯应用。即时通讯应用包括但不限于微信、QQ以及WhatsApp。可选地，在具有输入键盘的输入显示界面选择目标发送 应用之前包括：输出发送选择界面，所述发送选择界面包括至少一发送应用；在所述发送选择界面接收到选择指令时，根据所述选择指令确定所述目标发送应用。可选地，输出发送选择界面的触发可基于具有输入键盘的输入显示界面上的按键或者与输出发送选择界面对应的触摸操作触发，对此不做限定。It should be noted that the target sending application may be an email or a short message or an instant messaging application. Instant messaging applications include but are not limited to WeChat, QQ and WhatsApp. Optionally, before selecting a target sending application on an input display interface with an input keyboard, it includes: outputting a sending selection interface, where the sending selection interface includes at least one sending application; when the sending selection interface receives a selection instruction, according to the The selection instruction determines the target sending application. Optionally, the triggering of the output transmission selection interface may be triggered based on a key on an input display interface with an input keyboard or a touch operation corresponding to the output transmission selection interface, which is not limited.
对应于目标发送应用为邮件或者短信或者即时通讯应用，发送应用为邮件或者短信或者即时通讯应用。发送选择界面内显示的至少一发送应用的标识信息，标识信息包括类别、图标、名称中的至少一项，如发送应用为微信时，微信的标识信息可以是微信对应的应用图标，也可以是微信名称。可以理解的是，目标发送应用是从发送选择界面内至少一发送应用中选中的部分或者全部发送应用，为待发送信息的目标发送对象。Corresponding to the target sending application is an email or a short message or an instant messaging application, and the sending application is an email or a short message or an instant messaging application. The identification information of at least one sending application displayed in the sending selection interface, and the identification information includes at least one of category, icon, and name. For example, when the sending application is WeChat, the identification information of WeChat can be the application icon corresponding to WeChat, or it can be WeChat name. It can be understood that the target sending application is a part or all of the sending applications selected from at least one sending application in the sending selection interface, and is the target sending object of the information to be sent.
输入显示界面根据目标发送应用显示对应的待输入样式，可通过预先设置目标发送应用与待输入样式之间的对应关系，对应于目标发送应用可是邮件或短信或即时通讯应用，可选地，多个目标发送应用中每个目标发送应用对应的待输入样式不同。The input display interface displays the corresponding to-be-input style according to the target sending application. The corresponding relationship between the target sending application and the to-be-input style can be preset, and the corresponding target sending application may be an email, a short message, or an instant messaging application. The styles to be input corresponding to each target sending application in the target sending applications are different.
可选地，所述输入显示界面根据所述目标发送应用显示对应的待输入样式，显示方式可以是切换至所述待输入样式，也可是在现有输入显示界面增加所述待输入样式。Optionally, the input display interface displays the corresponding to-be-input style according to the target sending application, and the display mode may be switching to the to-be-input style, or to add the to-be-input style to the existing input display interface.
可选地，可选择至少两个目标发送应用，分别显示每个目标发送应用对应的待输入样式。Optionally, at least two target sending applications can be selected, and the styles to be input corresponding to each target sending application can be displayed respectively.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，不同的目标发送应用所需的待输入样式或格式会有所不同，例如短信或者邮件，切换至与目标发送应用对应的样式后，按照既定样式输入，不需要手动调整，操作简单。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, different target sending applications require different styles or formats to be input, such as text messages or emails, after switching to the style corresponding to the target sending application, input according to the established style, without Manual adjustment is required, and the operation is simple.
此外，本申请提供一种输入法的显示方法，请参考图25，图25为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十九实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：In addition, the present application provides an input method display method. Please refer to FIG. 25 . FIG. 25 is a schematic flowchart of a nineteenth embodiment of the input method display method of the present application. In this embodiment, the input method display method includes: The following steps:
步骤10，在第一区域检测到以预设规则操作字符； Step 10, detects in the first area that the character is operated with the preset rule;
第一区域为终端设备的触控区域，其中，触控区域包括触摸屏、设备后壳以及设备侧边。可选地，第一区域为显示在终端设备的触摸屏上的输入框区域，其中，字符的显示位置位于输入框区域内，字符包括但不限于文字、数字、字母、图片、标点符号以及表情中至少一种。预设规则包括但不限于增大字符间隙操作规则以及放大字符操作规则。需要说明的是，在预设规则为增大字符间隙操作规则时，字符以预设规则对应的显示方式显示时，各个字符之间的间距大于或小于未以预设规则操作字符的间隙，也即各个字符之间的间距大于以其它规则对应的显示方式显示字符时的字符间距；在预设规则为放大字符操作规则时，字符以预设规则对应的显示方式显示时，各个字符的大小以大于其他规则对应的显示方式显示字符，其中，其它规则为除预设规则之外的规则。The first area is a touch area of the terminal device, wherein the touch area includes a touch screen, a back case of the device, and a side of the device. Optionally, the first area is an input box area displayed on the touch screen of the terminal device, wherein the display position of the characters is located in the input box area, and the characters include but are not limited to characters, numbers, letters, pictures, punctuation marks and expressions. at least one. The preset rules include, but are not limited to, an operation rule for increasing the character gap and an operation rule for enlarging a character. It should be noted that, when the preset rule is to increase the character gap operation rule, when the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rule, the spacing between the characters is larger or smaller than the gap between the characters that are not operated according to the preset rule, and also That is, the spacing between the characters is larger than the character spacing when the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to other rules; when the preset rule is the enlarged character operation rule, when the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rule, the size of each character is equal to The characters are displayed in a display mode larger than that corresponding to other rules, wherein the other rules are rules other than the preset rules.
具体地，请参考图26，图26为本申请的输入法的显示方法第十九实施例的字符以预设规则对应的显示方式显示流程示意图，步骤10中字符以预设规则对应的显示方式显示包括：Specifically, please refer to FIG. 26 . FIG. 26 is a schematic flowchart of the display method of the nineteenth embodiment of the input method of the present application for displaying characters in a display mode corresponding to preset rules. In step 10, characters are displayed in a mode corresponding to preset rules. Display includes:
步骤11，预设规则包括增大字符间隙操作规则，字符以增大间隙后的形态显示；或者， Step 11, the preset rule includes an operation rule for increasing the character gap, and the characters are displayed in the form after the gap is increased; or,
步骤12，预设规则包括放大字符操作规则，字符以放大后的形态显示。 Step 12, the preset rules include an operation rule for enlarging characters, and the characters are displayed in an enlarged form.
可选地，预设规则包括缩小字符间隙操作规则，字符以缩小间隙后的形态显示。Optionally, the preset rule includes an operation rule for narrowing the gap between characters, and the characters are displayed in the form after the gap is narrowed.
可选地，预设规则包括缩小字符操作规则，字符以缩小后的形态显示。Optionally, the preset rules include operation rules for reducing characters, and the characters are displayed in a reduced form.
需要说明的是，预设规则的具体实现方式可通过预先设置与预设规则对应的触摸操作，以通过触摸操作触发预设规则的实现，对此不做限定。可选地，通过增大字符间隙操作规则以使得字符以增大间隙后的形态显示，可预先设置字符以预设字符间隙的间距输出显示，也可通过与该增大字符间隙操作规则对应的操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙大小，其中，操作参数为增大字符间隙操作规则对应的触摸操作的参数，操作参数包括但不限于触摸压力值、触摸时长、滑动距离以及触摸面积中的至少一个，需要说明的是，操作参数越大，各个字符之间的间隙大小越大，对此不做限定。It should be noted that, a specific implementation manner of the preset rule may trigger the implementation of the preset rule by presetting a touch operation corresponding to the preset rule, which is not limited thereto. Optionally, by increasing the character gap operation rule so that the characters are displayed in the form after the increase of the gap, the characters can be preset to be output and displayed with the spacing of the preset character gap, or the characters corresponding to the character gap increase operation rule can be displayed. The operation parameter determines the size of the gap between each character, wherein the operation parameter is the parameter of the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, and the operation parameter includes but is not limited to at least one of the touch pressure value, the touch duration, the sliding distance and the touch area. One, it should be noted that the larger the operation parameter, the larger the size of the gap between each character, which is not limited.
步骤20，侦测到定位标识的移动操作时，根据所述移动操作获取所述定位标识的定位位置，获取所述定位位置两侧临近的字符； Step 20, when detecting the movement operation of the positioning mark, obtain the positioning position of the positioning mark according to the moving operation, and obtain characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning position;
步骤30，所述字符以所述预设规则对应的显示方式显示。 Step 30, the characters are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the preset rule.
定位标识用于对显示的各个字符之间的间隙或者任一行字符的两侧边进行定位，进而以通过定位标识定位需要修正的字符的字符间隙后，对需要修正的字符执行修正操作，其中，修正操作包括但不限于删除字符操作以及***字符操作，可选地，定位标识为输入光标。定位标识的定位位置指的是定位标识通过移动操作后所在的所述字符之间的目标间隙。The positioning marks are used to locate the gaps between the displayed characters or the two sides of any line of characters, and then perform a correction operation on the characters to be corrected after positioning the character gaps of the characters to be corrected by the positioning marks, wherein, Correction operations include, but are not limited to, delete character operations and insert character operations. Optionally, the positioning identifier is an input cursor. The positioning position of the positioning mark refers to the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located after the moving operation.
定位标识的移动操作的触发通过与该移动操作对应的触摸操作触发，其中，触摸操作可以是单触摸操作，如滑动操作或者点击操作，也即通过单触摸操作直接确定定位标识的字符之间的目标间隙，方便快捷，如在移动操作为滑动操作时，基于滑动操作的起点对应定位标识当前所在的字符间隙，通过滑动操作的滑动距离以及滑动方向确定定位标识所在字符之间的目标间隙，其中，基于定位标识当前所在的字符间隙，滑动距离越长，定位标识所在字符之间的目标间隙与定位标识当前所在的字符间隙的距离越远，该对应关系可预先进行设置；也可以是多触摸操作，如双击操作或者点击操作与滑动操作的组合操作，通过多触摸操作可分别实现对定位标识的初始位置以及目标位置进行确定，可以理解的是，初始位置与目标位置可以是相同的，此外，采用多触摸操作也可避免误触发操作问题。The triggering of the movement operation of the positioning mark is triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the moving operation, wherein the touch operation may be a single touch operation, such as a sliding operation or a click operation, that is, the single touch operation directly determines the relationship between the characters of the positioning mark. The target gap is convenient and quick. For example, when the moving operation is a sliding operation, the starting point of the sliding operation corresponds to the character gap where the positioning mark is currently located, and the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located is determined by the sliding distance and sliding direction of the sliding operation. , based on the character gap where the positioning mark is currently located, the longer the sliding distance, the farther the distance between the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located and the character gap where the positioning mark is currently located, the corresponding relationship can be set in advance; it can also be multi-touch operation, such as double-click operation or combination of click operation and sliding operation, the initial position and target position of the positioning mark can be determined respectively through multi-touch operation. It can be understood that the initial position and target position can be the same. , the use of multi-touch operation can also avoid the problem of false trigger operation.
需要说明的是，增大字符间隙操作规则或者放大字符操作规则与移动操作的触控区域不同。在实际应用过程中，增大字符间隙操作规则对应的触摸操作与移动操作对应的触摸操作可以是同一类型的触摸操作如滑动操作，也可以不同类型的触摸操作，对此不做限定。在增大字符间隙操作规则对应的触摸操作与移动操作对应的触摸操作为同一类型的触摸操作时，为避免在检测到同一类型的触摸操作而导致增大字符间隙操作规则的触发或者移动操作的触发产生混乱，可通过分别限定增大字符间隙操作规则触发的触控区域以及移动操作触发的触控区域为不同的触控区域，以实现在不同的触控区域以相同的触摸操作分别实现增大字符间隙操作规则以及移动操作。同理，放大字符操作规则对应的触摸操作与移动操作对应的触摸操作在此不再赘述。It should be noted that the operation rule for increasing the character gap or the operation rule for enlarging the character is different from the touch area of the moving operation. In the actual application process, the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap and the touch operation corresponding to the moving operation may be the same type of touch operation, such as a sliding operation, or different types of touch operations, which are not limited. When the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap and the touch operation corresponding to the moving operation are the same type of touch operation, in order to avoid the triggering of the operation rule for increasing the character gap or the moving operation when the same type of touch operation is detected If the triggering is confusing, the touch area triggered by the operation rule for increasing the character gap and the touch area triggered by the moving operation can be defined as different touch areas, so that the same touch operation can be achieved in different touch areas. Large character gap operation rules and move operations. In the same way, the touch operation corresponding to the enlargement character operation rule and the touch operation corresponding to the moving operation are not repeated here.
获取定位标识两侧邻近的字符，可获取定位标识两侧邻近的预设数量的字符，也可将定位标识所在字符的字符行确定为定位标识两侧邻近的字符，字符以预设规则对应的显示方式显示后，可实现对定位标识两侧邻近的字符进行修改，也即进入修改模式。Obtain the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark, obtain a preset number of characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark, or determine the character line of the character where the positioning mark is located as the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark, and the characters correspond to the preset rules. After the display mode is displayed, the characters adjacent to the two sides of the positioning mark can be modified, that is, the modification mode is entered.
可选地，输入法的显示方法还包括：接收到确认指令时，放大或缩小各个字符之间间隙的距离至第二预设输出间距。Optionally, the display method of the input method further includes: when a confirmation instruction is received, enlarging or reducing the distance between the gaps between the characters to a second preset output distance.
需要说明的是，确认指令通过确认按键或者确认触摸操作触发。第二预设输出间距为除了预设规则以外的其它规则对应的显示方式显示字符时的字符间距，如，其他规则为通过输入法正常输出字符时默认的字符输出间距。在实际应用过程中，为避免由于在通过预设规则操作字符时输出的字符之间的间隙过大，或者，字符的大小被放大，在发送通过预设规则操作后的字符，字符占据的显示空间过大或者导致字符不便于阅读，可通过确认指令对通过预设规则操作后的字符进行确认，放大或缩小各个字符之间的间隙距离至第二预设输出间距，以使得字符以预设规则以外的其他规则进行正常显示，便于字符阅读。It should be noted that the confirmation instruction is triggered by a confirmation button or a confirmation touch operation. The second preset output spacing is the character spacing when characters are displayed in display modes corresponding to other rules other than the preset rules, for example, the other rules are the default character output spacing when characters are normally output through the input method. In the actual application process, in order to avoid that the gap between the output characters is too large when the characters are operated by the preset rules, or the size of the characters is enlarged, after the characters that are operated by the preset rules are sent, the characters occupied by the display If the space is too large or the characters are inconvenient to read, you can use the confirmation command to confirm the characters that have passed the preset rules, and enlarge or reduce the gap distance between the characters to the second preset output spacing, so that the characters are in the preset format. The rules other than the rules are displayed normally, which is easy to read the characters.
可选地，步骤30之后，包括：Optionally, after step 30, including:
侦测到所述定位标识的移动操作时，根据所述移动操作获取所述定位标识的定位位置所在的所述字符之间的目标间隙；When detecting the movement operation of the positioning mark, obtain the target gap between the characters where the positioning position of the positioning mark is located according to the moving operation;
将所述定位标识移动至所述目标间隙。Move the positioning marker to the target gap.
在实际应用过程中，基于字符以预设规则对应显示方式显示后，通过定位标识的移动操作可准确重新确定定位标识的定位位置。In the actual application process, after the characters are displayed in the corresponding display mode according to the preset rules, the positioning position of the positioning mark can be accurately re-determined by the moving operation of the positioning mark.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，基于预设规则操作字符，通过针对定位标识的移动标识确定定位标识的定位位置后，以使得定位位置两侧临近的字符以预设规则对应的显示方 式显示，基于字符按照预设规则对应显示方式显示，如增大字符间隙操作规则，以增大各个字符之间的间隙，可便于通过移动操作如手指触摸操作准确实现对字符之间的间隙进行定位，也即通过移动操作确定待修正的字符之间的目标间隙，以实现将定位标识移动至目标间隙对待修正的字符进行后续操作。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, the characters are manipulated based on preset rules, and after the positioning position of the positioning mark is determined by the movement mark of the positioning mark, the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning position are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rules. , based on the corresponding display mode of the characters according to the preset rules, such as increasing the character gap operation rule to increase the gap between each character, it is convenient to accurately locate the gap between the characters by moving operations such as finger touch operations, That is, the target gap between the characters to be corrected is determined through the moving operation, so as to move the positioning mark to the target gap to perform subsequent operations on the characters to be corrected.
基于上述第一实施例提出本申请的输入法的显示方法的第二十实施例，请参考图27，图27为本申请的输入法的显示方法第二十实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，步骤11包括：Based on the above-mentioned first embodiment, a twentieth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is proposed. Please refer to FIG. 27 . FIG. 27 is a schematic flowchart of the twentieth embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application. In the example, step 11 includes:
步骤111，根据所述增大字符间隙操作规则对应的操作参数确定各个所述字符之间的间隙的大小，其中，所述操作参数包括触摸压力值、触摸时长、滑动距离以及触摸面积中的至少一个；Step 111: Determine the size of the gap between each of the characters according to the operation parameter corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, wherein the operation parameter includes at least one of the touch pressure value, the touch duration, the sliding distance and the touch area. One;
步骤112，根据所述间隙的大小增大各个所述字符之间的间隙。Step 112: Increase the gap between each of the characters according to the size of the gap.
需要说明的是，增大字符间隙操作规则的具体实现方式可通过预先设置与增大字符间隙操作规则对应的触摸操作，进而以通过触摸操作触发增大字符间隙操作规则的实现，其中，触摸操作包括但不限于滑动操作、点击操作以及长按操作中的至少一种。可选地，通过增大字符间隙操作规则以使得字符以增大间隙后的形态显示，可通过与该增大字符间隙操作规则对应的操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙大小。其中，操作参数为增大字符间隙操作规则对应的触摸操作的参数，操作参数包括触摸压力值、触摸时长、滑动距离以及触摸面积中的至少一个。It should be noted that, the specific implementation of the operation rule for increasing the character gap can be by presetting a touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, and then triggering the realization of the operation rule for increasing the character gap through the touch operation. Including but not limited to at least one of sliding operation, clicking operation and long pressing operation. Optionally, by increasing the character gap operation rule so that the characters are displayed in the form after increasing the gap, the size of the gap between each character can be determined by the operation parameter corresponding to the character gap increase operation rule. The operation parameter is a parameter of the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, and the operation parameter includes at least one of a touch pressure value, a touch duration, a sliding distance, and a touch area.
对应于与增大字符间隙操作规则对应的触摸操作包括但不限于滑动操作、点击操作以及长按操作中的至少一种，操作参数为增大字符间隙操作规则对应的触摸操作的参数，操作参数包括触摸压力值、触摸时长、滑动距离以及触摸面积中的至少一个。在实际应用过程中，在与增大字符间隙操作规则对应的触摸操作为点击操作或者长按操作时，可通过获取触摸操作也即点击操作或者长按操作的操作参数，如触摸压力值、触摸时长以及触摸面积中的至少一个，以根据操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙的大小；在与增大字符间隙操作规则对应的触摸操作为滑动操作时，可通过获取滑动操作的操作参数，如触摸时长以及滑动距离中的至少一个，以根据操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙的大小。需要说明的是，在操作参数为多个参数，即操作参数包括触摸压力值、触摸时长、滑动距离以及触摸面积中的至少两个时，可通过对各个参数进行加权计算得到目标操作参数，以根据目标操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙的大小。The touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap includes but not limited to at least one of a sliding operation, a click operation and a long-press operation, and the operation parameter is the parameter of the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, and the operation parameter Including at least one of touch pressure value, touch duration, sliding distance, and touch area. In the actual application process, when the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap is a click operation or a long press operation, the operation parameters of the touch operation, that is, the click operation or the long press operation, such as touch pressure value, touch At least one of the duration and the touch area to determine the size of the gap between each character according to the operation parameters; when the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap is a sliding operation, the operation parameters of the sliding operation can be obtained by, such as At least one of the touch duration and the sliding distance is used to determine the size of the gap between each character according to the operation parameter. It should be noted that when the operation parameters are multiple parameters, that is, the operation parameters include at least two of the touch pressure value, the touch duration, the sliding distance, and the touch area, the target operation parameters can be obtained by weighting each parameter to obtain the target operation parameters. The size of the gap between each character is determined according to the target operation parameter.
根据操作参数或者目标操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙的大小，进而根据确定的各个字符之间的间隙大小增大各个字符之间的间隙，也即，各个字符以确定的各个字符之间的间隙进行间隔显示。其中，根据操作参数或者目标操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙的大小，可预先设置操作参数或者目标操作参数与字符之间的间隙的大小的对应关系，该对应关系可以是操作参数越大或者目标操作参数越大，各个字符之间的间隙的越大，对此不做限定。对应于操作参数包括触摸压力值、触摸时长、滑动距离以及触摸面积中的至少一个，具体包括但不限于以下实现方式：The size of the gap between each character is determined according to the operation parameter or the target operation parameter, and then the gap between each character is increased according to the determined size of the gap between each character, that is, the determined gap between each character The gap is displayed at intervals. Wherein, the size of the gap between each character is determined according to the operating parameter or the target operating parameter, and the corresponding relationship between the operating parameter or the target operating parameter and the size of the gap between the characters can be preset, and the corresponding relationship can be that the larger the operating parameter or the The larger the target operation parameter, the larger the gap between each character, which is not limited. The corresponding operation parameters include at least one of touch pressure value, touch duration, sliding distance, and touch area, specifically including but not limited to the following implementations:
具体实现方式一，在操作参数为触摸压力值时，获取得到的触摸压力值越大，各个字符之间的间隙越大，其中，可预先设置触摸压力值范围与字符之间的间隙大小的对应关系，以在获取触摸压力值时，通过比对触摸压力值所在预设的触摸压力值范围确定字符之间的间隙大小。此外，获取触摸操作的触摸压力值可通过设置于终端设备的压力传感器获取得到；Specific implementation mode 1: when the operation parameter is the touch pressure value, the larger the acquired touch pressure value, the larger the gap between each character, wherein the correspondence between the touch pressure value range and the gap size between the characters can be preset. relationship, so that when acquiring the touch pressure value, the size of the gap between characters is determined by comparing the preset touch pressure value range where the touch pressure value is located. In addition, obtaining the touch pressure value of the touch operation can be obtained through the pressure sensor provided on the terminal device;
具体实现方式二，在操作参数为触摸时长时，获取得到的触摸时长越长，各个字符之间的间隙越大，其中，可预先设置触摸时长范围与字符之间的间隙大小的对应关系，以在获取触摸时长时，通过比对触摸时长所在预设的触摸时长范围确定各个字符之间的间隙大小。此外，获取触摸操作的触摸时长可通过设置于终端设备的计时装置获取得到； Specific implementation mode 2, when the operation parameter is the touch duration, the longer the acquired touch duration is, the larger the gap between each character is. The correspondence between the touch duration range and the gap size between the characters can be preset to When acquiring the touch duration, the size of the gap between each character is determined by comparing the preset touch duration range in which the touch duration is located. In addition, obtaining the touch duration of the touch operation can be obtained through the timing device provided in the terminal device;
具体实现方式三，在操作参数为滑动距离时，获取得到的滑动距离越大，各个字符之 间的间隙越大，通过滑动距离确定各个字符之间的间隙大小于上述操作参数为触摸压力值或者触摸时长的具体实现原理相似，在此不再赘述，其中，滑动距离的确定可通过获取滑动操作的初始位置以及终止位置的坐标位置信息确定；Specific implementation mode 3: when the operation parameter is the sliding distance, the larger the obtained sliding distance, the larger the gap between each character, and the size of the gap between each character determined by the sliding distance is smaller than the above-mentioned operation parameter is the touch pressure value or The specific implementation principle of the touch duration is similar, and will not be repeated here. The determination of the sliding distance can be determined by obtaining the coordinate position information of the initial position and the termination position of the sliding operation;
具体实现方式四，在操作参数为触摸面积时，通过获取得到的触摸面积确定各个字符之间的最小间隙，进而可设置各个字符之间的间隙为大于或者等于最小间隙，以避免各个字符之间的间隙太小，导致定位不准确，其中，触摸面积可通过获取手指与触控区域在接触过程中任一时间点的接触面积确定；Specific implementation mode 4: When the operation parameter is the touch area, the obtained touch area is used to determine the minimum gap between the characters, and then the gap between the characters can be set to be greater than or equal to the minimum gap to avoid the gap between the characters. The gap between the fingers is too small, resulting in inaccurate positioning. The touch area can be determined by obtaining the contact area between the finger and the touch area at any point in the contact process;
具体实现方式五，在操作参数为触摸压力值、触摸时长、滑动距离以及触摸面积中的至少两个，可预先对多个操作参数中各个参数设定权值，对多个操作参数进行加权计算得到目标操作参数，进而通过目标操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙的大小，其中，通过对多个操作参数加权综合得到目标操作参数，可更加准确确定各个字符之间的间隙大小。Specific implementation mode 5: When the operation parameters are at least two of the touch pressure value, the touch duration, the sliding distance and the touch area, weights can be set for each parameter of the multiple operation parameters in advance, and the weighted calculation is performed on the multiple operation parameters. The target operation parameters are obtained, and the size of the gap between each character is determined by the target operation parameter, wherein the size of the gap between each character can be determined more accurately by obtaining the target operation parameter by weighting and synthesizing multiple operation parameters.
可选地，增大字符间隙操作规则为第一滑动操作，字符以增大间隙后的形态显示的步骤包括：获取第一滑动操作对应的滑动区域；增大滑动区域的各个字符之间的间隙。Optionally, the operation rule for increasing the character gap is a first sliding operation, and the steps of displaying the characters in the form of the increased gap include: acquiring a sliding area corresponding to the first sliding operation; increasing the gap between each character in the sliding area. .
对应于第一区域为显示在终端设备的触摸屏上的输入框区域，其中，字符的显示位置位于输入框区域内。在第一区域检测到第一滑动操作，也即以增大字符间隙操作规则操作显示于输入框区域内的字符时，可获取第一滑动操作对应的滑动区域，通过滑动区域确定输入框区域内需要增大字符间隙的字符所在区域，可选地，滑动区域可以是输入框区域内的所有字符所在区域，也可以是输入框区域内的部分字符所在区域，对此不做限定。需要说明的是，第一滑动操作对应的滑动区域的获取可通过第一滑动操作的初始位置以及终止位置确定，如通过初始位置的坐标位置信息以及终止位置的坐标位置信息具体确定，将位于该滑动区域内的字符作为增大字符间隙的目标字符。Corresponding to the first area is an input frame area displayed on the touch screen of the terminal device, wherein the display position of the character is located in the input frame area. When the first sliding operation is detected in the first area, that is, the characters displayed in the input box area are operated by increasing the character gap operation rule, the sliding area corresponding to the first sliding operation can be obtained, and the input box area can be determined by the sliding area. The area where the characters need to increase the character gap, optionally, the sliding area may be the area where all the characters in the input box area are located, or the area where some characters are located in the input box area, which is not limited. It should be noted that the acquisition of the sliding area corresponding to the first sliding operation can be determined by the initial position and the ending position of the first sliding operation. The characters in the sliding area are used as target characters to increase the character gap.
增大滑动区域的各个字符之间的间隙可通过与该增大字符间隙操作规则对应的第一滑动操作的操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙大小，其中，操作参数包括但不限于滑动距离以及触摸面积中的至少一个，需要说明的是，操作参数越大，各个字符之间的间隙大小越大。To increase the gap between each character in the sliding area, the size of the gap between each character can be determined by the operation parameter of the first sliding operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, wherein the operation parameter includes but is not limited to the sliding distance and For at least one of the touch areas, it should be noted that the larger the operation parameter, the larger the size of the gap between each character.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，通过增大字符间隙操作规则对应的操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙的大小，也即获取与该增大字符间隙操作规则所对应的触摸操作的操作参数，如触摸压力值、触摸时长、滑动距离以及触摸面积中至少一个，进而通过操作参数动态增大各个字符之间的间隙，操作简单且快捷，且通过增大间隙后显示的各个字符通过定位标识可更加准确实现对字符之间的目标间隙进行定位，此外，无需增加额外辅助工具如鼠标或者触控笔，降低成本。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, the size of the gap between each character is determined by the operation parameter corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap, that is, the operation parameter of the touch operation corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap is obtained. , such as at least one of touch pressure value, touch duration, sliding distance and touch area, and then dynamically increase the gap between each character through operation parameters, the operation is simple and fast, and each character displayed by increasing the gap passes through the positioning mark. Target gaps between characters can be positioned more accurately, and additional auxiliary tools such as a mouse or a stylus are not required, reducing costs.
基于上述任意一个实施例提出本申请的输入法的显示方法的第二十一实施例，请参考图28，图28为本申请的输入法的显示方法第二十一实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，所述移动操作为第二滑动操作，步骤20中根据所述移动操作获取所述定位标识的定位位置所在的所述字符之间的目标间隙的步骤包括：Based on any one of the above embodiments, a twenty-first embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is proposed. Please refer to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-first embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application. In this embodiment, the moving operation is a second sliding operation, and the step of acquiring the target gap between the characters where the positioning position of the positioning mark is located according to the moving operation in step 20 includes:
步骤21，获取所述第二滑动操作的滑动方向和/或滑动轨迹；Step 21, acquiring the sliding direction and/or the sliding trajectory of the second sliding operation;
步骤22，根据所述定位标识的位置、所述滑动方向以及所述滑动轨迹中的至少一项确定所述定位标识所在的所述字符之间的所述目标间隙。Step 22: Determine the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located according to at least one of the position of the positioning mark, the sliding direction, and the sliding track.
需要说明的是，第二滑动操作的滑动轨迹可以理解为滑动距离。获取第二滑动操作的滑动距离可通过获取第二滑动操作的初始位置以及终止位置的坐标位置信息确定。根据定位标识的位置、滑动方向以及滑动轨迹确定定位标识所在字符之间的目标间隙，也即，基于定位标识所在字符之间的间隙，通过第二滑动操作的滑动方向以确定定位标识移动的方向，通过第二滑动操作的滑动距离以确定在确定的移动方向上定位标识移动的距离，以确定定位标识通过第二滑动操作确定的字符的目标间隙。其中，通过第二滑动操作的滑动距离以确定在确定的移动方向上定位标识移动的距离，以确定定位标识通过第二滑动操作确定的字符的目标间隙，可预先设置滑动距离与字符大小以及字符之间的间隙大小的对应关 系，如将两字符所占长度的一半作为移动的单位值，以确保通过滑动距离确定定位标识所在位置，均可以位于字符之间的间隙，还可以是将字符的大小作为滑动距离的有效滑动距离，将字符的大小作为滑动单位值，以保证通过滑动距离确定定位标识所在位置，均可以位于字符之间的间隙，对此不做限定。It should be noted that the sliding track of the second sliding operation can be understood as the sliding distance. Obtaining the sliding distance of the second sliding operation may be determined by obtaining the coordinate position information of the initial position and the ending position of the second sliding operation. The target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located is determined according to the position of the positioning mark, the sliding direction and the sliding track, that is, based on the gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located, the sliding direction of the second sliding operation is used to determine the moving direction of the positioning mark , and determine the distance that the positioning mark moves in the determined moving direction through the sliding distance of the second sliding operation, so as to determine the target gap of the character determined by the positioning mark through the second sliding operation. Wherein, the sliding distance of the second sliding operation is used to determine the distance that the positioning mark moves in the determined moving direction, so as to determine the target gap of the character determined by the positioning mark through the second sliding operation, and the sliding distance and the size of the characters and the character The corresponding relationship between the gap sizes, such as taking half of the length of the two characters as the unit value of the movement, to ensure that the location of the positioning mark is determined by the sliding distance. The size is used as the effective sliding distance of the sliding distance, and the size of the character is used as the sliding unit value to ensure that the location of the positioning mark determined by the sliding distance can be located in the gap between the characters, which is not limited.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，确定移动操作为第二滑动操作，基于定位标识所在的字符之间的间隙，通过第二滑动操作的滑动方向以确定定位标识移动的方向，通过第二滑动操作的滑动距离以确定在确定的移动方向上定位标识移动的距离，以确定定位标识通过第二滑动操作确定的字符的目标间隙，操作简单且便捷，可快速且准确确定定位标识的目标间隙，以对目标间隙两侧的字符进行操作。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, the moving operation is determined to be the second sliding operation, and based on the gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located, the sliding direction of the second sliding operation is used to determine the moving direction of the positioning mark, and the second sliding operation is used to determine the moving direction of the positioning mark. The sliding distance of the operation determines the distance that the positioning mark moves in the determined moving direction, so as to determine the target gap of the character determined by the positioning mark through the second sliding operation, the operation is simple and convenient, and the target gap of the positioning mark can be quickly and accurately determined, to operate on characters on either side of the target gap.
基于上述任意一个实施例提出本申请的输入法的显示方法的第二十二实施例，请参考图29，图29为本申请的输入法的显示方法第二十二实施例的流程示意图，在该实施例中，步骤30之后，包括：Based on any of the above-mentioned embodiments, a twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application is proposed. Please refer to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic flowchart of the twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the present application. In this embodiment, after step 30, it includes:
步骤40，在第二区域中检测到第三滑动操作时，根据所述第三滑动操作确定字符修正类型，其中，所述字符修正类型包括删除字符以及恢复字符中的至少一种； Step 40, when a third sliding operation is detected in the second area, determine a character correction type according to the third sliding operation, wherein the character correction type includes at least one of deleting characters and restoring characters;
步骤50，根据所述字符修正类型以及所述第三滑动操作修正待修正的字符。Step 50: Correct the character to be corrected according to the character correction type and the third sliding operation.
可选地，根据所述字符修正类型以及所述第三滑动操作对应的滑动轨迹或滑动方向或滑动距离中的至少一项修正待修正的字符。Optionally, the character to be corrected is corrected according to the character correction type and at least one of the sliding track or the sliding direction or the sliding distance corresponding to the third sliding operation.
检测到第三滑动操作，可在检测到触摸操作时，获取触摸操作的触摸参数，通过判断触摸参数是否与第三滑动操作对应的触摸参数匹配，在触摸参数与第三滑动操作对应的触摸参数匹配时，则可确定检测到第三滑动操作。其中，第三滑动操作对应的触摸参数包括但不限于预设滑动距离、滑动速度以及滑动方向，需要说明的是，可提前设置第三滑动操作与触控参数的对应关系，该对应关系可在终端设备生产过程中设置，也可由用户根据自己的操作习惯自行设置，对此不做限定。When the third sliding operation is detected, the touch parameters of the touch operation can be obtained when the touch operation is detected, and by judging whether the touch parameters match the touch parameters corresponding to the third sliding operation, the touch parameters corresponding to the third sliding operation When matching, it can be determined that a third sliding operation is detected. The touch parameters corresponding to the third sliding operation include but are not limited to the preset sliding distance, sliding speed and sliding direction. It should be noted that the corresponding relationship between the third sliding operation and the touch parameters can be set in advance, and the corresponding relationship can be found in It can be set during the production process of the terminal equipment, and can also be set by the user according to his own operating habits, which is not limited.
可选地，第二区域为终端设备的触控区域，其中触控区域包括触摸屏、设备后壳以及设备侧边。可选地，第二区域为显示于终端设备的触摸屏上的输入软键盘区域所在区域，其中，在第二区域为输入软键盘区域时，可预先在输入软键盘上层增设透明控制面板，进而以实现在不隐藏输入软键盘的基础上，通过在透明控制面板检测到的第三滑动操作对第一区域中待修正的字符如文字、数字以及标点符号等进行修正，需要说明的是，可预先设置将在第二区域上的第三滑动操作的操作对象与第一区域中显示的所有字符进行关联，在确定定位标识所在的目标间隙的基础上，以使得在第二区域上检测到第三滑动区域可基于定位标识对第一区域显示的字符进行修正，对此不做限定。Optionally, the second area is a touch area of the terminal device, where the touch area includes a touch screen, a back case of the device, and a side of the device. Optionally, the second area is the area where the input soft keyboard area is displayed on the touch screen of the terminal device, wherein, when the second area is the input soft keyboard area, a transparent control panel can be added on the upper layer of the input soft keyboard in advance, and then On the basis of not hiding the input soft keyboard, the characters to be corrected in the first area, such as letters, numbers and punctuation marks, can be corrected through the third sliding operation detected on the transparent control panel. It is set to associate the operation object of the third sliding operation on the second area with all characters displayed in the first area, and on the basis of determining the target gap where the positioning mark is located, so that the third area is detected on the second area. The sliding area may modify the characters displayed in the first area based on the positioning identifier, which is not limited.
根据第三滑动操作确定字符修正类型，可根据第三滑动操作的滑动方向确定字符修正类型，对应于字符修正类型包括删除字符以及恢复字符中的至少一种，在第三滑动操作的滑动方向满足第一方向时，确定字符修正类型为删除字符；在第三滑动操作的滑动方向满足第二方向时，确定字符修正类型为恢复字符。可选地，第一方向与第二方向的方向相反；也可根据第三滑动操作对应的滑动方向以及定位标识所在的位置确定字符修正类型，可选地，滑动方向与定位标识所在位置向左滑动的方向相同时，确定字符修正类型为删除字符，和/或，滑动方向与定位标识所在位置向右滑动的方向相同时，确定输入修正类型为恢复字符，对此不做限定。举例来说，当用户需要删除第一区域内字符时，向左滑动触发删除操作，并通过向左滑动的滑动轨迹也即滑动距离来确定需要删除的字符数量；当用户需要恢复被删除字符内容时，向右滑动触发恢复操作，并通过向右滑动的滑动距离来确定需要恢复的字符数量。The character correction type is determined according to the third sliding operation, and the character correction type can be determined according to the sliding direction of the third sliding operation. Correspondingly, the character correction type includes at least one of deleting characters and restoring characters, and the sliding direction of the third sliding operation satisfies In the first direction, the character correction type is determined to be a deleted character; when the sliding direction of the third sliding operation satisfies the second direction, the character correction type is determined to be a recovery character. Optionally, the first direction is opposite to the direction of the second direction; the character correction type can also be determined according to the sliding direction corresponding to the third sliding operation and the position of the positioning mark, optionally, the sliding direction and the position of the positioning mark are to the left. When the sliding direction is the same, the character correction type is determined to be a deleted character, and/or when the sliding direction is the same as the rightward sliding direction at the location of the positioning mark, the input correction type is determined to be a recovery character, which is not limited. For example, when the user needs to delete characters in the first area, swipe to the left to trigger the deletion operation, and determine the number of characters to be deleted through the sliding trajectory of the sliding to the left, that is, the sliding distance; when the user needs to restore the content of the deleted characters , swipe to the right to trigger the recovery operation, and determine the number of characters to be recovered by the sliding distance of the swipe to the right.
根据字符修正类型以及第三滑动操作修正待修正的字符，在根据第三滑动操作确定字符修正类型的基础上，通过第三滑动操作对应的滑动轨迹或滑动距离修正待修正的字符。其中，通过第三滑动操作对应的滑动轨迹或滑动距离修正待修正的字符，实质上是通过滑动距离确定待修正字符的数量，可通过预先设置修正一字符与滑动距离的对应关系，滑动 距离越长，对应可修正的字符数量越多；也可通过滑动距离与预设长度的比值确定，进而根据比值确定定位标识所在行对应的待修正字符的数量，具体地，举例来说，滑动距离达到20％，删除当前行20％的字符或者恢复已删除的20％的字符内容。其中，预设长度可以是获取定位标识所在行的待修正的字符长度，也可以是终端设备的显示屏的长或者宽的长度，容易理解的是，在预设长度为终端设备的显示屏的长或者宽的长度时，可根据终端设备的显示状态进一步确定，其中，终端设备的显示状态包括横屏显示或者竖屏显示，例如，在终端设备的显示状态为竖屏显示时，预设长度为终端设备的宽的长度，对此不做限定。需要说明的是，第三滑动操作的滑动轨迹或滑动距离的确定可通过获取第三滑动操作的初始位置以及终止位置进行确定，如通过获取初始位置的初坐标信息以及终止位置的终坐标信息确定，在此不做限定。The characters to be corrected are corrected according to the character correction type and the third sliding operation, and the characters to be corrected are corrected by the sliding track or sliding distance corresponding to the third sliding operation on the basis of determining the character correction type according to the third sliding operation. The correction of the characters to be corrected by the sliding track or the sliding distance corresponding to the third sliding operation is essentially to determine the number of the characters to be corrected by the sliding distance, and the corresponding relationship between a character and the sliding distance can be corrected by preset, and the longer the sliding distance is longer, the more characters that can be corrected; it can also be determined by the ratio of the sliding distance to the preset length, and then the number of characters to be corrected corresponding to the row where the positioning mark is located is determined according to the ratio. Specifically, for example, the sliding distance reaches 20%, delete 20% of the characters in the current line or restore the content of the deleted 20% of the characters. The preset length may be the length of the character to be corrected in the row where the positioning identification is obtained, or may be the length or width of the display screen of the terminal device. It is easy to understand that the preset length is the length of the display screen of the terminal device. The length or width can be further determined according to the display state of the terminal device, wherein the display state of the terminal device includes horizontal screen display or vertical screen display. For example, when the display state of the terminal device is vertical screen display, the preset length It is the width and length of the terminal device, which is not limited. It should be noted that the determination of the sliding trajectory or the sliding distance of the third sliding operation can be determined by obtaining the initial position and the ending position of the third sliding operation, for example, by obtaining the initial coordinate information of the initial position and the final coordinate information of the ending position. , which is not limited here.
进一步地，字符修正类型包括删除字符以及恢复字符中的至少一种，其中，基于待修正的字符之间间隙所确定的定位标识也即对待修正的字符进行定位，字符修正类型为删除字符，通过第三滑动操作可对待修正的字符进行删除操作，相对应的，字符修正类型为恢复字符，通过第三滑动操作从已进行了删除操作的字符进行恢复操作。举例来说，待修正的字符为“我们一起去看海以及|晒太阳”，其中，“|”为定位标识，字符修正类型为删除字符，且第三滑动操作的滑动方向向左为对待修正的字符进行删除操作时，在检测到第三滑动操作的滑动方向向左时，待修正的字符可从“我们一起去看海以及|晒太阳”变换至“我们一起|晒太阳”，请参考图30，图30为本申请的输入法的显示方法第二十二实施例中字符修正类型为删除字符的示意图，其中，P1为向左滑动操作；字符修正类型为恢复字符，且第三滑动操作的滑动方向向右为从已进行了删除操作的字符如“去看海以及”进行恢复操作，在检测到第三滑动操作的滑动方向向右时，“我们一起|晒太阳”变换至“我们一起去|晒太阳”，请参考图31，图31为本申请的输入法的显示方法第二十二实施例中字符修正类型为恢复字符的示意图，其中，P2为向右滑动操作。其中，第三滑动操作的滑动距离可用于确定删除字符的数量。Further, the character correction type includes at least one of deleting the character and restoring the character, wherein, the positioning mark determined based on the gap between the characters to be corrected is the character to be corrected, and the character correction type is to delete the character, by The third sliding operation can perform a deletion operation on the character to be corrected. Correspondingly, the character correction type is recovery character, and the recovery operation is performed from the character that has been deleted through the third sliding operation. For example, the character to be corrected is "Let's go to see the sea and |bathing in the sun", where "|" is the positioning mark, the character correction type is the delete character, and the sliding direction of the third sliding operation is leftward for the correction to be corrected. When deleting the characters of , when it is detected that the sliding direction of the third sliding operation is to the left, the characters to be corrected can be changed from "Let's go to see the sea and | Sunbathing together" to "Let's go together | Sunbathing", please refer to Figure 30, Figure 30 is a schematic diagram of the character correction type in the twenty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method of the application being a deletion character, wherein P1 is a leftward sliding operation; the character correction type is a recovery character, and the third sliding The sliding direction of the operation is to the right for the recovery operation from the characters that have been deleted, such as "Go to see the sea and". When the sliding direction of the third sliding operation is detected to the right, "Let's go together | Sunbathing" changes to " Let’s go | Sunbathing”, please refer to FIG. 31 , which is a schematic diagram showing that the character correction type is recovery characters in the twenty-second embodiment of the input method display method of the present application, wherein P2 is a rightward sliding operation. Wherein, the sliding distance of the third sliding operation can be used to determine the number of deleted characters.
在实际应用过程中，在字符数量较多且待删除的字符较多时，通过删除按键一一进行删除，费时费力。在字符修正类型为删除字符时，步骤50包括：根据第三滑动操作确定待修正的字符；根据字符修正类型修正字符。如，根据第三滑动操作对应的滑动距离确定待删除的字符，从所有字符中删除已确定的待删除的字符。In the actual application process, when the number of characters is large and there are many characters to be deleted, it is time-consuming and labor-intensive to delete one by one by pressing the delete button. When the character correction type is to delete a character, step 50 includes: determining the character to be corrected according to the third sliding operation; and correcting the character according to the character correction type. For example, the character to be deleted is determined according to the sliding distance corresponding to the third sliding operation, and the determined character to be deleted is deleted from all characters.
此外，为避免字符修正类型为删除字符时，采用第三滑动操作时滑动距离过大，导致误删除字符而难以恢复字符，字符修正类型为恢复字符时，步骤50包括：根据第三滑动操作从预存已删除的字符中确定待修正的字符；根据字符修正类型修正字符。如，根据第三滑动操作对应的滑动距离从已删除的字符中确定待恢复的字符，恢复待恢复的字符。In addition, in order to avoid that when the character correction type is to delete characters, the sliding distance is too large when the third sliding operation is adopted, resulting in accidental deletion of characters and difficulty in recovering the characters. When the character correction type is recovery characters, step 50 includes: according to the third sliding operation from The characters to be corrected are determined from the pre-stored deleted characters; the characters are corrected according to the character correction type. For example, the character to be restored is determined from the deleted characters according to the sliding distance corresponding to the third sliding operation, and the character to be restored is restored.
需要说明的是，字符修正类型为恢复字符所执行的步骤可在字符修正类型为删除字符所执行的步骤之后进行，在字符修正类型为删除字符所执行的步骤之后，可保存已删除的字符或者更新预设存储位置上存储的已删除的字符。It should be noted that the steps performed for the character correction type to restore characters can be performed after the steps performed for the character correction type to delete characters, and after the steps performed for the character correction type to delete characters, the deleted characters can be saved or Updates deleted characters stored in preset storage locations.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，基于将定位标识移动至待修正字符之间的目标间隙，通过第二区域检测到的第三滑动操作确定字符修正类型，在字符修正类型为删除字符时，可基于该目标间隙直接通过第三滑动操作执行删除字符的操作，简单便捷且删除速度快；在字符修正类型为恢复字符时，可基于目标间隙将已删除的字符通过第三滑动操作执行恢复字符的操作，也即将删除的字符输出至目标间隙对应的字符间隙的位置，以快速找回删除的字符避免误删除问题。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, based on moving the positioning mark to the target gap between the characters to be corrected, the character correction type is determined by the third sliding operation detected in the second area, and when the character correction type is the deletion character, The operation of deleting characters can be performed directly through the third sliding operation based on the target gap, which is simple, convenient and fast; when the character correction type is recovery characters, the deleted characters can be recovered through the third sliding operation based on the target gap. The operation is to output the deleted characters to the position of the character gap corresponding to the target gap, so as to quickly retrieve the deleted characters and avoid the problem of accidental deletion.
本申请还提供一种输入法的显示方法，在该实施例中，输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：The present application also provides a method for displaying an input method. In this embodiment, the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
于终端设备输入一预设操作模式；inputting a preset operation mode in the terminal device;
预设操作模式包括以下至少一种，使用模式、终端设备的显示模式以及操作者模式。其中，使用模式如左手模式和/或右手模式，终端设备的显示模式如横屏显示和/或竖屏显 示，操作者模式如小孩模式和/或老人模式。The preset operation mode includes at least one of the following: a use mode, a display mode of the terminal device, and an operator mode. Wherein, the usage mode is such as left-hand mode and/or right-hand mode, the display mode of the terminal device is such as landscape display and/or portrait display, and the operator mode is such as child mode and/or elderly mode.
于终端设备输入一预设操作模式可通过操作模式的设置界面预先设置的操作模式确定，也可基于终端设备的检测装置如通过陀螺仪确定终端设备的显示模式；或者，通过指纹采集装置采集用户的指纹信息，比对获取到的指纹信息与预存的指纹信息，以根据比对结果确定当前的使用模式如左手模式和/或右手模式，其中，预存的指纹信息包括左手的指纹信息以及右手的指纹信息；或者，通过终端设备的摄像头拍摄用户以人脸识别用户，以确定当前的操作者模式是小孩模式或者老人模式，本实施例对此不做限定。Inputting a preset operation mode into the terminal device can be determined by the operation mode preset in the setting interface of the operation mode, or the display mode of the terminal device can be determined based on the detection device of the terminal device, such as through a gyroscope; The fingerprint information obtained is compared with the pre-stored fingerprint information to determine the current usage mode such as the left-hand mode and/or the right-hand mode according to the comparison result, wherein the pre-stored fingerprint information includes the left-hand fingerprint information and the right-hand fingerprint information. fingerprint information; or, the user is photographed by the camera of the terminal device to identify the user with a face, so as to determine whether the current operator mode is the child mode or the elderly mode, which is not limited in this embodiment.
于所述第一区域输入字符；input characters in the first area;
第一区域为显示在终端设备的触摸屏上的输入框区域，于第一区域输入字符，字符包括但不限于文字、数字、字母、图片、标点符号以及表情中至少一种。The first area is an input box area displayed on the touch screen of the terminal device, and characters are input in the first area, and the characters include but are not limited to at least one of characters, numbers, letters, pictures, punctuation marks and expressions.
获取所述预设操作模式对应的预设规则；obtaining a preset rule corresponding to the preset operation mode;
所述字符以所述预设规则对应的显示方式显示于所述终端设备。The characters are displayed on the terminal device in a display manner corresponding to the preset rule.
需要说明的是，预设操作模式对应的预设规则包括增大或缩小字符间隙操作规则以及增大或缩小字符操作规则中的至少一种。预设操作模式与预设规则的对应关系可预先进行设置，在预设规则为增大字符间隙操作规则时，字符以预设规则对应的显示方式显示，也即各个字符之间的间距大于未以预设规则也即除了预设规则以外的规则操作字符的间隙显示；在预设规则为放大字符操作规则时，字符以预设规则对应的显示方式显示，也即各个字符的大小以大于未以预设规则也即除了预设规则以外的规则对应的显示方式显示字符。举例来说，对应于操作者模式如小孩模式和/或老人模式，可将预设规则设置为增大字符间隙操作规则，还可显示方式设置为增大字符间隙操作规则的同时增大字符操作规则，对此不做限定。It should be noted that the preset rule corresponding to the preset operation mode includes at least one of an operation rule for increasing or reducing a character gap and an operation rule for increasing or reducing a character. The corresponding relationship between the preset operation mode and the preset rule can be set in advance. When the preset rule is the operation rule for increasing the character gap, the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rule, that is, the spacing between each character is greater than that of the preset rule. The preset rules, that is, the rules other than the preset rules, are used to display the gap between the operation characters; when the preset rule is the operation rule for enlarged characters, the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rules, that is, the size of each character is larger than the size of the characters. The characters are displayed in a display manner corresponding to the preset rules, that is, rules other than the preset rules. For example, corresponding to the operator mode such as the child mode and/or the elderly mode, the preset rule can be set to increase the character gap operation rule, and the display mode can also be set to increase the character gap operation rule while increasing the character operation rule. rules, there are no restrictions on this.
需要说明的是，增大字符间隙操作规则，也即增大字符之间的间距显示可以是按照预设间距增大字符之间的间距，也可以是根据增大字符间隙操作规则对应的操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙大小，根据已确定的间隙大小增大各个字符之间的间隙，具体可参考第二实施例，本实施例对此不再赘述。同理的，增大字符操作规则，也即增大字符的大小，可以是按照预设字符放大参数增大字符的大小，也可以是根据增大字符操作规则对应的操作参数确定各个字符的放大参数，根据已确定的放大参数增大字符大小，具体实现与第二实施例中根据增大字符间隙操作规则对应的操作参数确定各个字符之间的间隙大小的原理相同，本实施例对此不再赘述。It should be noted that the operation rule for increasing the character gap, that is, increasing the spacing between characters, may be displayed by increasing the spacing between characters according to a preset spacing, or it may be an operation parameter corresponding to the operating rule increasing the character gap. The size of the gap between each character is determined, and the gap between each character is increased according to the determined size of the gap. For details, reference may be made to the second embodiment, which will not be repeated in this embodiment. Similarly, increasing the character operation rule, that is, increasing the size of the character, may be to increase the size of the character according to the preset character enlargement parameter, or to determine the enlargement of each character according to the operation parameter corresponding to the operation rule of the enlarged character. parameter, increase the character size according to the determined enlargement parameter, the specific implementation is the same as the principle of determining the size of the gap between each character according to the operation parameter corresponding to the operation rule for increasing the character gap in the second embodiment, this embodiment does not Repeat.
可选地，所述字符以所述预设规则对应的显示方式显示，对应于预设规则包括增大或缩小字符间隙操作规则以及增大或缩小字符操作规则中的至少一种，其中，显示方式包括第一显示方式即增大字符之间的间距显示以及第二显示方式即增大字符的大小显示中的至少一种。需要说明的是，在字符以预设规则对应的第一显示方式显示时，各个所述字符之间的间距大于未以预设规则操作的字符间隙；或者，在字符以预设规则对应的第二显示方式显示时，各个字符的大小大于未以未以预设操作模式显示的字符大小。Optionally, the character is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the preset rule, and the preset rule includes at least one of an operation rule for increasing or reducing a character gap and an operation rule for increasing or reducing a character, wherein the display The mode includes at least one of the first display mode, namely, increasing the spacing between characters, and the second display mode, namely, increasing the size of the characters. It should be noted that, when the characters are displayed in the first display mode corresponding to the preset rules, the spacing between each of the characters is larger than the character gaps that are not operated according to the preset rules; or, when the characters are displayed in the first display mode corresponding to the preset rules When displayed in the second display mode, the size of each character is larger than the size of the characters not displayed in the preset operation mode.
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述字符以预设规则对应的显示方式显示，侦测到定位标识的移动操作时，根据所述移动操作获取所述定位标识的定位位置所在的所述字符之间的目标间隙，所述定位标识移动至目标间隙，获取所述定位标识两侧临近的字符，临近两侧的字符处于修改模式。As an optional implementation manner, the characters are displayed in a display mode corresponding to a preset rule, and when a movement operation of the positioning mark is detected, the character where the positioning position of the positioning mark is located is obtained according to the moving operation The target gap between the positioning marks is moved to the target gap, and the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark are acquired, and the characters on the adjacent sides are in the modification mode.
需要说明的是，定位标识用于对显示的各个字符之间的间隙或者任一行字符的两侧边进行定位，进而以通过定位标识定位需要修正的字符的字符间隙后，对需要修正的字符执行修正操作，其中，修正操作包括但不限于删除字符操作以及***字符操作，可选地，定位标识为输入光标。It should be noted that the positioning marks are used to locate the gaps between the displayed characters or the two sides of any line of characters, and then use the positioning marks to locate the character gaps of the characters that need to be corrected, and then execute the execution on the characters that need to be corrected. Correction operation, wherein the correction operation includes but is not limited to the operation of deleting characters and the operation of inserting characters. Optionally, the positioning identifier is an input cursor.
定位标识的移动操作的触发通过与该移动操作对应的触摸操作触发，其中，触摸操作可以是单触摸操作，如滑动操作或者点击操作，也即通过单触摸操作直接确定定位标识的字符之间的目标间隙，方便快捷，如在移动操作为滑动操作时，基于滑动操作的起点对应 定位标识当前所在的字符间隙，通过滑动操作的滑动距离以及滑动方向确定定位标识所在字符之间的目标间隙，其中，基于定位标识当前所在的字符间隙，滑动距离越长，定位标识所在字符之间的目标间隙与定位标识当前所在的字符间隙的距离越远，该对应关系可预先进行设置；也可以是多触摸操作，如双击操作或者点击操作与滑动操作的组合操作，通过多触摸操作可分别实现对定位标识的初始位置以及目标位置进行确定，可以理解的是，初始位置与目标位置可以是相同的，此外，采用多触摸操作可避免误触发操作问题。The triggering of the movement operation of the positioning mark is triggered by a touch operation corresponding to the moving operation, wherein the touch operation may be a single touch operation, such as a sliding operation or a click operation, that is, the single touch operation directly determines the relationship between the characters of the positioning mark. The target gap is convenient and quick. For example, when the moving operation is a sliding operation, the starting point of the sliding operation corresponds to the character gap where the positioning mark is currently located, and the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located is determined by the sliding distance and sliding direction of the sliding operation. , based on the character gap where the positioning mark is currently located, the longer the sliding distance, the farther the distance between the target gap between the characters where the positioning mark is located and the character gap where the positioning mark is currently located, the corresponding relationship can be set in advance; it can also be multi-touch operation, such as double-click operation or combination of click operation and sliding operation, the initial position and target position of the positioning mark can be determined respectively through multi-touch operation. It can be understood that the initial position and target position can be the same. , the use of multi-touch operation can avoid the problem of false trigger operation.
在实际应用过程中，字符以预设规则对应的显示方式显示，可以增大各个字符之间的间距显示，基于增大各个字符之间的间距显示，侦测到定位标识的移动操作，根据移动操作获取定位标识的定位位置所在的字符之间的目标间隙，将定位标识移动至目标间隙。获取定位标识两侧邻近的字符，可获取定位标识两侧邻近的预设数量的字符，也可将定位标识所在字符的字符行确定为定位标识两侧邻近的字符，以实现对定位标识两侧邻近的字符进行修改，也即进入修改模式。In the actual application process, the characters are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preset rules, and the space between each character can be displayed by increasing the space between each character. The operation obtains the target gap between the characters where the positioning position of the positioning mark is located, and moves the positioning mark to the target gap. To obtain the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark, a preset number of characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark can be obtained, and the character line of the character where the positioning mark is located can be determined as the characters adjacent to both sides of the positioning mark, so as to realize the identification of the two sides of the positioning mark. The adjacent characters are modified, that is, the modification mode is entered.
可选地，修改后，所述输入字符一普通模式显示。修改后可通过在预设修改时长内未检测到修改操作确定，也可通过修改确认操作确定，对此不做限定。普通模式指的是除了预设规则所对应的显示方式之外的其他显示方式。如，可放大或缩小各个字符之间间隙的距离至第二预设输出间距。其中，第二预设输出间距为除了预设规则以外的其它规则对应的显示方式显示字符时的字符间距，如，其他规则为通过输入法正常输出字符时默认的字符输出间距。Optionally, after modification, the input characters are displayed in a normal mode. After modification, it can be determined by not detecting the modification operation within the preset modification time period, or determined by the modification confirmation operation, which is not limited. The normal mode refers to other display modes other than the display modes corresponding to the preset rules. For example, the distance of the gap between each character can be enlarged or reduced to the second preset output distance. The second preset output spacing is the character spacing when characters are displayed in display modes corresponding to other rules except the preset rules, for example, the other rules are the default character output spacing when characters are normally output through the input method.
在本实施例公开的技术方案中，通过获取终端设备的预设操作模式，以使得输入的字符按照预设操作模式对应预设规则确定的显示方式显示于终端设备，可便于在输入字符出错或者需对输入字符进行修改时对输入字符进行准确定位。In the technical solution disclosed in this embodiment, by acquiring the preset operation mode of the terminal device, so that the inputted characters are displayed on the terminal device according to the display mode determined by the preset operation mode corresponding to the preset rule, which can be convenient when the input character is wrong or When the input characters need to be modified, the input characters are accurately positioned.
此外，本申请还提供一种输入法的显示方法，本申请实施例的主要解决方案是：接收到通过验证界面触发的验证指令后，接收验证信息，识别所述验证信息中的验证码，将所述验证码输入所述验证界面的输入框中。In addition, the present application also provides a method for displaying an input method. The main solution of the embodiment of the present application is: after receiving a verification instruction triggered through a verification interface, receiving verification information, identifying the verification code in the verification information, and converting The verification code is input into the input box of the verification interface.
本申请实施例终端可以是智能手机，也可以是PC、平板电脑、便携计算机等的终端设备。The terminal in this embodiment of the present application may be a smart phone, or may be a terminal device such as a PC, a tablet computer, and a portable computer.
该终端可以包括：处理器1001，例如CPU，网络接口1003，存储器1004，通信总线1002。其中，通信总线1002用于实现这些组件之间的连接通信。网络接口1003可选的可以包括标准的有线接口、无线接口(如WI-FI接口)。存储器1004可以是高速RAM存储器，也可以是稳定的存储器(non-volatile memory)，例如磁盘存储器。存储器1004可选的还可以是独立于前述处理器1001的存储装置。The terminal may include: a processor 1001 , such as a CPU, a network interface 1003 , a memory 1004 , and a communication bus 1002 . Among them, the communication bus 1002 is used to realize the connection and communication between these components. Optionally, the network interface 1003 may include a standard wired interface and a wireless interface (eg, a WI-FI interface). The memory 1004 may be high-speed RAM memory, or may be non-volatile memory, such as disk memory. Optionally, the memory 1004 may also be a storage device independent of the aforementioned processor 1001 .
本领域技术人员可以理解，图3中示出的终端结构并不构成对验证码的输入终端的限定，可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。Those skilled in the art can understand that the terminal structure shown in FIG. 3 does not constitute a limitation on the input terminal of the verification code, and may include more or less components than the one shown, or combine some components, or different components layout.
作为一种计算机存储介质的存储器1004中可以包括操作***、网络通信模块、用户接口模块以及验证码的输入程序。The memory 1004, which is a computer storage medium, may include an operating system, a network communication module, a user interface module, and a verification code input program.
网络接口1003主要用于连接后台服务器，与后台服务器进行数据通信；而处理器1001可以用于调用存储器1004中存储的输入程序，并执行以下操作：The network interface 1003 is mainly used to connect to the background server and perform data communication with the background server; and the processor 1001 can be used to call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and perform the following operations:
接收到通过验证界面触发的验证指令后，接收验证信息；After receiving the verification command triggered by the verification interface, receive verification information;
识别所述验证信息中的验证码；Identify the verification code in the verification information;
将所述验证码自动显示于所述验证界面的输入框中。The verification code is automatically displayed in the input box of the verification interface.
进一步地，处理器1001可以调用存储器1004中存储的输入程序，还执行以下操作：Further, the processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
接收到通过验证界面触发的验证指令后，实时接收信息；After receiving the verification command triggered by the verification interface, receive the information in real time;
识别所述信息的内容中的关键字；identify keywords in the content of said information;
当识别到所述内容中存在预设关键字时，判定所述接收的信息为验证信息。When it is recognized that a preset keyword exists in the content, it is determined that the received information is verification information.
进一步地，处理器1001可以调用存储器1004中存储的输入程序，还执行以下操作：Further, the processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
获取所述验证界面的输入框的初始输入位置；obtaining the initial input position of the input box of the verification interface;
将所述验证码从所述初始输入位置输入所述输入框中。Enter the verification code into the input box from the initial input location.
进一步地，处理器1001可以调用存储器1004中存储的输入程序，还执行以下操作：Further, the processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
在所述初始输入位置***光标；insert a cursor at the initial input position;
在所述光标处输入所述验证码。Enter the verification code at the cursor.
进一步地，处理器1001可以调用存储器1004中存储的输入程序，还执行以下操作：Further, the processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
获取所述验证界面的输入框的位置；Obtain the position of the input box of the verification interface;
根据所述输入框的位置获取所述初始输入位置。The initial input position is obtained according to the position of the input box.
进一步地，处理器1001可以调用存储器1004中存储的输入程序，还执行以下操作：Further, the processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
识别所述验证界面的关键字；identifying the keyword of the verification interface;
根据所述关键字获取输入框的位置。Obtain the position of the input box according to the keyword.
进一步地，处理器1001可以调用存储器1004中存储的输入程序，还执行以下操作：Further, the processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
获取终端设备当前的语言类型；Get the current language type of the terminal device;
根据所述语言类型和/或所述输入框的位置获取所述初始输入位置。The initial input position is acquired according to the language type and/or the position of the input box.
进一步地，处理器1001可以调用存储器1004中存储的输入程序，还执行以下操作：Further, the processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
根据所述内容，获取所述验证信息中的验证码特征和所述验证码对应的目标应用；According to the content, obtain the verification code feature in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code;
在当前界面的应用与所述目标应用匹配时，执行将所述验证码填入验证码输入框中的步骤；和/或，When the application of the current interface matches the target application, the step of filling the verification code into the verification code input box is performed; and/or,
在当前界面的应用与所述目标应用不匹配时，将所述验证信息中的验证码和所述验证码对应的目标应用关联并记录。When the application of the current interface does not match the target application, the verification code in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code are associated and recorded.
进一步地，处理器1001可以调用存储器1004中存储的输入程序，还执行以下操作：Further, the processor 1001 can call the input program stored in the memory 1004, and also perform the following operations:
在接收到切换界面指令后，识别切换后的界面；After receiving the switching interface instruction, identify the switched interface;
在识别到切换后的界面与所述目标应用匹配时，将所述记录的验证码填入所述目标应用的验证码输入框中。When it is recognized that the switched interface matches the target application, the recorded verification code is filled in the verification code input box of the target application.
请参阅图32，本申请提供一种输入法的显示方法的第二十三实施例，所述输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：Referring to FIG. 32, the present application provides a twenty-third embodiment of a method for displaying an input method. The method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
步骤S310，接收到通过验证界面触发的验证指令后，接收验证信息；Step S310, after receiving the verification instruction triggered by the verification interface, receiving verification information;
步骤S320，识别所述验证信息中的验证码；Step S320, identifying the verification code in the verification information;
步骤S330，将所述验证码输入所述验证界面的输入框中。Step S330, input the verification code into the input box of the verification interface.
本实施例的执行终端可以是智能手机、便携计算机、平板电脑，本实施例的执行终端能够进行数据交流，并且能够发送并接收短信或邮件信息，通过识别接收到的短信或邮件信息，将所述短信或邮件信息中的验证码自动输入到对应的验证码输入框中。The execution terminal in this embodiment may be a smart phone, a portable computer, or a tablet computer. The execution terminal in this embodiment can exchange data, and can send and receive short messages or email messages. The verification code in the text message or email message is automatically entered into the corresponding verification code input box.
本实施例在终端设备上设有输入法的显示程序，通过在接收到信息后，并判断所述信息是验证信息时，识别所述验证信息中的验证码，再将所述验证码输入所述验证界面的输入框中，实现对验证码的自动输入。In this embodiment, an input method display program is provided on the terminal device. After receiving the information and judging that the information is verification information, the verification code in the verification information is identified, and then the verification code is input into the In the input box of the verification interface described above, the automatic input of the verification code is realized.
接收到通过验证界面触发的验证指令即为执行终端接收到用户在验证界面触发的验证码请求，可以理解的是，所述执行终端在接收到所述验证码请求时，会向需要验证的应用发送将验证码信息发送至预设手机号或邮箱的请求，并实时接收发送来的验证信息。所述验证信息中包含有验证码以及所述验证码对应的应用名称。Receiving the verification instruction triggered by the verification interface means that the execution terminal receives the verification code request triggered by the user on the verification interface. Send a request to send the verification code information to the preset mobile phone number or email address, and receive the sent verification information in real time. The verification information includes a verification code and an application name corresponding to the verification code.
可以理解的是，在接收到验证信息后，识别出所述验证信息中的验证码，即所述执行终端对所述验证信息的内容进行解析，获取所述验证信息中的验证码，所述验证码可以为多位数字，也可以为多位字母组合，也可以为多位数字和字母的组合。在获取验证码后，则将所述验证码复制到***剪贴板或存储到预设存储器中，在将所述获取到的验证码输入到所述验证界面的输入框中，即将所述复制或存储的验证码粘贴或输出到所述验证界面的输入框中。It can be understood that, after receiving the verification information, the verification code in the verification information is identified, that is, the execution terminal parses the content of the verification information, and obtains the verification code in the verification information, and the The verification code can be multiple digits, a combination of multiple letters, or a combination of multiple digits and letters. After obtaining the verification code, copy the verification code to the system clipboard or store it in the preset memory, and then input the obtained verification code into the input box of the verification interface, that is, to copy or store the verification code. The stored verification code is pasted or output into the input box of the verification interface.
在本实施例中，验证码的输入终端在接收到通过验证界面触发的验证指令后，先接收验证信息，再识别所述验证信息中的验证码，最后将所述验证码输入所述验证界面的输入 框中。通过解析识别验证信息的内容，获取验证码，再自动将验证码输入验证界面的验证框中，实现了验证码的自动输入，操作智能简便，提高了用户的体验度和执行终端的智能程度。In this embodiment, after receiving the verification instruction triggered through the verification interface, the verification code input terminal first receives verification information, then recognizes the verification code in the verification information, and finally inputs the verification code into the verification interface input box. By parsing and identifying the content of the verification information, obtaining the verification code, and then automatically entering the verification code into the verification box of the verification interface, the automatic input of the verification code is realized, the operation is intelligent and simple, and the user experience and the intelligence of the execution terminal are improved.
进一步的，参照图33，本申请提供一种输入法的显示方法的第第二十四实施例，基于上述图32所示的实施例，所述接收到通过验证界面触发的验证指令后，接收验证信息的步骤包括：Further, referring to FIG. 33 , the present application provides a twenty-fourth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method. Based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 32 , after receiving the verification instruction triggered by the verification interface, the The steps to verify the information include:
步骤S311，接收到通过验证界面触发的验证指令后，实时接收信息；Step S311, receiving the information in real time after receiving the verification instruction triggered by the verification interface;
步骤S312，识别所述信息的内容中的关键字；Step S312, identifying keywords in the content of the information;
步骤S313，当识别到所述内容中存在预设关键字时，判定所述接收的信息为验证信息。Step S313, when it is recognized that there is a preset keyword in the content, it is determined that the received information is verification information.
在接收到通过验证界面触发的验证指令后，所述执行终端能够实时接收信息，所述信息可以是含有验证码的短信或邮件，也可以是不含有验证码的短信或邮件。可以理解的是，在所述含有验证码的短信或邮件中含有特殊关键字，例如：验证码、验证等关键字。因此，在接收到信息后，先识别所述信息的内容中是否存在预设的关键字，通过所述预设的关键字来判断所述信息是否为验证信息。After receiving the verification instruction triggered through the verification interface, the execution terminal can receive information in real time, and the information may be a short message or an email containing a verification code, or a short message or an email without a verification code. It can be understood that the short message or email containing the verification code contains special keywords, such as keywords such as verification code and verification. Therefore, after receiving the information, first identify whether there is a preset keyword in the content of the information, and determine whether the information is verification information based on the preset keyword.
可以理解的是，在识别到所述内容中存在预设关键字时，则可以判定所述接收到的信息为验证信息，例如：当所述信息的内容中存在“验证码”时，则可以认为所述信息为验证信息。It can be understood that when it is recognized that there is a preset keyword in the content, it can be determined that the received information is verification information, for example: when there is a "verification code" in the content of the information, it can be The information is considered verification information.
在本实施例中，在接收到通过验证界面触发的验证指令后，实时接收信息，先识别所述信息的内容中的关键字，然后当识别到所述内容中存在预设关键字时，则判定所述接收的信息为验证信息，实现将含有验证码的验证信息从信息中识别出来，操作快捷智能。In this embodiment, after receiving the verification instruction triggered by the verification interface, the information is received in real time, the keywords in the content of the information are first identified, and then when it is identified that there is a preset keyword in the content, the It is determined that the received information is the verification information, so that the verification information containing the verification code can be identified from the information, and the operation is quick and intelligent.
进一步的，参照图34，本申请提供一种输入法的显示方法的第二十五实施例，基于上述图32所示的实施例，所述将所述验证码输入所述验证界面的输入框中的步骤包括：Further, referring to FIG. 34 , the present application provides a twenty-fifth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method. Based on the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 32 , the verification code is entered into the input box of the verification interface. The steps in include:
步骤S331，获取所述验证界面的输入框的初始输入位置；Step S331, obtaining the initial input position of the input box of the verification interface;
步骤S332，将所述验证码从所述初始输入位置输入所述输入框中。Step S332: Input the verification code into the input box from the initial input position.
在识别出所述验证信息的验证码后，先获取所述验证界面的输入框的初始输入位置，所述输入框为验证码的填写框，所述初始输入位置为验证码填写输入框时的起始位置，可以理解的是，获取所述验证界面的输入框的位置可以通过先识别所述验证界面，判断所述验证界面是否存在预设关键字，当存在预设关键字时，则根据所述关键字获取输入框的位置。例如：根据识别当前界面，所述验证界面存在有“验证码”、“验证码输入”等的关键字，则所述关键字对应的输入框的位置即为所述验证界面的输入框位置。在获取输入框的位置后，则根据所述输入框的位置获取所述初始输入位置，所述输入初始位置可以通过先获取执行终端当前的语言类型，再根据所述语言类型来获取初始输入位置。例如：当获取到当前执行终端的语言为英文时，则所述初始输入位置就为所述输入框的最左端，当获取到当前执行终端的语言为***语时，则所述初始输入位置就为所述输入框的最右端。After identifying the verification code of the verification information, first obtain the initial input position of the input box of the verification interface, the input box is the verification code filling box, and the initial input position is the verification code when filling in the input box. It can be understood that the position of the input box of the verification interface can be obtained by first identifying the verification interface to determine whether there is a preset keyword in the verification interface, and when there is a preset keyword, according to The keyword obtains the position of the input box. For example, according to the identification of the current interface, the verification interface has keywords such as "verification code" and "verification code input", and the position of the input box corresponding to the keyword is the position of the input box of the verification interface. After the position of the input box is obtained, the initial input position is obtained according to the position of the input box. The initial input position can be obtained by first obtaining the current language type of the execution terminal, and then obtaining the initial input position according to the language type. . For example: when the acquired language of the current execution terminal is English, the initial input position is the leftmost end of the input box; when the acquired language of the current execution terminal is Arabic, the initial input position is is the rightmost end of the input box.
可以理解的是，在获取到输入框的初始输入位置后，则将所述验证码从所述初始输入位置输入到所述输入框中，所述将所述验证码从所述初始输入位置输入所述输入框中可以通过在获取输入框的初始输入位置后，模拟人工点击，在所述初始输入位置***光标，在所述光标处输入复制在剪贴板或存储在预设存储器中的所述验证码。It can be understood that, after the initial input position of the input box is obtained, the verification code is input into the input box from the initial input position, and the verification code is input from the initial input position. In the input box, after obtaining the initial input position of the input box, simulate a manual click, insert a cursor at the initial input position, and enter the copy of the clipboard or stored in the preset memory at the cursor. verification code.
在本实施例中，执行终端在识别出所述验证信息的验证码后，先获取所述验证界面的输入框的初始输入位置，再将所述验证码从所述初始输入位置输入所述输入框中，实现将识别到的验证码准确输入到验证码输入框中，操作简便智能。In this embodiment, after recognizing the verification code of the verification information, the execution terminal first obtains the initial input position of the input box of the verification interface, and then inputs the verification code into the input from the initial input position box, the recognized verification code can be accurately input into the verification code input box, and the operation is simple and intelligent.
进一步的，参照图35，本申请提供一种输入法的显示方法的第二十六实施例，基于上述图32所示的实施例，所述识别所述验证信息中的验证码的步骤之后，还包括：Further, referring to FIG. 35 , the present application provides a twenty-sixth embodiment of a method for displaying an input method. Based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 32 , after the step of recognizing the verification code in the verification information, Also includes:
步骤S340，根据所述内容，获取所述验证信息中的验证码特征和所述验证码对应的目标应用；Step S340, according to the content, obtain the verification code feature in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code;
步骤S330，在当前界面的应用与所述目标应用匹配时，执行将所述验证码填入验证码输入框中的步骤；和/或，Step S330, when the application of the current interface matches the target application, execute the step of filling the verification code into the verification code input box; and/or,
步骤S350，在当前界面的应用与所述目标应用不匹配时，将所述验证信息中的验证码和所述验证码对应的目标应用关联并记录。Step S350, when the application on the current interface does not match the target application, associate and record the verification code in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code.
在识别到所述验证信息中的验证码后，还可以根据所述验证信息中的内容，获取所述验证信息中的验证码特征和所述验证码对应的目标应用，所述验证码特征即为验证码以及组成方式，所述组成方式包括数字、字母以及数字和字母的组成。在获取上述信息后，判断当前界面是否为所述验证码对应的验证界面，所述判断可以通过对比所述获取到的目标应用和当前界面的应用，或者可以通过对比所述验证码的位数或组成方式和所述当前界面的所需验证码的位数或组成方式。After the verification code in the verification information is identified, the verification code feature in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code can also be obtained according to the content in the verification information, and the verification code feature is For the verification code and the composition method, the composition method includes numbers, letters, and the combination of numbers and letters. After obtaining the above information, it is determined whether the current interface is the verification interface corresponding to the verification code, and the judgment can be made by comparing the obtained target application and the application of the current interface, or by comparing the number of digits of the verification code. Or the composition method and the number of digits or composition method of the required verification code of the current interface.
可以理解的是，在当前界面的应用与所述目标应用匹配时，即当前界面为所述验证码对应的验证界面，则执行将所述验证码填入验证码输入框中的步骤，即将所述复制或存储的验证码粘贴或输出到所述验证界面的输入框中。It can be understood that when the application of the current interface matches the target application, that is, the current interface is the verification interface corresponding to the verification code, the step of filling the verification code into the verification code input box is performed, that is, the verification code is filled in the verification code input box. Paste or output the copied or stored verification code into the input box of the verification interface.
可选地，在当前界面的应用与所述目标应用不匹配时，即当前界面不是所述验证码对应的验证界面，则将所述验证信息中的验证码和所述验证码对应的目标应用关联，再将所述关联后的信息记录，所述记录可以通过复制到剪贴板或存储到预设存储器中。可以理解的是，在接收到切换界面指令后，即当用户进行界面切换后，识别切换后的界面，获取切换后的界面对应的应用，在识别到切换后的界面与所述目标应用匹配时，其中，所述目标应用即为已经记录的验证码对应的应用，因此在识别到切换后的界面为记录的验证码对应的验证界面后，则将所述记录的验证码填入切换后的界面的验证码输入框中，即填入所述目标应用的验证码输入框中。Optionally, when the application of the current interface does not match the target application, that is, the current interface is not the verification interface corresponding to the verification code, the verification code in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code are used. The associated information is then recorded, and the record can be copied to the clipboard or stored in a preset memory. It can be understood that, after receiving the switching interface instruction, that is, when the user performs interface switching, the interface after switching is identified, and the application corresponding to the interface after switching is obtained, and when it is recognized that the interface after switching is matched with the target application , wherein the target application is the application corresponding to the recorded verification code, so after recognizing that the switched interface is the verification interface corresponding to the recorded verification code, the recorded verification code is filled in the switched The verification code input box of the interface is filled in the verification code input box of the target application.
在本实施例中，在识别到所述验证信息中的验证码后，还可以根据所述内容，获取所述验证信息中的验证码特征和所述验证码对应的目标应用，在当前界面的应用与所述目标应用匹配时，执行将所述验证码填入验证码输入框中的步骤，和/或，在当前界面的应用与所述目标应用不匹配时，将所述验证信息中的验证码和所述验证码对应的目标应用关联并记录，实现当有多个应用需要验证时，同时接收到多个验证码，可以根据各个验证信息，将多个验证码分别填入对应的应用验证界面中，操作简便智能。In this embodiment, after the verification code in the verification information is identified, the verification code feature in the verification information and the target application corresponding to the verification code can also be obtained according to the content, and in the current interface When the application matches the target application, perform the step of filling the verification code into the verification code input box, and/or, when the application on the current interface does not match the target application, enter the verification code in the verification information. The verification code is associated and recorded with the target application corresponding to the verification code, so that when multiple applications need to be verified, multiple verification codes are received at the same time, and multiple verification codes can be filled in the corresponding applications according to each verification information. In the verification interface, the operation is simple and intelligent.
如图36所示，图36是本申请实施例方案涉及的用户交互的验证界面参考图。As shown in FIG. 36 , FIG. 36 is a reference diagram of a verification interface for user interaction involved in the solution of the embodiment of the present application.
如图36所示，该界面为用户交互的验证界面参考图，特别地，该界面为触发验证指令后的验证码输入界面，所述界面可以包括：验证码输入框、输入键盘等。在所述界面中，被获取到的验证码能够自动输入所述验证码输入框中，实现在触发验证指令后，将获取到的验证码输入所述验证码输入界面的验证码输入框中。As shown in FIG. 36 , the interface is a reference diagram of a verification interface for user interaction, in particular, the interface is a verification code input interface after triggering a verification instruction, and the interface may include a verification code input box, an input keyboard, and the like. In the interface, the obtained verification code can be automatically input into the verification code input box, so that after the verification instruction is triggered, the obtained verification code is input into the verification code input box of the verification code input interface.
此外，本申请还提供一种输入法的显示方法。In addition, the present application also provides a display method of the input method.
参照图37、图38、图39和图40，在输入法的显示方法第二十七实施例中，该方法包括：37, 38, 39 and 40, in the twenty-seventh embodiment of the display method of the input method, the method includes:
步骤S410，当接收到验证码时，分析所述验证码的验证码类型；Step S410, when receiving the verification code, analyze the verification code type of the verification code;
接收到的验证码可以是服务器发送过来的短信或文字验证码，也可以是显示在应用内的图片验证码，当接收到验证码时，分析验证码的类型，验证码的类型包括是文字验证码、图片验证码等验证码呈现类型，还包括验证码中信息的类型如纯数字验证码，纯字母验证码、混合类型验证码等。The received verification code can be a short message or text verification code sent by the server, or a picture verification code displayed in the app. When the verification code is received, the type of verification code is analyzed. The type of verification code includes text verification. It also includes the type of information in the verification code, such as pure digital verification code, pure letter verification code, mixed type verification code, etc.
步骤S420，根据应用信息和/或所述验证码类型确定预定义键盘样式；Step S420, determining a predefined keyboard style according to the application information and/or the verification code type;
当接收到用户对于应用内验证码输入框的选择操作，即用户存在输入验证码的行动意图时，会获取当前应用信息和/或验证码的文本类型，根据当前的应用信息和/或验证码类型，确定预定义键盘样式。根据应用信息确定预定义键盘样式时，可以先对应用进行分类，分类的依据是应用的验证码类型，如纯英文验证码。纯数字验证码或者英文与数字混合的验证码。在应用分类完成后，可以将分类结果保存在本地数据库中，也可以保存在云端数 据库中，当需要时，将当前的应用信息与数据库中的信息进行比较即可。使用验证码类型确定预定义键盘样式时，当终端接收到验证码时，获取验证码中的关键词，根据关键词进行解析，获取验证码类型。当同时使用应用信息和验证码类型时，先根据应用信息确定一个初始的键盘样式，当接收到验证码时，对于验证码进行解析，并根据验证码类型确定最终的键盘样式。对于纯数字验证码，预定义键盘样式为数字输入键盘样式，对于纯字母验证码，预定义键盘样式为26键英文键盘样式，对于数字与字母结合的验证码，预定义键盘样式为26键英文键盘加上数字的混合键盘样式。当然，预定义键盘样式还可以根据用户的习惯进行相应的调整。When the user's selection operation on the in-app verification code input box is received, that is, when the user has an action intention to enter the verification code, the current application information and/or the text type of the verification code will be obtained, according to the current application information and/or verification code. Type, which determines the predefined keyboard style. When the predefined keyboard style is determined according to the application information, the application can be classified first, and the classification is based on the verification code type of the application, such as a plain English verification code. A pure digital verification code or a verification code mixed with English and digital. After the application classification is completed, the classification results can be saved in the local database or in the cloud database. When needed, the current application information can be compared with the information in the database. When the verification code type is used to determine the predefined keyboard style, when the terminal receives the verification code, it obtains the keywords in the verification code, parses according to the keywords, and obtains the verification code type. When using the application information and the verification code type at the same time, an initial keyboard style is first determined according to the application information. When the verification code is received, the verification code is parsed, and the final keyboard style is determined according to the verification code type. For the pure number verification code, the predefined keyboard style is the numeric input keyboard style. For the pure letter verification code, the predefined keyboard style is the 26-key English keyboard style. For the verification code combining numbers and letters, the predefined keyboard style is the 26-key English keyboard style. Hybrid keyboard style with keyboard plus numbers. Of course, the predefined keyboard styles can also be adjusted accordingly according to the user's habits.
步骤S430，显示所述预定义键盘样式；Step S430, displaying the predefined keyboard style;
当确定预定义键盘样式时，将当前的键盘按照预定义键盘样式进行显示。同时还可以相应地调整键盘的大小和显示区域，便于用户更加方便的进行验证码的输入。参照图38、图39和图40，分别为纯数字、纯字母以及混合样式的验证码时用户界面的示意图。当然，还可以包括更多其他的界面示意图样式。When the predefined keyboard style is determined, the current keyboard is displayed according to the predefined keyboard style. At the same time, the size and display area of the keyboard can also be adjusted accordingly, so as to facilitate the user to input the verification code more conveniently. Referring to FIG. 38 , FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 , it is a schematic diagram of the user interface when the verification codes of pure numbers, pure letters and mixed styles are respectively. Of course, more other interface schematic styles may also be included.
在本实施例中，当接收到验证码时，分析所述验证码的验证码类型；根据应用信息和/或验证码类型确定预定义键盘样式；显示所述预定义键盘样式。当用户需要在应用中输入验证码时，根据验证码类型或者应用信息，获取对应的预定义键盘样式，自动将键盘按照相应的预定义键盘样式显示，无需用户手动切换，方便用户进行验证码的输入，减少用户操作，使终端更加智能。In this embodiment, when a verification code is received, the verification code type of the verification code is analyzed; a predefined keyboard style is determined according to the application information and/or the verification code type; and the predefined keyboard style is displayed. When the user needs to enter the verification code in the application, according to the verification code type or application information, the corresponding predefined keyboard style is obtained, and the keyboard is automatically displayed according to the corresponding predefined keyboard style, without the need for the user to manually switch, which is convenient for the user to verify the code. input, reduce user operations, and make the terminal more intelligent.
进一步地，参照图37和图41，在本申请输入法的显示方法上述各实施例的基础上，提供输入法的显示方法第二十八实施例，在第二十八实施例中，Further, referring to FIG. 37 and FIG. 41 , on the basis of the above-mentioned embodiments of the display method of the input method of the present application, a twenty-eighth embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided. In the twenty-eighth embodiment,
步骤S420包括：Step S420 includes:
步骤S421，当接收到应用内验证码请求时，获取当前应用信息；Step S421, when an in-app verification code request is received, obtain current application information;
步骤S422，根据所述应用信息，确定所述预定义键盘样式；Step S422, determining the predefined keyboard style according to the application information;
可选地，所述应用信息包括应用类别、应用名称、应用图标中的至少一项。Optionally, the application information includes at least one of an application category, an application name, and an application icon.
对于一些验证码类型较为固定的应用，提前对于这些应用更加验证码类型进行分类，将验证码类型为纯数字的应用分为一类，将验证码类型为纯字母的应用分为一类，将验证码类型为数字与字母结合的分为一类，同时将分类结果保存在数据库中。当接收到用户对于应用内验证码输入框的选择操作，即用户存在输入验证码的动作意图时，获取应用信息中的名称信息，将获取的名称信息与数据库中存储的不同分类的应用的名称信息进行对比，判断当前的应用的所属分类，确定相应的预定义键盘样式。如对于纯数字验证码，预定义键盘样式为数字输入键盘样式，对于纯字母验证码，预定义键盘样式为26键英文键盘样式，对于数字与字母结合的验证码，预定义键盘样式为26键英文键盘加上数字的混合键盘样式。根据应用信息确定预定义键盘样式时，无需根据接收到的验证码进行判断，可以更加快速的确定适合当前应用的键盘样式。For some applications whose verification code types are relatively fixed, classify these applications by more verification code types in advance. The applications whose verification code type is pure numbers are classified into one category, and the applications whose verification code type is pure letters are classified into one category. The verification code type is a combination of numbers and letters into one category, and the classification results are stored in the database at the same time. When the user's selection operation on the in-app verification code input box is received, that is, when the user has an action intention to enter the verification code, the name information in the application information is obtained, and the obtained name information is stored in the database. The information is compared, the classification of the current application is determined, and the corresponding predefined keyboard style is determined. For example, for the pure number verification code, the predefined keyboard style is the numeric input keyboard style, for the pure letter verification code, the predefined keyboard style is the 26-key English keyboard style, and for the verification code combining numbers and letters, the predefined keyboard style is 26 keys. Mixed keyboard style of English keyboard plus numbers. When the predefined keyboard style is determined according to the application information, there is no need to judge according to the received verification code, and the keyboard style suitable for the current application can be determined more quickly.
在本实施例中，通过应用信息确定预定义键盘样式，能够在用户需要输入验证码时直接确定最合适的键盘样式，无需等待接收验证码进行解析，更加快速。In this embodiment, the predefined keyboard style is determined through the application information, and the most suitable keyboard style can be directly determined when the user needs to input the verification code, without waiting for the verification code to be received for parsing, which is faster.
进一步地，参照图37和图42，在本申请输入法的显示方法上述各实施例的基础上，提供输入法的显示方法第二十九实施例，在第二十九实施例中，Further, referring to FIG. 37 and FIG. 42 , on the basis of the above-mentioned embodiments of the display method of the input method of the present application, a twenty-ninth embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided. In the twenty-ninth embodiment,
步骤S420包括：Step S420 includes:
步骤S423，当接收到验证码时，获取接收到的验证码内容；Step S423, when receiving the verification code, obtain the content of the received verification code;
接收到用户对于应用内验证码输入框的选择操作，终端会根据接收到的选择操作，获取相应的验证码。一般的，应用都是通过向服务器发送获取验证码的请求，并获取服务器发送的验证码信息，或者通过图片显示需要用户输入的验证码内容。After receiving the user's selection operation on the verification code input box in the application, the terminal will obtain the corresponding verification code according to the received selection operation. Generally, the application sends a request for obtaining the verification code to the server, and obtains the verification code information sent by the server, or displays the verification code content that needs to be input by the user through a picture.
步骤S424，根据所述验证码内容判断所述验证码类型；Step S424, judging the verification code type according to the verification code content;
接收到验证码信息后，对于获取的验证码信息进行解析，判断验证码类型。对于验证码短信，可以通过验证码中的关键词进行判断，如将验证码作为关键词，则验证码后面紧 接着的内容就是具体的验证码内容，判断验证码内容是纯数字、纯字母还是数字与字母的组合，从而判断验证码的类型。如果是通过图片信息显示验证码的内容，则通过图片识别技术识别图片中的验证码信息，判断验证码的类型。After receiving the verification code information, the obtained verification code information is parsed to determine the verification code type. For the verification code SMS, you can judge by the keywords in the verification code. If the verification code is used as a keyword, the content immediately after the verification code is the specific verification code content, and it is judged whether the verification code content is pure numbers, pure letters or A combination of numbers and letters to determine the type of verification code. If the content of the verification code is displayed through the picture information, the verification code information in the picture is identified by the picture recognition technology, and the type of the verification code is judged.
步骤S425，根据所述验证码类型确定所述预定义键盘样式；Step S425, determining the predefined keyboard style according to the verification code type;
在确定验证码类型之后，根据验证码类型确定相应的预定义键盘样式。如对于纯数字验证码，预定义键盘样式为数字输入键盘样式，对于纯字母验证码，预定义键盘样式为26键英文键盘样式，对于数字与字母结合的验证码，预定义键盘样式为26键英文键盘加上数字的混合键盘样式。相比于用应用信息判断，用验证码类型确定键盘样式会根据准确，能够精确地根据将要输入的验证码内容调整键盘样式，确保键盘样式与验证码的匹配程度较高。After the verification code type is determined, the corresponding predefined keyboard style is determined according to the verification code type. For example, for the pure number verification code, the predefined keyboard style is the numeric input keyboard style, for the pure letter verification code, the predefined keyboard style is the 26-key English keyboard style, and for the verification code combining numbers and letters, the predefined keyboard style is 26 keys. Mixed keyboard style of English keyboard plus numbers. Compared with judging by application information, using the verification code type to determine the keyboard style will be accurate, and can accurately adjust the keyboard style according to the content of the verification code to be input, so as to ensure a high degree of matching between the keyboard style and the verification code.
在本实施例中，通过验证码类型确定预定义键盘样式，能够准确根据验证码内容切换键盘样式，方便用户快速输入验证码。In this embodiment, the predefined keyboard style is determined by the verification code type, and the keyboard style can be switched accurately according to the verification code content, which is convenient for the user to quickly input the verification code.
进一步地，参照图37和图43，在本申请输入法的显示方法上述各实施例的基础上，提供输入法的显示方法第三十实施例，在第三十实施例中，Further, referring to FIG. 37 and FIG. 43 , on the basis of the above-mentioned embodiments of the display method of the input method of the present application, a thirtieth embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided. In the thirtieth embodiment,
步骤S420包括：Step S420 includes:
步骤S426，当接收到用户对于应用内验证码输入框的选择操作时，根据所述应用信息确定第一键盘样式；Step S426, when receiving the user's selection operation on the verification code input box in the application, determine the first keyboard style according to the application information;
当用户打开应用内后，点击应用内的验证码输入框操作时，根据获取的应用信息与数据库中的应用信息进行比对，确定当前的应用在数据库中的应用分类，确定应用对应的分类，如纯数字验证码应用、纯字母验证码应用或者混合类型验证码应用，根据不同的应用类型确定相应的对于键盘样式，如对于纯数字验证码，预定义键盘样式为数字输入键盘样式，对于纯字母验证码，预定义键盘样式为26键英文键盘样式，对于数字与字母结合的验证码，预定义键盘样式为26键英文键盘加上数字的混合键盘样式。When the user opens the application and clicks the verification code input box in the application, the obtained application information is compared with the application information in the database to determine the application classification of the current application in the database, and the corresponding classification of the application is determined. For example, for pure digital verification code application, pure letter verification code application or mixed type verification code application, the corresponding keyboard style is determined according to different application types. For example, for pure digital verification code, the predefined keyboard style is the digital input keyboard style. For letter verification codes, the predefined keyboard style is a 26-key English keyboard style. For a verification code that combines numbers and letters, the predefined keyboard style is a 26-key English keyboard plus a mixed keyboard style of numbers.
步骤S427，当接收到验证码内容后，获取验证码类型并根据所述验证码类型确定第二键盘样式；Step S427, after receiving the verification code content, obtain the verification code type and determine the second keyboard style according to the verification code type;
而当用户真正需要输入验证码时，通过获取的短信或者图像中的验证码内容进行分析，判断验证码类型，如纯数字验证码、纯字母验证码或者混合类型验证码。根据验证码类型与预定义键盘样式的对应关系，确定第二已经样式。如对于纯数字验证码，预定义键盘样式为数字输入键盘样式，对于纯字母验证码，预定义键盘样式为26键英文键盘样式，对于数字与字母结合的验证码，预定义键盘样式为26键英文键盘加上数字的混合键盘样式。When the user really needs to enter the verification code, the content of the verification code in the obtained short message or image is analyzed to determine the type of verification code, such as pure digital verification code, pure letter verification code or mixed type verification code. According to the corresponding relationship between the verification code type and the predefined keyboard style, the second style is determined. For example, for the pure number verification code, the predefined keyboard style is the numeric input keyboard style, for the pure letter verification code, the predefined keyboard style is the 26-key English keyboard style, and for the verification code combining numbers and letters, the predefined keyboard style is 26 keys. Mixed keyboard style of English keyboard plus numbers.
步骤S428，若所述第二键盘样式与所述第一键盘样式不相同，则所述预定义键盘样式为第二键盘样式；和/或，Step S428, if the second keyboard style is different from the first keyboard style, the predefined keyboard style is the second keyboard style; and/or,
步骤S429，若所述第二键盘样式与所述第一键盘样式相同，则所述预定义键盘样式为第一键盘样式；Step S429, if the second keyboard style is the same as the first keyboard style, the predefined keyboard style is the first keyboard style;
当第一键盘样式与第二键盘样式时，说明根据应用信息确定的第一键盘样式是与验证码类型匹配的，不需要最初切换键盘样式，如果第一键盘样式与第二键盘样式不同，则说明当前的应用的验证码类型可能存在改变，即应用的验证码类型有过更新，将键盘样式从第一键盘样式切换成第二键盘样式，同时还可以对于数据库中的应用分类信息进行标记，如果当前的应用在一定时间内多次被标记过，则说明应用的验证码类型已经发生改变，此时可以对于数据库中相应应用的分类进行更新。When the first keyboard style is different from the second keyboard style, it means that the first keyboard style determined according to the application information matches the verification code type, and there is no need to switch the keyboard style initially. If the first keyboard style is different from the second keyboard style, then It means that there may be changes in the verification code type of the current application, that is, the verification code type of the application has been updated, the keyboard style is switched from the first keyboard style to the second keyboard style, and the application classification information in the database can also be marked. If the current application has been marked many times within a certain period of time, it means that the verification code type of the application has changed, and at this time, the classification of the corresponding application in the database can be updated.
在本实施例中，根据应用信息确定第一键盘样式，同时根据实际的验证码类型确定第二验证码类型。判断第一键盘样式与第二键盘样式是否相同，确定最终的键盘样式。通过应用信息和验证码类型综合判断键盘样式，可以获得最准确的键盘样式。In this embodiment, the first keyboard style is determined according to the application information, and the second verification code type is determined according to the actual verification code type. Determine whether the first keyboard style is the same as the second keyboard style, and determine the final keyboard style. The most accurate keyboard style can be obtained by comprehensively judging the keyboard style by the application information and the verification code type.
进一步地，在本申请输入法的显示方法上述各实施例的基础上，提供输入法的显示方法第三十一实施例，在第三十一实施例中，Further, on the basis of the above-mentioned embodiments of the display method of the input method of the present application, a thirty-first embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided. In the thirty-first embodiment,
步骤S430之后包括：After step S430, it includes:
步骤A，当接收到所述预定义键盘样式中的验证码输入操作后，键盘样式保持不变或切换至前次键盘样式；Step A, after receiving the verification code input operation in the predefined keyboard style, the keyboard style remains unchanged or switches to the previous keyboard style;
当用户在预定义键盘样式的键盘中输入完成验证码后，键盘的样式可以保持不变，即依然为当前的预定义键盘样式，如预定义键盘样式为数字键盘，则依然保持键盘为数字键盘，也可以将键盘样式切换为记录的上次使用的键盘样式，如当前的预定义键盘样式为数字键盘，而记录的上次使用的键盘样式为26键键盘，则从数字键盘切换成26键键盘。When the user enters the verification code in the keyboard with the predefined keyboard style, the style of the keyboard can remain unchanged, that is, it is still the current predefined keyboard style. If the predefined keyboard style is the numeric keyboard, the keyboard is still kept as the numeric keyboard , you can also switch the keyboard style to the last recorded keyboard style, such as the current predefined keyboard style is a numeric keyboard, and the recorded keyboard style last used is a 26-key keyboard, then switch from the numeric keyboard to a 26-key keyboard keyboard.
在本实施例中，通过键盘样式的保持不变或切换成前次键盘样式，保证用户能够快速正常切换。In this embodiment, by keeping the keyboard style unchanged or switching to the previous keyboard style, it is ensured that the user can switch quickly and normally.
进一步地，在本申请输入法的显示方法上述各实施例的基础上，提供输入法的显示方法第三十二实施例，在第三十二实施例中，Further, on the basis of the above-mentioned embodiments of the display method of the input method of the present application, a thirty-second embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided. In the thirty-second embodiment,
步骤S420之前包括：Before step S420, it includes:
步骤B1，获取当前的输入法类型和/或所述输入法的语言信息；Step B1, obtaining the current input method type and/or the language information of the input method;
步骤B2，根据所述输入法类型和/或所述语言信息，调整所述预定义键盘样式；Step B2, adjusting the predefined keyboard style according to the input method type and/or the language information;
对于不同的输入法，可能会存在键盘样式的区别，同时可以获取键盘当前的语音信息，如中文输入还是英文输入，输入法类型为当前的输入法是否支持在26键的键盘上同时显示数字按键，如果不能显示，则当需要显示26键与数字的混合键盘时，调整键盘样式为26键键盘样式，同时如果当前的输入语言为中文，而验证码的内容中包括字母，则还需要将输入法的键盘样式中的输入语音切换为英文输入。For different input methods, there may be differences in keyboard styles, and at the same time, you can obtain the current voice information of the keyboard, such as Chinese input or English input, the input method type is whether the current input method supports the simultaneous display of numeric keys on a 26-key keyboard , if it cannot be displayed, when you need to display a mixed keyboard of 26 keys and numbers, adjust the keyboard style to the 26-key keyboard style. At the same time, if the current input language is Chinese and the content of the verification code includes letters, you also need to enter the The input voice in the keyboard style of the method is switched to English input.
在本实施例中，在依据应用信息和/或验证码类型确定预定义键盘样式后，还需要根据输入法类型和语音信息对于键盘样式进行调整，更加便于用户的验证码输入。In this embodiment, after the predefined keyboard style is determined according to the application information and/or the verification code type, the keyboard style needs to be adjusted according to the input method type and voice information, which is more convenient for the user to input the verification code.
进一步地，参照图37和图44，在本申请输入法的显示方法上述各实施例的基础上，提供输入法的显示方法第三十三实施例，在第三十三实施例中，Further, referring to FIG. 37 and FIG. 44 , on the basis of the above-mentioned embodiments of the display method of the input method of the present application, a thirty-third embodiment of the display method of the input method is provided. In the thirty-third embodiment,
步骤S430之后包括：After step S430, it includes:
步骤S431，获取终端当前的输入模式；Step S431, obtaining the current input mode of the terminal;
输入模式包括单手输入模式和双手输入模式，与终端的操作方式对应，即终端当前为单手操作模式还是正常的操作模式。The input mode includes a one-hand input mode and a two-hand input mode, which corresponds to the operation mode of the terminal, that is, whether the terminal is currently in a one-hand operation mode or a normal operation mode.
步骤S432，根据所述输入模式确定当前的键盘显示区域；Step S432, determining the current keyboard display area according to the input mode;
当为双手输入模式时，键盘显示区域为正常的显示区域，若为单手模式，则根据当前为左手操作模式还是右手操作模式，将键盘显示在左侧区域或者右侧区域中。When it is in two-hand input mode, the keyboard display area is the normal display area. If it is in one-hand mode, the keyboard is displayed in the left area or the right area according to the current left-hand operation mode or right-hand operation mode.
步骤S433，在所述键盘显示区域按照所述预定义键盘模式显示键盘；Step S433, displaying a keyboard in the keyboard display area according to the predefined keyboard mode;
确定显示区域后根据预定义键盘样式在显示区域中显示键盘即可。After the display area is determined, the keyboard can be displayed in the display area according to the predefined keyboard style.
步骤S434，获取预设时间内终端的显示区域中接收到触控信号的触控面积；Step S434, acquiring the touch area in the display area of the terminal that receives the touch signal within a preset time;
步骤S435，根据所述触控面积与所述显示区域调整所述键盘的显示大小；Step S435, adjusting the display size of the keyboard according to the touch area and the display area;
检测终端的显示区域中检测到触控信号的区域，即用户可以方便在终端中进行触控操作的触控区域，根据触控区域占显示区域的总大小，调整显示的键盘的显示大小，如用户触控区域较小时，将键盘适当进行缩小，以便用户能够根据当前的使用情况快速调整键盘的大小。Detect the area where the touch signal is detected in the display area of the terminal, that is, the touch area where the user can easily perform touch operations in the terminal, and adjust the display size of the displayed keyboard according to the total size of the touch area in the display area, such as When the user's touch area is small, the keyboard is appropriately reduced so that the user can quickly adjust the size of the keyboard according to the current usage.
步骤S431至S433为调整键盘的显示区域的步骤，步骤S434至S435为调整键盘的大小，可以单独进行调整，可以不同时调整键盘的显示区域和键盘大小。Steps S431 to S433 are the steps of adjusting the display area of the keyboard, and steps S434 to S435 are the steps of adjusting the size of the keyboard, which can be adjusted individually, but not the display area and the keyboard size at the same time.
在本实施例中，还可以调整键盘的显示区域及显示大小，进一步提升用户输入验证码的输入效率。In this embodiment, the display area and display size of the keyboard can also be adjusted to further improve the input efficiency for the user to input the verification code.
此外，本申请实施例还提出一种输入法的显示装置，所述输入法的显示装置包括：In addition, an embodiment of the present application also proposes a display device for an input method, and the display device for the input method includes:
分析模块，用于当接收到验证码时，分析所述验证码的验证码类型；an analysis module for analyzing the verification code type of the verification code when the verification code is received;
确定模块，用于根据应用信息和/或所述验证码类型确定预定义键盘样式；a determining module, for determining a predefined keyboard style according to the application information and/or the verification code type;
显示模块，用于显示所述预定义键盘样式。The display module is used for displaying the predefined keyboard style.
可选地，确定模块还用于：Optionally, the determining module is also used to:
当接收到应用内验证码请求时，获取当前应用信息；When an in-app verification code request is received, obtain the current application information;
根据所述应用信息，确定所述预定义键盘样式。The predefined keyboard style is determined according to the application information.
可选地，所述应用信息包括应用类别、应用名称、应用图标中的至少一项。Optionally, the application information includes at least one of an application category, an application name, and an application icon.
可选地，确定模块还用于：Optionally, the determining module is also used to:
当接收到验证码时，获取接收到的验证码内容；When receiving the verification code, obtain the received verification code content;
根据所述验证码内容判断所述验证码类型；Determine the type of the verification code according to the content of the verification code;
根据所述验证码类型确定所述预定义键盘样式。The predefined keyboard style is determined according to the verification code type.
可选地，确定模块还用于：Optionally, the determining module is also used to:
当接收到验证码输入框的操作信息时，根据所述应用信息确定第一键盘样式；When receiving the operation information of the verification code input box, determine the first keyboard style according to the application information;
可选地，所述操作信息为选择操作、定位操作、输入操作、编辑操作、删除操作中的至少一项；Optionally, the operation information is at least one of a selection operation, a positioning operation, an input operation, an editing operation, and a deletion operation;
当接收到验证码内容后，获取验证码类型并根据所述验证码类型确定第二键盘样式；After receiving the verification code content, obtain the verification code type and determine the second keyboard style according to the verification code type;
若所述第二键盘样式与所述第一键盘样式不相同，则所述预定义键盘样式为第二键盘样式；和/或，If the second keyboard style is different from the first keyboard style, the predefined keyboard style is the second keyboard style; and/or,
若所述第二键盘样式与所述第一键盘样式相同，则所述预定义键盘样式为第一键盘样式。If the second keyboard style is the same as the first keyboard style, the predefined keyboard style is the first keyboard style.
可选地，键盘样式切换装置还包括：Optionally, the keyboard style switching device further includes:
切换模块，用于当接收到所述预定义键盘样式中的验证码输入操作后，键盘样式保持不变或切换至前次键盘样式。The switching module is configured to keep the keyboard style unchanged or switch to the previous keyboard style after receiving the verification code input operation in the predefined keyboard style.
可选地，键盘样式切换装置还包括：Optionally, the keyboard style switching device further includes:
第二获取模块，用于获取当前的输入法类型和/或所述输入法的语言信息；The second acquisition module is used to acquire the current input method type and/or the language information of the input method;
调整模块，用于根据所述输入法类型和/或所述语言信息，调整所述预定义键盘样式。An adjustment module, configured to adjust the predefined keyboard style according to the input method type and/or the language information.
可选地，键盘样式切换装置还包括：Optionally, the keyboard style switching device further includes:
第三获取模块，用于获取终端当前的输入模式；The third obtaining module is used to obtain the current input mode of the terminal;
第二确定模块，用于根据所述输入模式确定当前的键盘显示区域；a second determining module, configured to determine the current keyboard display area according to the input mode;
显示模块，用于在所述键盘显示区域按照所述预定义键盘模式显示键盘。A display module, configured to display a keyboard in the keyboard display area according to the predefined keyboard mode.
可选地，调整模块还用于：Optionally, the adjustment module is also used to:
获取预设时间内终端的显示区域中接收到触控信号的触控面积；Obtain the touch area in the display area of the terminal that receives the touch signal within a preset time;
根据所述触控面积与所述显示区域调整所述键盘的显示大小。The display size of the keyboard is adjusted according to the touch area and the display area.
本申请还提出一种终端设备，所述终端设备包括：包括存储器、处理器以及存储在存储器里并可在处理器上运行的输入法的显示程序，输入法的显示程序被处理器执行时实现上述任一实施例中的输入法的显示方法的步骤。The present application also proposes a terminal device, which includes a memory, a processor, and a display program for an input method stored in the memory and running on the processor, and the display program for the input method is implemented when executed by the processor The steps of the display method of the input method in any of the above embodiments.
本申请还提出一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质上存储有输入法的显示程序，所述输入法的显示程序被处理器执行时实现如以上任一实施例所述的输入法的显示方法的步骤。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a display program of an input method is stored, and when the display program of the input method is executed by a processor, the input described in any of the above embodiments can be implemented method showing the steps of the method.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如上各种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。The embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer is made to execute the method described in the various possible implementation manners above.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片，包括存储器和处理器，所述存储器用于存储计算机程序，所述处理器用于从所述存储器中调用并运行所述计算机程序，使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如上各种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, including a memory and a processor, where the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that a chip installed with the chip is The apparatus performs the method as described in the various possible embodiments above.
在本申请提供的终端设备和可读存储介质的实施例中，包含了上述输入法的显示方法各实施例的全部技术特征，说明书拓展和解释内容与上述输入法的显示方法的各实施例基本相同，在此不做再赘述。The embodiments of the terminal device and the readable storage medium provided by this application include all the technical features of the above-mentioned embodiments of the input method display method, and the expansion and explanation contents of the description are basically the same as those of the above-mentioned embodiments of the input method display method. are the same, and will not be repeated here.
这里将详细地对示例性实施例进行说明，其示例表示在附图中。下面的描述涉及附图 时，除非另有表示，不同附图中的相同数字表示相同或相似的要素。以下示例性实施例中所描述的实施方式并不代表与本申请相一致的所有实施方式。相反，它们仅是与如所附权利要求书中所详述的、本申请的一些方面相一致的装置和方法的例子。Exemplary embodiments will be described in detail herein, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. When the following description refers to the drawings, the same numbers in different drawings refer to the same or similar elements unless otherwise indicated. The implementations described in the illustrative examples below are not intended to represent all implementations consistent with this application. Rather, they are merely examples of apparatus and methods consistent with some aspects of the present application as recited in the appended claims.
需要说明的是，在本文中，术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含，从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素，而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素，或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下，由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素，并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素，此外，本申请不同实施例中具有同样命名的部件、特征、要素可能具有相同含义，也可能具有不同含义，其具体含义需以其在该具体实施例中的解释或者进一步结合该具体实施例中上下文进行确定。It should be noted that, herein, the terms "comprising", "comprising" or any other variation thereof are intended to encompass non-exclusive inclusion, such that a process, method, article or device comprising a series of elements includes not only those elements, It also includes other elements not expressly listed or inherent to such a process, method, article or apparatus. Without further limitation, an element defined by the phrase "comprises a..." does not preclude the presence of additional identical elements in the process, method, article, or device that includes the element, and further, different implementations of the present application Components, features and elements with the same names in the examples may have the same meaning or may have different meanings, and their specific meanings need to be determined by their explanations in this specific embodiment or further combined with the context in this specific embodiment.
应当理解，尽管在本文可能采用术语第一、第二、第三等来描述各种信息，但这些信息不应限于这些术语。这些术语仅用来将同一类型的信息彼此区分开。例如，在不脱离本文范围的情况下，第一信息也可以被称为第二信息，类似地，第二信息也可以被称为第一信息。取决于语境，如在此所使用的词语"如果"可以被解释成为"在……时"或"当……时"或"响应于确定"。再者，如同在本文中所使用的，单数形式“一”、“一个”和“该”旨在也包括复数形式，除非上下文中有相反的指示。应当进一步理解，术语“包含”、“包括”表明存在所述的特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组，但不排除一个或多个其他特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组的存在、出现或添加。此处使用的术语“或”和“和/或”被解释为包括性的，或意味着任一个或任何组合。本申请使用的术语“或”、“和/或”、“包括以下至少一个”等可被解释为包括性的，或意味着任一个或任何组合。例如，“包括以下至少一个：A、B、C”意味着“以下任一个：A；B；C；A和B；A和C；B和C；A和B和C”，再如，“A、B或C”或者“A、B和/或C”意味着“以下任一个：A；B；C；A和B；A和C；B和C；A和B和C”。仅当元件、功能、步骤或操作的组合在某些方式下内在地互相排斥时，才会出现该定义的例外。It should be understood that although the terms first, second, third, etc. may be used herein to describe various information, such information should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the same type of information from each other. For example, first information may also be referred to as second information, and similarly, second information may also be referred to as first information, without departing from the scope of this document. The word "if" as used herein can be interpreted as "at the time of" or "when" or "in response to determining", depending on the context. Also, as used herein, the singular forms "a," "an," and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context dictates otherwise. It should be further understood that the terms "comprising", "comprising" indicate the presence of stated features, steps, operations, elements, components, items, kinds, and/or groups, but do not exclude one or more other features, steps, operations, The existence, appearance or addition of elements, assemblies, items, categories, and/or groups. The terms "or" and "and/or" as used herein are to be construed to be inclusive or to mean any one or any combination. As used herein, the terms "or", "and/or", "including at least one of the following" and the like may be construed to be inclusive or to mean any one or any combination. For example, "comprising at least one of the following: A, B, C" means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C", for example, " A, B or C" or "A, B and/or C" means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C". Exceptions to this definition arise only when combinations of elements, functions, steps, or operations are inherently mutually exclusive in some way.
应该理解的是，虽然本申请实施例中的流程图中的各个步骤按照箭头的指示依次显示，但是这些步骤并不是必然按照箭头指示的顺序依次执行。除非本文中有明确的说明，这些步骤的执行并没有严格的顺序限制，其可以以其他的顺序执行。而且，图中的至少一部分步骤可以包括多个子步骤或者多个阶段，这些子步骤或者阶段并不必然是在同一时刻执行完成，而是可以在不同的时刻执行，其执行顺序也不必然是依次进行，而是可以与其他步骤或者其他步骤的子步骤或者阶段的至少一部分轮流或者交替地执行。It should be understood that, although the steps in the flowcharts in the embodiments of the present application are displayed in sequence according to the arrows, these steps are not necessarily executed in the sequence indicated by the arrows. Unless explicitly stated herein, the execution of these steps is not strictly limited to the order and may be performed in other orders. Moreover, at least a part of the steps in the figure may include multiple sub-steps or multiple stages. These sub-steps or stages are not necessarily executed at the same time, but may be executed at different times, and the execution order is not necessarily sequential. Instead, it may be performed in turn or alternately with other steps or at least a portion of sub-steps or stages of other steps.
需要说明的是，在本文中，采用了诸如XX、XX等步骤代号，其目的是为了更清楚简要地表述相应内容，不构成顺序上的实质性限制，本领域技术人员在具体实施时，可能会先执行XX后执行XX等，但这些均应在本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that, in this article, step codes such as XX, XX are used, and the purpose is to express the corresponding content more clearly and briefly, and does not constitute a substantial restriction on the order. Those skilled in the art may XX will be executed first and then XX, etc., but these should all fall within the protection scope of this application.
需要说明的是，在本文中，采用了诸如S10、S20等步骤代号，其目的是为了更清楚简要地表述相应内容，不构成顺序上的实质性限制，本领域技术人员在具体实施时，可能会先执行S20后执行S10等，但这些均应在本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that, in this article, step codes such as S10 and S20 are used, the purpose of which is to express the corresponding content more clearly and briefly, and does not constitute a substantial restriction on the sequence. Those skilled in the art may S20 will be executed first and then S10, etc., but these should all fall within the protection scope of this application.
上述本申请实施例序号仅仅为了描述，不代表实施例的优劣。The above-mentioned serial numbers of the embodiments of the present application are only for description, and do not represent the advantages or disadvantages of the embodiments.
通过以上的实施方式的描述，本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到上述实施例方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现，当然也可以通过硬件，但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在如上的一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中，包括若干指令用以使得一台移动终端(可以是手机，计算机，服务器，被控终端，或者网络设备等)执行本申请每个实施例的方法。From the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that the method of the above embodiment can be implemented by means of software plus a necessary general hardware platform, and of course can also be implemented by hardware, but in many cases the former is better implementation. Based on such understanding, the technical solutions of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence or the parts that make contributions to the prior art, and the computer software products are stored in the above storage medium (such as ROM/RAM, magnetic CD, CD), including several instructions to make a mobile terminal (which may be a mobile phone, a computer, a server, a controlled terminal, or a network device, etc.) to execute the method of each embodiment of the present application.
以上仅为本申请的优选实施例，并非因此限制本申请的专利范围，凡是利用本申请说明书及附图内容所作的等效结构或等效流程变换，或直接或间接运用在其他相关的技术领 域，均同理包括在本申请的专利保护范围内。The above are only the preferred embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the patent scope of the present application. Any equivalent structure or equivalent process transformation made by using the contents of the description and drawings of the present application, or directly or indirectly applied in other related technical fields , are similarly included within the scope of patent protection of this application.

Claims (27)

  1. 一种输入法的显示方法，其中，所述输入法的显示方法包括：A display method of an input method, wherein the display method of the input method comprises:
    打开终端设备具有输入键盘的输入显示界面；Open the input display interface of the terminal device with the input keyboard;
    在接收到所述输入显示界面的界面调整信号，所述输入显示界面包括显示区域和/或输入功能区域；以及，After receiving an interface adjustment signal of the input display interface, the input display interface includes a display area and/or an input function area; and,
    根据所述界面调整信号调整所述显示区域和/或输入功能区域，其中，所述输入功能区域随着界面调整信号不同显示至少一种布局显示方式。The display area and/or the input function area are adjusted according to the interface adjustment signal, wherein the input function area displays at least one layout display manner according to the interface adjustment signal.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述根据所述界面调整信号调整输入功能区域的步骤包括：The display method of the input method according to claim 1, wherein the step of adjusting the input function area according to the interface adjustment signal comprises:
    在检测到所述输入功能区域发生变化时，获取快捷功能信息；When it is detected that the input function area has changed, obtain shortcut function information;
    在所述输入功能区域显示所述快捷功能信息和/或输入键盘。The shortcut function information and/or the input keyboard are displayed in the input function area.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述在所述输入功能区域显示所述快捷功能信息和/或输入键盘的步骤包括：The method for displaying an input method according to claim 2, wherein the step of displaying the shortcut function information and/or the input keyboard in the input function area comprises:
    将所述输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域；dividing the input function area into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area;
    在所述输入子显示区域显示所述输入键盘；和/或，displaying the input keyboard in the input sub-display area; and/or,
    在所述功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息。The shortcut function information is displayed in the function sub-display area.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，将所述输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域的步骤包括：The display method of an input method according to claim 3, wherein the step of dividing the input function area into an input sub-display area and/or a function sub-display area comprises:
    获取所述输入功能区域的界面显示信息；其中，所述界面显示信息包括所述输入功能区域的显示位置和/或显示尺寸；以及，acquiring interface display information of the input function area; wherein the interface display information includes the display position and/or display size of the input function area; and,
    根据所述显示界面信息将所述输入功能区域划分为输入子显示区域和/或功能子显示区域。The input function area is divided into input sub-display areas and/or function sub-display areas according to the display interface information.
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述在所述功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息的步骤包括：The method for displaying an input method according to claim 3, wherein the step of displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area comprises:
    根据所述功能子显示区域对应的所述界面显示信息确定所述快捷功能信息的输出比例；Determine the output ratio of the shortcut function information according to the interface display information corresponding to the function sub-display area;
    根据所述输出比例将所述快捷功能信息输出至所述功能子显示区域；或outputting the shortcut function information to the function sub-display area according to the output ratio; or
    在接收到显示调整指令时，根据所述显示调整指令调整所述输入子显示区域和/或所述功能子显示区域的尺寸。When a display adjustment instruction is received, the size of the input sub-display area and/or the function sub-display area is adjusted according to the display adjustment instruction.
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述在所述功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息的步骤之后，还包括：The method for displaying an input method according to claim 3, wherein after the step of displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area, the method further comprises:
    在接收到预设切换指令时，将所述功能子显示区域中的快捷功能信息切换为隐藏的预设快捷功能信息；或，When receiving the preset switching instruction, switch the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area to the hidden preset shortcut function information; or,
    所述输入法的显示方法包括以下至少一种：The display method of the input method includes at least one of the following:
    在接收到第一预设显示指令，将所述输入子显示区域以及所述功能子显示区域之间的显示位置进行调换；After receiving the first preset display instruction, exchange the display positions between the input sub-display area and the function sub-display area;
    在接收到第二预设显示指令，将整个所述输入功能区域切换为所述输入子显示区域；After receiving the second preset display instruction, switch the entire input function area to the input sub-display area;
    在接收到第三预设显示指令，将整个所述输入功能区域切换为所述功能子显示区域；或，After receiving the third preset display instruction, switch the entire input function area to the function sub-display area; or,
    所述快捷功能信息的显示属性为悬浮显示时，所述在所述功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息的步骤之前，包括：When the display attribute of the shortcut function information is floating display, before the step of displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area, the steps include:
    获取所述快捷功能信息的第一显示尺寸；obtaining the first display size of the shortcut function information;
    获取所述功能子显示区域的第二显示尺寸；obtaining the second display size of the functional sub-display area;
    在所述第二显示尺寸大于所述第一显示尺寸时，执行在所述输入功能区域的功能子显示区域显示所述快捷功能信息的步骤。When the second display size is larger than the first display size, the step of displaying the shortcut function information in the function sub-display area of the input function area is performed.
  7. 一种输入法的显示方法，应用于移动终端，所述输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：A method for displaying an input method, which is applied to a mobile terminal, and the method for displaying an input method includes the following steps:
    打开终端设备具有输入键盘的输入显示界面；Open the input display interface of the terminal device with the input keyboard;
    获取基于输入显示界面触发的解锁操作；以及，Get the unlock operation triggered based on the input display interface; and,
    根据所述解锁操作和预设解锁规则触发预设密码和显示密码，所述显示密码显示于锁屏界面上，其中，所述预设密码与所述显示密码不相同。The preset password and the displayed password are triggered according to the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule, and the displayed password is displayed on the lock screen interface, wherein the preset password and the displayed password are different.
  8. 如权利要求7所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述显示密码与所述预设密码的属性不同和/或数量级不同和/或样式不同和/或内容不同。The method for displaying an input method according to claim 7, wherein the displayed password is different from the preset password in attribute and/or magnitude and/or style and/or content.
  9. 如权利要求7所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述显示密码为持续显示或间断显示或部分显示。The display method of the input method according to claim 7, wherein the displayed password is continuous display, intermittent display or partial display.
  10. 如权利要求7所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述预设解锁规则对应每一个密码字符的输入方式。The display method of the input method according to claim 7, wherein the preset unlocking rule corresponds to the input method of each password character.
  11. 如权利要求7所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述根据所述解锁操作和预设解锁规则触发预设密码和显示密码的步骤之后，包括：The method for displaying an input method according to claim 7, wherein after the step of triggering the preset password and displaying the password according to the unlocking operation and the preset unlocking rule, the method comprises:
    若与所述解锁操作对应的密码不为预设密码则判定输入错误并记录输入错误次数；以及，If the password corresponding to the unlocking operation is not the preset password, determine the input error and record the number of input errors; and,
    当所述错误次数达到预设错误次数时，切换为简易模式并输出切换提示。When the number of errors reaches the preset number of errors, it switches to the simple mode and outputs a switching prompt.
  12. 如权利要求7至11中任一项所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述获取基于预设界面触发的解锁操作的步骤之前，包括：The method for displaying an input method according to any one of claims 7 to 11, wherein before the step of acquiring an unlocking operation triggered based on a preset interface, the method comprises:
    检测当前环境是否为安全环境；以及，detect whether the current environment is a secure environment; and,
    若所述当前环境不是安全环境，则执行获取基于预设界面触发的解锁操作的步骤。If the current environment is not a safe environment, the step of acquiring the unlocking operation triggered based on the preset interface is performed.
  13. 如权利要求7所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，包括：当输入密码至少两次输入错误时，切换至原使用模式。The method for displaying an input method according to claim 7, comprising: when the password is entered incorrectly at least twice, switching to the original use mode.
  14. 一种输入法的显示方法，其中，所述输入法的显示方法包括以下步骤：A display method of an input method, wherein the display method of the input method comprises the following steps:
    打开终端设备具有输入键盘的输入显示界面；Open the input display interface of the terminal device with the input keyboard;
    基于所述输入显示界面检测到解锁操作时，获取当前使用模式并根据所述解锁操作触发显示密码；When an unlocking operation is detected based on the input display interface, acquiring the current usage mode and triggering the display of the password according to the unlocking operation;
    若所述当前使用模式为预设模式，则输出所述显示密码；和/或，If the current use mode is a preset mode, output the displayed password; and/or,
    若所述当前使用模式不为预设模式，则不输出所述显示密码。If the current use mode is not the preset mode, the displayed password is not output.
  15. 如权利要求14所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述预设模式对应一预设解锁规则和显示密码，根据所述预设解锁规则输出所述显示密码；或，The display method of the input method according to claim 14, wherein the preset mode corresponds to a preset unlocking rule and a display password, and the display password is output according to the preset unlocking rule; or,
    所述预设模式对应一和显示密码，根据所述解锁操作输出所述显示密码。The preset mode corresponds to a display password, and the display password is output according to the unlocking operation.
  16. 如权利要求14所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，在所述预设模式下，所述显示密码与所述预设密码不同。The display method of the input method according to claim 14, wherein, in the preset mode, the displayed password is different from the preset password.
  17. 一种输入法的显示方法，其中，所述输入法的显示方法包括：A display method of an input method, wherein the display method of the input method comprises:
    打开终端设备具有输入键盘的输入显示界面；Open the input display interface of the terminal device with the input keyboard;
    于所述输入显示界面输入的待发送信息；The information to be sent inputted on the input display interface;
    于所述输入显示界面选择目标发送应用；以及，Selecting a target sending application on the input display interface; and,
    将所述待发送信息发送至所述目标发送应用。Send the to-be-sent information to the target sending application.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述于所述输入显示界面选择一目标发送应用的步骤包括：The display method of the input method according to claim 17, wherein the step of selecting a target sending application on the input display interface comprises:
    输出发送选择界面，所述发送选择界面包括至少一发送应用；outputting a sending selection interface, the sending selection interface includes at least one sending application;
    在所述发送选择界面接收到选择指令时，根据所述选择指令确定所述目标发送应用。When the sending selection interface receives a selection instruction, the target sending application is determined according to the selection instruction.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述发送选择界面内显示至少一所述发送应用的标识信息；或，The method for displaying an input method according to claim 18, wherein the sending selection interface displays at least one identification information of the sending application; or,
    所述发送选择界面的输出方式包括以下至少一种：The output mode of the sending selection interface includes at least one of the following:
    所述发送选择界面显示于所述输入显示界面；The sending selection interface is displayed on the input display interface;
    所述发送选择界面通过预设方式触发后显示于所述输入显示界面；或，The sending selection interface is triggered by a preset method and displayed on the input display interface; or,
    所述输出发送选择界面的步骤之后，所述输入法的显示方法还包括：After the step of outputting the sending selection interface, the method for displaying the input method further includes:
    在通过所述发送选择界面接收到切换显示指令时，获取当前应用的应用信息；When receiving the switching display instruction through the sending selection interface, obtain application information of the current application;
    将所述应用信息切换显示于所述切换显示指令对应的位置。Switching and displaying the application information at a position corresponding to the switching display instruction.
  20. 根据权利要求17所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述将所述待发送信息发送至所述目标发送应用的步骤之后，包括：The method for displaying an input method according to claim 17, wherein after the step of sending the information to be sent to the target sending application, the method comprises:
    接收到消息后，在预设位置显示提示信息；After receiving the message, the prompt information will be displayed in the preset position;
    添加所述消息的未读标记。Add an unread mark for the message.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述添加所述信息的未读标记的步骤之后，所述输入法的显示方法包括：The display method of the input method according to claim 20, wherein after the step of adding the unread mark of the information, the display method of the input method comprises:
    获取与所述目标发送应用对应的所述消息中带有所述未读标记的消息数量；obtaining the number of messages with the unread mark in the messages corresponding to the target sending application;
    将所述消息数量输出显示于所述输入显示界面中与所述目标发送应用对应的预设位置。Outputting and displaying the number of messages in a preset position corresponding to the target sending application in the input display interface.
  22. 根据权利要求20所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述预设位置包括如下至少一处：The display method of the input method according to claim 20, wherein the preset position includes at least one of the following:
    所述输入显示界面；the input display interface;
    对应的目标发送应用的图标或者名称上；On the icon or name of the corresponding target sending application;
    跳转到目标发送应用显示界面；Jump to the target sending application display interface;
    通讯应用程序的输入界面；The input interface of the communication application;
    终端显示界面。Terminal display interface.
  23. 一种输入法的显示方法，其中，所述输入法的显示方法包括：A display method of an input method, wherein the display method of the input method comprises:
    打开终端设备具有输入键盘的输入显示界面；Open the input display interface of the terminal device with the input keyboard;
    于所述输入显示界面，选择目标发送应用；In the input display interface, select the target sending application;
    所述输入显示界面根据所述目标发送应用显示对应的待输入样式；以及，The input display interface displays the corresponding to-be-input style according to the target sending application; and,
    于所述待输入样式中输入待发送消息并发送。Input the message to be sent in the to-be-input style and send it.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述目标发送应用可是邮件或短信或即时通讯应用，每个所述目标发送应用对应的待输入样式不同。The method for displaying an input method according to claim 23, wherein the target sending application may be an email, a short message or an instant messaging application, and each target sending application corresponds to a different style to be input.
  25. 根据权23所述的输入法的显示方法，其中，所述输入显示界面根据所述目标发送应用显示对应的待输入样式，显示方式可以是切换至所述待输入样式，也可是在现有输入显示界面增加所述待输入样式；或，The display method of the input method according to claim 23, wherein the input display interface displays the corresponding to-be-input style according to the target sending application, and the display mode can be switched to the to-be-input style, or can be displayed in the existing input style. The display interface adds the to-be-input style; or,
    可选择至少两个目标发送应用，分别显示每个目标发送应用对应的待输入样式。At least two target sending applications can be selected, and the to-be-input styles corresponding to each target sending application can be displayed respectively.
  26. 一种终端设备，其中，所述终端设备包括：存储器、处理器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的计算机程序，其中：所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求1所述的输入法的显示方法的步骤。A terminal device, wherein the terminal device includes: a memory, a processor, and a computer program stored on the memory and executable on the processor, wherein: when the computer program is executed by the processor The steps of realizing the display method of the input method as claimed in claim 1.
  27. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其中，所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1所述的输入法的显示方法的步骤。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the display method of the input method according to claim 1 are implemented.
PCT/CN2020/130908 2020-08-11 2020-11-23 Display method for input method, and terminal device and computer-readable storage medium WO2022032925A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (12)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010798732.5A CN111953846A (en) 2020-08-11 2020-08-11 Interface layout adjusting method, terminal device and computer-readable storage medium
CN202010804614.0 2020-08-11
CN202010804614.0A CN111949194B (en) 2020-08-11 2020-08-11 Character input method, terminal device and computer readable storage medium
CN202010798732.5 2020-08-11
CN202010803797.4A CN111931155A (en) 2020-08-11 2020-08-11 Verification code input method, verification code input equipment and storage medium
CN202010803797.4 2020-08-11
CN202010811210.4 2020-08-11
CN202010811348.4 2020-08-11
CN202010811209.1 2020-08-11
CN202010811348.4A CN111949177B (en) 2020-08-11 2020-08-11 Information transmission method, terminal device, and computer-readable storage medium
CN202010811209.1A CN111949969A (en) 2020-08-11 2020-08-11 Keyboard style switching method and device and readable storage medium
CN202010811210.4A CN111949957A (en) 2020-08-11 2020-08-11 Privacy protection method, device and storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022032925A1 true WO2022032925A1 (en) 2022-02-17

Family

ID=80247640

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/130908 WO2022032925A1 (en) 2020-08-11 2020-11-23 Display method for input method, and terminal device and computer-readable storage medium

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022032925A1 (en)

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103336650A (en) * 2013-06-05 2013-10-02 百度在线网络技术（北京）有限公司 Method and device for adjusting input method panel of mobile terminal
CN103577033A (en) * 2012-08-07 2014-02-12 百度在线网络技术（北京）有限公司 Method and system for setting input method panel
CN104091128A (en) * 2014-07-08 2014-10-08 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Terminal
CN105429861A (en) * 2015-12-17 2016-03-23 宁波优而雅电器有限公司 Message sending device based on application levels
CN106355078A (en) * 2016-09-12 2017-01-25 上海凌翼动力科技有限公司 Intelligent password protecting system based on multifunctional-key behavior recognition
CN107729160A (en) * 2017-09-29 2018-02-23 努比亚技术有限公司 Application control method, mobile terminal and computer-readable recording medium
EP3428820A1 (en) * 2016-03-30 2019-01-16 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Terminal voice unlocking method and terminal
CN110084009A (en) * 2019-04-22 2019-08-02 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 Digital unlocking method, device, storage medium and mobile terminal
CN111949177A (en) * 2020-08-11 2020-11-17 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Information transmission method, terminal device, and computer-readable storage medium
CN111953846A (en) * 2020-08-11 2020-11-17 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Interface layout adjusting method, terminal device and computer-readable storage medium
CN111949957A (en) * 2020-08-11 2020-11-17 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Privacy protection method, device and storage medium

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103577033A (en) * 2012-08-07 2014-02-12 百度在线网络技术（北京）有限公司 Method and system for setting input method panel
CN103336650A (en) * 2013-06-05 2013-10-02 百度在线网络技术（北京）有限公司 Method and device for adjusting input method panel of mobile terminal
CN104091128A (en) * 2014-07-08 2014-10-08 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Terminal
CN105429861A (en) * 2015-12-17 2016-03-23 宁波优而雅电器有限公司 Message sending device based on application levels
EP3428820A1 (en) * 2016-03-30 2019-01-16 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Terminal voice unlocking method and terminal
CN106355078A (en) * 2016-09-12 2017-01-25 上海凌翼动力科技有限公司 Intelligent password protecting system based on multifunctional-key behavior recognition
CN107729160A (en) * 2017-09-29 2018-02-23 努比亚技术有限公司 Application control method, mobile terminal and computer-readable recording medium
CN110084009A (en) * 2019-04-22 2019-08-02 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 Digital unlocking method, device, storage medium and mobile terminal
CN111949177A (en) * 2020-08-11 2020-11-17 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Information transmission method, terminal device, and computer-readable storage medium
CN111953846A (en) * 2020-08-11 2020-11-17 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Interface layout adjusting method, terminal device and computer-readable storage medium
CN111949957A (en) * 2020-08-11 2020-11-17 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 Privacy protection method, device and storage medium

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021104365A1 (en) Object sharing method and electronic device
EP2981104B1 (en) Apparatus and method for providing information
CN108037893B (en) Display control method and device of flexible screen and computer readable storage medium
WO2020151519A1 (en) Information input method, terminal device, and computer-readable storage medium
CN108009136B (en) Message correction method, mobile terminal and computer readable storage medium
CN108829476A (en) A kind of message display method, terminal and storage medium
WO2019037359A1 (en) Split-screen display method, device and terminal
JP2015535626A (en) Gesture conversation processing method, apparatus, terminal device, program, and recording medium
KR20150128303A (en) Method and apparatus for controlling displays
WO2020238463A1 (en) Message processing method and terminal
CN109815676B (en) Privacy space operation method and terminal equipment
CN109085990A (en) A kind of gestural control method, mobile terminal and computer readable storage medium
CN108170351A (en) A kind of method for information display, terminal and computer readable storage medium
WO2021083088A1 (en) Message display method and terminal device
CN107704630A (en) File operation method, mobile terminal and storage medium
US20120242582A1 (en) Apparatus and method for improving character input function in mobile terminal
CN112181233B (en) Message processing method, intelligent terminal and computer readable storage medium
KR20220158794A (en) Information presentation methods, electronic devices and storage media
CN108228034A (en) Control method, mobile terminal and the computer readable storage medium of mobile terminal
CN111813493B (en) Method of operating component, terminal, and storage medium
CN110007822A (en) A kind of interface display method and terminal device
CN108388354A (en) A kind of display methods and mobile terminal in input method candidate area domain
CN112363648A (en) Shortcut display method, terminal and computer storage medium
CN110012159A (en) Double screen terminal screen display methods, terminal and computer readable storage medium
CN108536368B (en) Key using method, terminal and computer readable storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20949418

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: NOTING OF LOSS OF RIGHTS PURSUANT TO RULE 112(1) EPC (EPO FORM 1205A DATED 27/06/2023)

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20949418

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1